23R1476 - 0 - M039-H - Info Only PDF

OPERATION, SERVICE AND PARTS MANUAL
RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

SERIAL NUMBERS 12R4751-MRM384
RATED CAPACITY 2500 kg
REVISION STATUS Rev 0
PROJECT Toquepala
CLIENT Southern Peru Copper Corporation
PURCHASE ORDER M3:150141-M039
EQUIPMENT NUMBER 293200-LH-001
PART NUMBER 23R1476
Operation, Service, and Parts Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents ............................................................................................................................................. 3
Preamble............................................................................................................................................................ 9
Copyright © ......................................................................................................................................................... 9
Definitions ........................................................................................................................................................... 9
Intellectual Property .......................................................................................................................................... 10
Further Information ........................................................................................................................................... 10
Revision Status ................................................................................................................................................. 11
Access to Electronic Manuals .......................................................................................................................... 11
Translations ...................................................................................................................................................... 11
1. Safety................................................................................................................................................ 13
1.1 Operational Limitations ..................................................................................................................... 13
1.2 Training ............................................................................................................................................. 13
1.3 Compliance Requirements ................................................................................................................ 14
1.4 Disclaimer ......................................................................................................................................... 14
1.5 Warnings, Cautions and Notes ......................................................................................................... 15
1.5.1 Warnings ........................................................................................................................................... 15
1.5.2 Cautions ............................................................................................................................................ 16
1.5.3 Notes ................................................................................................................................................. 16
1.6 Personal Protective Equipment ......................................................................................................... 16
1.7 Falling Object Protection ................................................................................................................... 17
2. Specifications .................................................................................................................................. 19
2.1 Identification ...................................................................................................................................... 19
2.2 Machine Vendor Data Drawings ....................................................................................................... 19
2.3 Machine Details ................................................................................................................................. 20
2.4 Options Supplied ............................................................................................................................... 21
2.5 Sound Levels Assessment ................................................................................................................ 22
3. Description ...................................................................................................................................... 25
3.1 Machine Safety Features .................................................................................................................. 26
3.1.1 Emergency Stops .............................................................................................................................. 26
3.1.2 Operator's Seat Belt .......................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.3 Brakes ............................................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.4 Tiedown Equipment .......................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.5 Imminent Motion Warning ................................................................................................................. 26
3.1.6 Boom Overload Sensors ................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.7 Console on turntable Enabler Button ................................................................................................ 27
3.1.8 Base Enable Button .......................................................................................................................... 27
3.1.9 Baseframe Console Lockout Plate .................................................................................................... 27
3.1.10 Visual and Audible Alarm .................................................................................................................. 27
3.1.11 Hydraulic Oil - Over Pressure Protection .......................................................................................... 27
3.1.12 Hydraulic Oil - Low Level Protection ................................................................................................. 27
3.1.13 Hydraulic Oil - High Temperature Protection .................................................................................... 27
3.1.14 Counterbalance Valves ..................................................................................................................... 28
3.1.15 Hydraulic Hose Coverings................................................................................................................. 28
RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine 3

12R4751-MRM384
Copyright © Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd 2017
3.1.16 Hydraulic Controls ............................................................................................................................ 28
3.1.17 Electrical Isolation ............................................................................................................................ 28
3.1.18 Protective Covers ............................................................................................................................. 28
3.1.19 Lighting ............................................................................................................................................. 28
3.1.20 Power Failure ................................................................................................................................... 29
3.1.21 Liner Release Enable Button............................................................................................................ 29
3.1.22 Liner Release Interlock Fault Indicator ............................................................................................. 29
3.1.23 Liner Release Safety Bar ................................................................................................................. 29
3.1.24 Radio Remote Control ...................................................................................................................... 29
3.1.25 Joystick Controls .............................................................................................................................. 29
3.2 Main Parts of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine....................................................................... 30
3.3 Baseframe ........................................................................................................................................ 32
3.4 Front Tiedown Equipment ................................................................................................................ 33
3.5 Rear Tiedown Equipment ................................................................................................................. 34
3.6 Front Basedrive ................................................................................................................................ 35
3.7 Rear Basedrive ................................................................................................................................. 36
3.8 Outer Beam ...................................................................................................................................... 37
3.9 Inner Beam ....................................................................................................................................... 38
3.10 Rotary Union..................................................................................................................................... 39
3.11 Turntable .......................................................................................................................................... 40
3.12 Operator's Console ........................................................................................................................... 41
3.13 Boom ................................................................................................................................................ 42
3.14 Boom Raise-Lower Cylinders ........................................................................................................... 43
3.15 Grapple ............................................................................................................................................. 44
3.16 Grapple Tool ..................................................................................................................................... 45
3.17 Junction Box 2 .................................................................................................................................. 46
3.18 Hydraulic Mount Cabinet .................................................................................................................. 47
3.19 Linercart............................................................................................................................................ 48
3.20 Linercart Drive .................................................................................................................................. 49
3.21 Main Control Cabinet ........................................................................................................................ 50
3.22 Hydraulic Tank.................................................................................................................................. 51
3.23 Hydraulic Power Pack ...................................................................................................................... 52
3.23.1 Electric Motors .................................................................................................................................. 54
3.23.2 Hydraulic Pressure Filter .................................................................................................................. 55
3.24 Platforms and Removable Stairs ...................................................................................................... 56
3.25 Female Decontactor ......................................................................................................................... 57
3.26 Cable Reeler..................................................................................................................................... 58
3.27 Optional Machine Covers ................................................................................................................. 59
3.28 Lifting Kit ........................................................................................................................................... 60
4. Operations....................................................................................................................................... 61
4.1 Training of Personnel ....................................................................................................................... 61
4.2 Lifting the Machine ........................................................................................................................... 62
4.3 Operational Procedures ................................................................................................................... 64
4.4 Inspections Before Use .................................................................................................................... 65
4 RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

12R4751-MRM384
4.5 Controls on the Main Control Cabinet ............................................................................................... 66

4.6 Connect Site Power Supply .............................................................................................................. 68
4.7 Emergency Stops .............................................................................................................................. 69
4.7.1 Testing Emergency Stops ................................................................................................................. 70
4.8 Starting the Machine ......................................................................................................................... 73
4.9 Stopping the Machine ....................................................................................................................... 75
4.10 Prepare the Site and Mill ................................................................................................................... 76
4.11 Transport Configuration .................................................................................................................... 77
4.11.1 Baseframe Console ........................................................................................................................... 79
4.12 Manoeuvring the Machine ................................................................................................................. 87
4.12.1 Steering Flexibility ............................................................................................................................. 88
4.13 Mill Entry ........................................................................................................................................... 89
4.13.1 Mill Entry Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 89
4.13.2 Initial Machine Entry .......................................................................................................................... 91
4.13.3 Tie Down the Machine ...................................................................................................................... 92
4.13.4 Insert the Outer Beam ....................................................................................................................... 93
4.14 Relining Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 95
4.14.1 Attach the Stairs ................................................................................................................................ 95
4.14.2 Observer's Pendant .......................................................................................................................... 96
4.14.3 Set Up the Operator's Controls ......................................................................................................... 97
4.14.4 Checks Before Commencing Relining Operations ........................................................................... 99
4.15 Mill Relining Operations .................................................................................................................. 100
4.15.1 Relining Machine Operation ............................................................................................................ 100
4.16 Operator's Controls ......................................................................................................................... 101
4.16.1 Operator's Hydraulic Controls ......................................................................................................... 101
4.16.2 Raising and Lowering the Hydraulic Control Levers ....................................................................... 104
4.16.3 Ancillary Panel ................................................................................................................................ 105
4.16.4 Joystick Controls ............................................................................................................................. 107
4.17 Radio Remote Control..................................................................................................................... 111
4.17.1 Activate the Remote Controll .......................................................................................................... 115
4.17.2 Routine Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 116
4.17.3 Battery Replacement....................................................................................................................... 116
4.18 Liner Release Enable System ......................................................................................................... 117
4.18.1 Main Parts of the Liner Release Enable System ............................................................................ 118
4.18.2 Liner release enable radio .............................................................................................................. 119
4.18.3 How to Release a Liner from the Grapple Tool .............................................................................. 120
4.18.4 Fault Conditions in the Liner-Release-Enable System ................................................................... 121
4.18.5 Checks of the Liner-Release-Enable System ................................................................................. 122
4.19 Linercart Operation ......................................................................................................................... 124
4.19.1 Linercart Pendant ............................................................................................................................ 125
4.20 Grapple Tool and Liner Pinning Operation ..................................................................................... 127
4.20.1 Liner Release Interlock Fault Indicator ........................................................................................... 129
4.20.2 Liner Interface Attachments ............................................................................................................ 130
4.20.3 Liner Reaction Foot Replacement .................................................................................................. 133
4.21 Emergency Hose Changeout .......................................................................................................... 134

12R4751-MRM384
4.22 Incremental Rotation of the Mill ...................................................................................................... 134
4.23 Incremental Rotation - High Residual Charge Level ...................................................................... 136
4.24 Removing the Machine from the Mill .............................................................................................. 136
4.25 Manoeuvre the Machine away from the Mill ................................................................................... 138
4.26 Machine Inspections after Use ....................................................................................................... 138
4.27 Access Restrictions ........................................................................................................................ 138
4.28 Machine Storage ............................................................................................................................ 139
4.29 Machine Isolation ........................................................................................................................... 140
5. Lubrication, Inspection and Servicing ....................................................................................... 141
5.1 Standard Maintenance Practices ................................................................................................... 141
5.1.1 Safety during Inspection, Repair and Servicing ............................................................................. 142
5.1.2 Torque Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 143
5.1.3 General Reassembly Practices ...................................................................................................... 145
5.1.4 Wire Rope Care and Service .......................................................................................................... 146
5.2 Lubrication ...................................................................................................................................... 148
5.2.1 Lubrication Requirements .............................................................................................................. 148
5.2.2 Lubrication and Inspection Symbols .............................................................................................. 148
5.2.3 Lubricant Specifications ................................................................................................................. 149
5.2.4 Oil Sampling and Analysis .............................................................................................................. 149
5.2.5 Lubrication Summary ..................................................................................................................... 150
5.2.6 Environmental Considerations ....................................................................................................... 152
5.3 Lubrication and Inspection Forms .................................................................................................. 152
5.4 Detailed Lubrication Schedule ........................................................................................................ 154
5.4.1 Pressure Filter Lubrication ............................................................................................................. 154
5.4.2 Hydraulic Tank Lubrication ............................................................................................................. 156
5.4.3 Slew Motor and Gearbox Lubrication ............................................................................................. 158
5.4.4 Turntable Lubrication ...................................................................................................................... 160
5.4.5 Front Basedrive Lubrication ........................................................................................................... 162
5.4.6 Rear Basedrive Lubrication ............................................................................................................ 164
5.4.7 Beam Lubrication ........................................................................................................................... 166
5.4.8 Boom Lubrication ........................................................................................................................... 168
5.4.9 Electric Motor Lubrication ............................................................................................................... 170
5.4.10 Grapple Lubrication ........................................................................................................................ 171
5.5 Inspection and Service ................................................................................................................... 172
5.5.1 Storage ........................................................................................................................................... 172
5.5.2 Corrosive Environment Maintenance ............................................................................................. 172
5.5.3 Component Maintenance Intervals ................................................................................................ 173
5.5.4 Upgrades or Modifications to Equipment ....................................................................................... 173
5.5.5 Obsolescence of Spares - Overhaul Periods ................................................................................. 173
5.5.6 Service Limits ................................................................................................................................. 174
5.5.7 Scheduled Inspections ................................................................................................................... 174
5.5.8 Maintenance Personnel .................................................................................................................. 175
5.6 Detailed Inspection Requirements ................................................................................................. 175
5.6.1 Grapple Tool Inspection ................................................................................................................. 175

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.2 Grapple Inspection .......................................................................................................................... 179

5.6.3 Tiedown Equipment Inspection ....................................................................................................... 182
5.6.4 Boom Inspection ............................................................................................................................. 186
5.6.5 Boom Cylinder Inspection ............................................................................................................... 188
5.6.6 Turntable Inspection........................................................................................................................ 190
5.6.7 Console on Turntable Inspection .................................................................................................... 194
5.6.8 Junction Box 2 Inspection ............................................................................................................... 196
5.6.9 Inner Beam Inspection .................................................................................................................... 198
5.6.10 Outer Beam Inspection ................................................................................................................... 200
5.6.11 Baseframe Inspection ..................................................................................................................... 202
5.6.12 Linercart Inspection ......................................................................................................................... 204
5.6.13 Linercart Drive Inspection ............................................................................................................... 206
5.6.14 Hydraulic Power Pack Inspection ................................................................................................... 208
5.6.15 Electrical System Inspection ........................................................................................................... 210
5.6.16 Hydraulic Tank Inspection ............................................................................................................... 213
5.6.17 Front Basedrive Inspection ............................................................................................................. 215
5.6.18 Rear Basedrive Inspection .............................................................................................................. 217
5.6.19 Platforms and Safety Rails Inspection ............................................................................................ 219
5.6.20 Mill Relining Machine Function Tests ............................................................................................. 221
5.7 Wire Rope Tension and Adjustments ............................................................................................. 223
5.7.1 Linercart Rope Tension and Adjustment......................................................................................... 223
5.7.2 Boom Rope Tension and Adjustment ............................................................................................. 225
5.8 Specific Bolts Requiring Torques to be Checked ........................................................................... 229
5.8.1 Slew Ring Bearing Bolts.................................................................................................................. 229
5.8.2 Extension Arms to Baseframe Bolts ............................................................................................... 230
5.9 Non Destructive Examination .......................................................................................................... 231
5.9.1 NDE Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 231
5.9.2 NDE Testing Methods ..................................................................................................................... 231
5.9.3 Visual Examination .......................................................................................................................... 232
5.10 NDE Inspections ............................................................................................................................. 233
5.10.1 Grapple NDE ................................................................................................................................... 234
5.10.2 Grapple Tool NDE ........................................................................................................................... 236
5.10.3 Tiedown Equipment NDE ................................................................................................................ 238
5.10.4 Boom Cylinder NDE ........................................................................................................................ 240
5.11 Recommended NDE Inspections .................................................................................................... 242
5.11.1 Baseframe NDE .............................................................................................................................. 242
5.11.2 Beams NDE .................................................................................................................................... 244
5.11.3 Boom NDE ...................................................................................................................................... 246
5.11.4 Turntable NDE ................................................................................................................................ 248
6. Troubleshooting Guide................................................................................................................. 251
6.1 Safety Precautions for Hydraulic Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 252
6.2 Diagnostic Flow Charts and Guidelines .......................................................................................... 252
6.2.1 Starting Diagnostic - Flow Chart 6-1 ............................................................................................... 253
6.2.2 Machine Does not Start - Flow Chart 6-2........................................................................................ 254
6.2.3 Machine Will not Start - Flow Chart 6-3 .......................................................................................... 255

12R4751-MRM384
6.2.4 Check for Momentary Lowering/Increasing of Supply Voltage ...................................................... 256
6.2.5 Check Indicators ............................................................................................................................. 256
6.2.6 Check E-Stops................................................................................................................................ 256
6.2.7 Check Oil Level .............................................................................................................................. 257
6.2.8 Check Oil Temperature .................................................................................................................. 257
6.2.9 Check Electric Motor Overload Thermal Relay .............................................................................. 257
6.2.10 Check Site Power Outlet and Relay Contacts ................................................................................ 258
6.2.11 Machine Starts - Slow or Down on Power - Flow Chart 6-4 ........................................................... 259
6.2.12 Hydraulic Troubleshooting - Flow Chart 6-5 ................................................................................... 260
6.2.13 Hydraulic Troubleshooting - Flow Chart 6-6 ................................................................................... 261
6.3 Danfoss PVG32 Control Valves ..................................................................................................... 262
6.3.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................... 262
6.3.2 Troubleshooting a PVG Valve ........................................................................................................ 262
7. Vendor Data and Spare Parts ...................................................................................................... 265
7.1 Vendor Data Drawings ................................................................................................................... 265
7.2 Assembly Drawings for Spare Parts or Maintenance..................................................................... 265
7.3 List of Assembly Drawings ............................................................................................................. 266
8. Electrical and Hydraulic Schematics ......................................................................................... 269
8.1 Schematics ..................................................................................................................................... 269
8.2 List of Electrical Schematics ........................................................................................................... 269
8.3 List of Hydraulic Schematics .......................................................................................................... 270
Appendixes ................................................................................................................................................... 271
Appendix A: Pre Reline Inspection ............................................................................................................ 273
Russell Mill Relining Machine Pre Reline Inspection Blank........................................................................... 275
Action List ...................................................................................................................................................... 277
Appendix B: Joystick Pendant COT Enable Control System User Information .................................... 279
Joystick Pendant COT Enable Control System User Information ................................................................. 281
Appendix C: Engineering Drawings........................................................................................................... 291

12R4751-MRM384
Preamble
Copyright ©
Copyright © Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd 2017.
The contents of this manual are the copyright of Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd, and may not be
reproduced, adapted, communicated or stored, in whole or in part by any means without written permission
from Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd
Except as otherwise agreed in the Contract Terms and Conditions, while every care has been taken to
ensure the accuracy of information contained in this manual, no liability (however caused, including the
negligence of Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd) will be accepted for any errors or omissions. Due to
ongoing product development, Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd reserves the right to change without
notice, any product details including specification, appearance and performance.
Excerpts from publications by component manufacturers are reproduced in this manual with the consent of
those suppliers. Graphical illustrations used in this manual may be representative of the general type of
machine rather than this specific machine. Refer to the engineering drawings in Chapter 7 and Chapter 8
for authoritative data relevant to this machine.
Notwithstanding anything in this document, nothing in this document imposes any obligations on Russell
Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd except as expressly contemplated by the Contract Terms and Conditions, if any.
Definitions
In this document:
Russell Mineral Equipment and RME means Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd ACN 010 708 406.
RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine; RUSSELL 7; and Mill Relining Machine means the mill relining machine
serial number 12R4751-MRM384 supplied by Russell Mineral Equipment to Southern Peru Copper
Corporation for the Toquepala mine site.
Contract Terms and Conditions means Russell Mineral Equipment’s standard terms and conditions, except
where otherwise agreed.

12R4751-MRM384
Intellectual Property
Russell Mineral Equipment owns all intellectual property (including copyright and patents) in the RUSSELL 7
Mill Relining Machine and any materials or documents supplied with the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine
including this manual. Nothing in this document grants users of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine any
intellectual property rights (including copyright and patent rights) of Russell Mineral Equipment. The
RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine must only be used in the manner agreed with Russell Mineral Equipment.
Further Information
If you have any queries about the equipment, please contact:
RME’s ASSET SUPPORT PLATFORM offers global support for RME’s customers and their items of RME
Mill Relining System equipment. Please contact support@rmeGlobal.com http://www.rmeGlobal.com.
We offer a 24 hour Help Hotline for each of our global regions:

12R4751-MRM384
Revision Status
The printed version of this manual was issued on Monday, 15 May 2017. It is not controlled, updated or
revised by Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd.
The USB business card version of the manual is a copy of the printed version and is also not controlled,
updated or revised.
Controlled and revised manuals for this RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine may be accessed by using the
Russell Mineral Equipment website.
Access to Electronic Manuals
This manual is provided in Portable Document Format (.pdf) which may be downloaded and printed or used
electronically.
Access to electronic manuals is gained via the Client Login Portal of the Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd
website: http://www.rmeGlobal.com. An account for each individual accessing the manuals for each mine
site is required.
If you do not have a Client Account, click on the "Request Account" button in the Client Login Portal, and
complete the details on the form. Your request will be verified by Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd and full
access to your manuals will be provided as soon as possible.
If you do have a Client Account with the Client Login Portal your manuals will be available as per contractual
agreements as agreed in writing with Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd
Translations
Whilst Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd has exercised its best efforts to provide an accurate translation of
the text of the document, Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd does not warrant the accuracy or reliability of
the information translated and will not be liable for any losses caused by reliance on such translated
information. If any questions or issues arise out of the accuracy of the translated information in the non-
English translated document, please refer to the English version of the document, which is the document that
officially applies to the contract.

12R4751-MRM384
PLEASE - THINK SAFETY, so that YOU CAN OPERATE WITH SAFETY.

12R4751-MRM384
1. Safety
Mill relining operations are dangerous, this safety summary supplies information and warnings to personnel
with regard to some of the hazards and risks of using RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine during reline
operations.
All personnel must be trained and understand the use of RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine before use.
Information about the safety features of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine are specified in this manual.
1.1 Operational Limitations
This RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine is to be used solely for the purpose of BALL Mill Liner
Placement.
This RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine is a powerful hydraulic manipulator with seven axes of mill relining
motion and another two functions for machine transport. It must be connected to a 480 V 60 Hz 3 phase
site electric power supply and must never be allowed to pull tight, or drive over, its electrical trailing lead.
It has a three-section boom that may be raised or lowered, extended or retracted and slewed in a 360°
continuous motion to the right or left. The boom has attached at its outer end a grapple and grapple tool,
which interfaces with new liners. The grapple allows precise placement in relation to the shell of the mill, so
that liner attachment bolts can be fitted and tightened. The grapple tool also has a conventional hook for
slinging of new or worn liners.
This RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine may only be used in a mill matching the provided specifications. Its
baseframe height and range of motions are only suitable for entry into this type of BALL mill.
Under no circumstances is the machine or its components to be used for the dislodgement of worn liners, or
for forcing new liners into position. The RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine is not to be used as a towing or
carrying vehicle. Any or all of these actions may damage the machine and will void any warranty.
1.2 Training
RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine must only be operated by trained personnel. Russell Mineral Equipment
supplies familiarisation training on site, during commissioning of the equipment.
Russell Mineral Equipment supplies personnel training in the use of RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine.
Personnel are approved or certified to operate RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine safely and efficiently when
training is completed successfully. Contact RME for information.

12R4751-MRM384
1.3 Compliance Requirements
It is a Russell Mineral Equipment requirement that the site owner carry out its own risk assessment for all
mill relining operations.
It is a Russell Mineral Equipment requirement that the site owner carry out its own risk assessment for all
maintenance requirements on Russell Mineral Equipment machinery or equipment.
Strict compliance with this manual, all local and national laws, regulations and practices regarding the safe
operation and maintenance of this machine is necessary to assure the personal safety of those working on,
or around, this machine. Failure to operate the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine in accordance with this
manual could result in severe injury or death.
1.4 Disclaimer
Russell Mineral Equipment, throughout this manual, gives warnings, cautions, notes and instructions
concerning the use of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine and safety precautions that are designed to
enable operators to obtain optimum service from the machine in safety.
Russell Mineral Equipment provides familiarisation training modules for operation and use of the RUSSELL 7
Mill Relining Machine and with respect to safety issues.
Strict compliance with this manual, all local and national laws, regulations, mandatory industry codes,
applicable Australian standards as published by Standards Australia Limited from time to time and practices
regarding the safe operation and maintenance of this machine is necessary to assure the personal safety of
those working on, or around, this machine. Failure to operate the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine in
accordance with this manual could result in severe injury or death.
Unless otherwise agreed in the Contract Terms and Conditions, Russell Mineral Equipment for itself, its
directors, officers, employees and agents expressly disclaims any liability whatsoever, whether it be for
personal injury, death, property damage, economic loss or any other loss by any person or entity related to
use and operation of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine (however caused, including by the negligence of
Russell Mineral Equipment).

12R4751-MRM384
1.5 Warnings, Cautions and Notes
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTES are given throughout this manual in the following form:
WARNING. These procedures must be followed to avoid the possibility of injury to personnel.
CAUTION. These procedures should be followed to avoid damage to the machine components.
NOTE. These notes call attention to procedures which make a task easier or more efficient.
Where Warnings, Cautions or Notes occur immediately adjacent to each other, their borders may be merged.
1.5.1 WARNINGS
When using any machine functions, the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine operator must be alert and
constantly vigilant as to the whereabouts of other personnel in the mill. Ensure that they are not in such a
location as to be in danger of injury from movements within the machine itself or from crushing between the
machine and the mill shell.
Assistant personnel in the mill during relining operations must be alert and constantly vigilant as to the
movements of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine. Ensure that you do not place yourself in a position
where you can be injured by machine movements or by being caught between the machine and the mill
shell.
Crush Hazard. Incorrect lug spacing may cause a liner to fall from the grapple tool.
Only the correctly manufactured and tested grapple tool and liners are to be used. If any changes are
made to the specifications of the mill liners, contact Russell Mineral Equipment to assess the liner and
grapple tool engagement integrity.
Be careful when you do work with pressurized hydraulic fluid. It can cause injury. Release the pressure in
the system before you remove hoses or other hydraulic components. Do not use a hand or any other body
part to check for leaks in a pressurized line. Get medical aid immediately if hydraulic fluid causes an injury.
The swivel hook must hang freely and not contact the grapple or any other part of the machine when in use.

12R4751-MRM384
The machine does not supply its own power or store power. In the event of a supply interruption then the
machine will stop and all lights within the mill will be off. Alternative light sources for relining crew inside
the mill must be provided.
All Service requirements and Non-Destructive Examination inspections are listed in the Service Section of
this manual. These inspections must be carried out to ensure the structural integrity of machine
components is maintained for the safety of personnel. If the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine does not
have a current NDE inspection certificate, it must not be used.
1.5.2 CAUTIONS
It is a Russell Mineral Equipment requirement that the site owner only uses the machine for lifting and
placement of liners during mill relining operations.
1.5.3 NOTES
Move function and control levers slowly and progressively. Vigorous movements of the levers will result in
jerky movements. Gradual easing of the controls will ensure smooth accelerating motion.
1.6 Personal Protective Equipment
Personnel must wear protective equipment while using the equipment. Minimum PPE;
1. High visability overalls or long sleeved shirt and long trousers.
2. Steel capped safety boots.
3. Hard hat.
4. Safety spectacles or face shield.
5. Gloves.
6. Ear plugs or muffs.

12R4751-MRM384
1.7 Falling Object Protection
During the mill relining process, it is necessary for a RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine operator and other
crew to be inside the confined space of the mill. If basic safety precautions are not established and followed
diligently, this can be a dangerous process.
The following warnings about risks/hazards, associated consequences and safeguarding precautions are
compiled from Russell Mineral Equipment’s risk assessment of dangers from falling objects inside the mill.
Although these warnings alert personnel to possible hazards, specific site conditions and staff procedures
will also need to be addressed by local site management.
The risk from falling objects is greatest during and after incremental rotation (inching) of the mill to expose
further portions of the shell for the removal and replacement of mill liners.
Consequences for inadequate precautions are:
Severe injury or death to members of the mill relining crew.
All workers must leave the mill during incremental rotation (inching).
Grinding balls, rocks or other debris can become stuck on the mill wall or into compacted slurry and
between liners, and can be raised above the mill relining crew when the mill is incrementally rotated.
If nuts are removed from liner attachment bolts and a liner does not release from the mill shell, then this
liner could move slightly when the mill is incrementally rotated causing grinding balls, rocks or other debris
to fall and the liner itself could also fall.
Cracked or fractured liners can be raised above the relining crew during incremental rotation. Part of the
liner could move, release debris, or fall. New liners may have as yet undetected cracks.
Precaution: The owner shall ensure that thorough cleaning and inspection of the overhead portion of the mill
is done after each incremental rotation, and before the relining crew enters the mill.
Precaution: The owner shall conduct an internal and external inspection of the mill to ensure loose liners
have fallen from the mill shell. This will be carried out each time any liner bolts are removed from the mill
and prior to any crew entering the mill.
Precaution: The owner shall conduct an inspection of the mill liners prior to the relining crew entering the
mill and after each incremental rotation.

12R4751-MRM384
PLEASE - THINK SAFETY, so that YOU CAN OPERATE WITH SAFETY.

12R4751-MRM384
2. Specifications
This section refers to Vendor Data Drawings (Page 265) and the Electrical and Hydraulic Schematic
Drawings (Page 269) for the machine specifications.
2.1 Identification
Information Identifier
Type of Machine RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine
Owner of the Machine Southern Peru Copper Corporation
Mine Site Toquepala
Purchase Order No. M3:150141-M039
Model MRM RT 4 x 2
Equipment Number 293200-LH-001
RME Serial Number 12R4751-MRM384
Year of Manufacture 2017
Rated Capacity 2500 kg
2.2 Machine Vendor Data Drawings
Information Drawing or Document
Elevation - Working Range Dimensions TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293)
End Views - Mill Entry Details TQAMRM384-VDD-02 (Page 294)
Plan - Working Load Reactions TQAMRM384-VDD-03 (Page 295)
Manoeuvring and Floor Loading TQAMRM384-VDD-04 (Page 296)
Floor Interface Details TQAMRM384-VDD-05 (Page 297)
Grapple Tool Vendor Data Drawings GRAPPLE TOOL-VDD-01 (Page 298)

12R4751-MRM384
2.3 Machine Details
Specifications Drawing or Document
Machine Mass TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293)
Dimensions of the Machine TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293) and TQAMRM384-VDD-03 (Page 295)
Machine Lift Functions and Range TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293)
Rated Lifting Capacity TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293)
Boom and Beam Extensions TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293)
Turning Radius and Machine Extremities TQAMRM384-VDD-04 (Page 296)
Machine Trunnion Clearances TQAMRM384-VDD-02 (Page 294)
Machine Operating Reaction Loads TQAMRM384-VDD-03 (Page 295) and TQAMRM384-VDD-04 (Page 296)
Machine-to-Floor Interface Dimensions TQAMRM384-VDD-05 (Page 297)
Electrical Schematics List of Electrical Schematics (Page 269).
Electric Motor Data Motor Data (Page 269)
Hydraulic Schematics List of Hydraulic Schematics (Page 270).

12R4751-MRM384
2.4 Options Supplied
Part No. Description
12R4752 Female Decontactor
12R4840 Cable Reeler
12R4839 Radio Control
12R3364 Remote Transport Control
12R5098 Joysticks
10117900 Liner Release Enable Transmitter
12R4754 Tiedowns
12R4753 Machine Covers
12R4755 Removable Stairs
23R1476 Manual - English Electronic
23R1475 Manual - Spanish Electronic
NOTE. The hydraulic mount cabinet has the option to have the joysticks electrical components installed to
allow the operator to have dual seating.

12R4751-MRM384
2.5 Sound Levels Assessment
Sound levels that the machine produced were measured in the workshop after the machine was completed.
The sound values that are produced at the site may be different. Environmental conditions that may have
an effect on sound values include:
1. the operation of the equipment inside a mill
2. the operation of other machinery near to this equipment
Figure 1: Locations of Sound Readings on a Typical Machine
Sound Reading Location Results for this Machine
1. Ambient Sound Level at Test Site 56 dBA
2. Main Electrical Control Cabinet 81.4 to 82.3 dBA
3. Rear Tiedowns 77.7 to 78.2 dBA
4. Baseframe Console 79.7 to 80.2 dBA
5. Platform 75.6 to 75.9 dBA
6. Machine Operator's Console 72.3 to 74.6 dBA
7.Grapple Area 73.4 to 74.2 dBA

12R4751-MRM384
Method of Measuring
Sound values were measured in the sequence shown in the table while the equipment was operating
correctly. All values were measured at a distance of one metre from the machine.
Details of Sound Measurement Equipment
Equipment Manufacturer Center Technology Corporation
Model 322
Serial Number 080504355 Calibration Expiry Date: 06/10/2017
Parameter used dBA
Sampling indicates that sound levels generated by the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine vary but excludes
levels which may cause damage to the hearing of the majority of the population. While the sample results
show there is no requirement for any workplace noise controls to be set in place, the test environment does
not accurately reflect the normal work environment.
Personnel must wear hearing protection and use any other measures deemed necessary by the site
whilst the machine is carrying out its normal operations.

12R4751-MRM384
This page intentionally left blank.

12R4751-MRM384
3. Description
This section tells you about the primary parts of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine. You must
understand this information before you go to the next section, which gives the instructions to operate the
machine.
Figure 2: Russell 7 Mill Relining Machine

12R4751-MRM384
3.1 Machine Safety Features
3.1.1 EMERGENCY STOPS
Emergency Stops, referred to as E-Stops throughout this manual, are placed near all control positions and
close to where personnel are working.
When an E-Stop is engaged, it shuts down the machine's power pack, and stops all machine motion. Any
time you see an emergency or dangerous situation, engage an E-Stop. Refer to Emergency Stops (Page
69).
3.1.2 OPERATOR'S SEAT BELT
A seat belt is provided for the safety of the operator and should be used whenever the operator is seated at
the Operator's Console (Page 41).
3.1.3 BRAKES
Brakes are incorporated in the gearboxes of all the drive wheel motors and the turntable slew motor. These
brakes are applied automatically when hydraulic power is not supplied to the drive motors. Never tow the
machine as it will damage the gearbox/brake assemblies.
3.1.4 TIEDOWN EQUIPMENT
Tiedown Equipment is used to stop the machine from overbalancing or moving while it is in operation or
being tested. These are critical components. Any damage to these components renders them
unserviceable. Refer also to Tiedown Equipment.
3.1.5 IMMINENT MOTION WARNING
On either side of the grapple are amber lights that indicate the imminent movement of the boom or grapple.
These imminent motion lights are connected to the Operator's Hydraulic Controls (Page 101) and will
illuminate at any time a control lever is operated.
3.1.6 BOOM OVERLOAD SENSORS
Boom position sensors (proximity switches) are used to prevent the machine from lifting more than its rated
load when the boom is retracted. This ensures the operator cannot inadvertently overload the equipment
and helps prevent equipment failure.

12R4751-MRM384
3.1.7 CONSOLE ON TURNTABLE ENABLER BUTTON
The primary function of the Console on Turntable (COT)-enabler is to stop the machine from sudden
movement at standstill. The hydraulic controls above the rotary union at the Operator's Controls (Page 101)
are disengaged unless the COT-enabler-button is pressed. When the operator's hydraulic-control-cover is
lifted the COT-enabler-button is pressed to start the machines operations. The lever cover proxy senses if
the hydraulic-control-cover is closed, and this will let the turntable pendant COT-enabler be available. Refer
also to Ancillary Panel (Page 105).
3.1.8 BASE ENABLE BUTTON
The baseframe drive function is not disabled until the base enable button is pressed once. This safety
function is used to prevent inadvertent movement of the Mill Relining Machine during the start-up process.
Each time the powerpack is started, the base enable button will need to be pressed once before the machine
can be moved.
3.1.9 BASEFRAME CONSOLE LOCKOUT PLATE
The hydraulic valve set at the Baseframe Console (Page 79) is fitted with a lockout plate that enables
selected controls while locking the remaining controls. For example, the outer beam and all machine drive
controls are locked out when the Mill Relining Machine is set up in front of the mill and the linercart is being
used.
3.1.10 VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARM
The Mill Relining Machine is fitted with a visual and audible alarm on the platform that activates at any time a
Baseframe Console (Page 79) function is operated. This includes basedrive, jacks and outer beam
functions. It also sounds when the linercart is being operated.
3.1.11 HYDRAULIC OIL - OVER PRESSURE PROTECTION
The primary pump is pressure compensated to a set maximum value and is also set for a maximum flow.
The cooling system pump is a gear pump and the oil cooler radiator has a bypass valve fitted. All control
valve banks have integral pressure relief valves. Counter balance and shock relief valves are set to
pressures rated to the appropriate load ratings. Critical settings are tamper resistant.
3.1.12 HYDRAULIC OIL - LOW LEVEL PROTECTION
A sensor inside the tank detects low hydraulic oil level and shuts down the machine power pack, stopping all
machine motion. The machine cannot be restarted until oil is added to the tank.
3.1.13 HYDRAULIC OIL - HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION
A sensor inside the tank detects high hydraulic oil temperature and shuts down the machine power pack,
stopping all machine motion. The machine cannot be restarted until the temperature of the oil in the tank
has lowered.

12R4751-MRM384
3.1.14 COUNTERBALANCE VALVES
Where required, hydraulic cylinders, actuators and motors on the machine are fitted with counterbalance
valves. If hydraulic power fails or is shutdown, these valves lock the machine in its last set position. This is
also the case if a hydraulic line bursts. All hydraulic movement would cease in that particular circuit
because the counterbalance valves are located as close as possible to the hydraulic actuator or cylinder.
3.1.15 HYDRAULIC HOSE COVERINGS
Where hydraulic hoses are under pressure they are run in an enclosed area or they are sheathed in a
durable Cordura sleeve to protect personnel from hydraulic fluid if a hose bursts.
3.1.16 HYDRAULIC CONTROLS
All hydraulic control levers are spring loaded to the neutral position. Releasing a lever will return the control
to a neutral position and stop the movement associated with that lever.
3.1.17 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION
The RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine connects to two independent sources of supply. A 480 V 60 Hz 3
phase main motor supply and a 120 V 60HZ supply for the motor heater.
The main electrical isolator on the machine is lockable. This isolator should be locked at any time
maintenance is carried out or when the machine is placed out-of-service. The main electrical cabinet cannot
be opened until the main isolator is turned to the OFF position. The machine cannot be started while the
main control cabinet door is not in the closed position.
A separate, lockable, 120 V supply isolator is fitted to the motor heater. During periods of storage this
supply would normally be connected, isolator in ON position, to ensure the motor remains warm and dry.
3.1.18 PROTECTIVE COVERS
Protective metal and rubber covers are placed on sliding parts that present pinch or crush hazards. Other
locations that present pinch or crush hazards are addressed by distinctive safety labels, training and safe
working practices. Any protective covers that are removed for maintenance or any other purpose must be
replaced prior to any operation of the machine.
3.1.19 LIGHTING
Seven 18 W Light Emitting Diode (LED) 24 V work lights are provided. Six may be plugged in and used
together, while the remaining one is a spare unit. They are impact resistant, swivel mounted on magnetic
bases for illumination of the work area and operator's controls as required. If the machine is shut down with
an E-Stop then all these work lights will remain on.

12R4751-MRM384
3.1.20 POWER FAILURE
In the event of a power failure the machine will shut down, all hydraulic motion will stop and remain set in its
final set position by the action of the counterbalance valves. Work lights will also turn off so crew inside the
mill should have an independent source of lighting available.
The machine does not restart automatically when power is restored. It can only be started in the normal
manner at the main control cabinet. Lights will automatically come on again if the main switch has been left
in the ON position.
3.1.21 LINER RELEASE ENABLE BUTTON
The liner release function at the Operator's Controls (Page 101) is disabled unless the liner release enable
button is also operated at the same time as the lever. This helps prevent a liner being released
inadvertantly. Refer also to Ancillary Panel (Page 105).
3.1.22 LINER RELEASE INTERLOCK FAULT INDICATOR
The Liner Release Interlock Fault Indicator helps prevent the inadvertent release of a liner from the grapple
tool. Refer to Liner Release Interlock Fault Indicator (Page 129).
3.1.23 LINER RELEASE SAFETY BAR
The grapple tool pins are prevented from releasing a liner by a safety bar which is fitted to the top of the
grapple tool. There is a lynch pin at each end of this safety bar and one of these is removed to allow the
tool pins to move apart. Both lynch pins must be secured in place each time a liner is picked up.
3.1.24 RADIO REMOTE CONTROL
The top edge of the radio remote pendant is raised, to protect the levers from inadvertent operation.
Deadman switches are fitted, and unless one of these deadman switches is depressed while a control is
operated then that control remains disabled.
The radio remote control pendant is also fitted with its own E-Stop.
3.1.25 JOYSTICK CONTROLS
Each of the joystick controls has a deadman trigger fitted. Unless the operator is squeezing the deadman
trigger continuously while using the joystick, the control remains disabled.
The joystick control unit is also fitted with its own E-Stop and liner release enable button on the right hand
arm of the assembly.

12R4751-MRM384
3.2 Main Parts of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine
Figure 3: Main Parts of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Main Parts of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine (Page 30).
1. Baseframe (Page 32).
2. Tiedown Equipment (Page 33).
3. Front Basedrive (Page 35).
4. Rear Basedrive (Page 36).
5. Outer Beam (Page 37).
6. Inner Beam (Page 38)
7. Turntable (Page 40)
8. Operator's Console (Page 41)
9. Junction Box 2 (Page 46)
10. Hydraulic Mount Cabinet (Page 47)
11. Boom. (Page 42)
12. Grapple (Page 44)
13. Grapple Tool (Page 45)
14. Linercart (Page 48)
15. Linercart Drive (Page 49).
16. Hydraulic Tank (Page 51)
17. Hydraulic Power Pack (Page 52)
18. Main Control Cabinet (Page 50).
19. Platform and Removable Stairs (Page 56).
20. Cable Reeler (Page 57).

12R4751-MRM384
3.3 Baseframe
Figure 4: Baseframe
1. Baseframe structure.
2. Basedrive hydraulic manifold.
3. Front Basedrive (Page 35) mount.
4. Front jack hydraulic manifold.
5. Lifting lugs.
6. Beam clamps and slide pads.
7. Baseframe cableveyor.
8. Beam cylinder hydraulic manifold.
9. Rear Basedrive (Page 36) mount.
10. Tiedowns.
11. Baseframe manifold.
12. Rear axle pivot suspension.

12R4751-MRM384
3.4 Front Tiedown Equipment
Figure 5: Front Tiedown Equipment
1. Front floor-mounted pinning block.
2. Tiedown jack protective cover.
3. Tiedown jack.
4. Extension arm.
5. Pinning hole.
6. Front tiedown pin.

12R4751-MRM384
3.5 Rear Tiedown Equipment
Figure 6: Rear Tiedown Equipment
1. Rear floor-mounted tiedown plate.
2. Tiedown rod.
3. Washer and nuts for the tiedown rod.
4. Tiedown shaft.
5. Rear tiedown pin and lynch pin.

12R4751-MRM384
3.6 Front Basedrive
Figure 7: Front Basedrive
1. Rubber-tyred wheels.
2. Drive gearbox.
3. Hydraulic drive motor.
4. Hub axle.
5. Top and bottom steering pins.
6. Front steering tie rod.
7. Front steering cylinder.

12R4751-MRM384
3.7 Rear Basedrive
Figure 8: Rear Basedrive
1. Rubber-tyred wheels.
2. Rear Wheel Hubs
3. Stub axle.
4. King pin.
5. Rear steering tie rod.
6. Rear steering cylinder.
7. Rear axle pivot pin.
8. Rear axle pivot stops.
9. Rear axle

12R4751-MRM384
3.8 Outer Beam
Figure 9: Outer Beam
1. Outer Beam structure.
2. Linercart rails.
3. Outer Beam rear cover.
4. Outer Beam cylinder.
5. Beam cylinder pin.
6. Beam rocker.
7. Beam cradle and low friction slide pads.
8. Front vertical low-friction pads.
9. Rubber wiper for the outer beam.

12R4751-MRM384
3.9 Inner Beam
Figure 10: Inner Beam
1. Inner beam structure.
2. Inner beam cylinder.
3. Cylinder clamps.
4. Cylinder pin.
5. Hydraulic manifold for inner beam cylinder.
6. Cableveyor.
7. Cableveyor tray.
8. V-ring seal for turntable.
9. Emergency lights.
10. Connection socket for working lights.
11. Emergency stop.
12. Observer’s pendant (Page 96)

12R4751-MRM384
3.10 Rotary Union
Figure 11: Rotary Union
1. Rotary union-to-turntable mounting blocks.
2. Holding pin.
3. Electrical outlets.
4. Proximity switch outlet.
5. Hydraulic lines to and from the operator's hydraulic controls.
6. Hydraulic and electrical lines to and from the baseframe.

12R4751-MRM384
3.11 Turntable
Figure 12: Turntable Assembly
1. Turntable body.
2. Slew motor, brake and gearbox.
3. Pinion gear.
4. Slew ring.
5. Boom pivot pins.
6. Boom cylinder pivot and attachment points.
7. Bearing and seals.

12R4751-MRM384
3.12 Operator's Console
Figure 13: Typical Operator's Console
1. Operator’s platform and footwell.
2. Operator’s seat.
3. Joystick Controls (Page 107)
4. Junction Box 2 (Page 46).
5. Operator's Hydraulic Controls (Page 101).
6. Cover for the operator’s hydraulic controls.
7. Ancillary Panel (Page 105).
8. Console pivot mechanism.
9. Connector Socket Panel (Page 41)
10. Platform leg housing. Two are used to support the operator’s platform.
11. Fixed blocks to engage with the lugs on the operator’s platform support legs and lock
the platform in place.
12. Spigot mounting for the operator’s seat

12R4751-MRM384
3.13 Boom
Figure 14: Boom Assembly
1. Inner boom.
2. Intermediate boom.
3. Outer boom.
4. Boom extend-retract cable.
5. Attachment point for Turntable (Page 40).
6. Attachment point for Boom Raise-Lower Cylinder (Page 43).
7. Attachment flange for Grapple (Page 44).

12R4751-MRM384
3.14 Boom Raise-Lower Cylinders
Figure 15: Boom Raise-Lower Cylinders
1. Boom raise-lower cylinders.
2. Cylinder-to-turntable attachment points.
3. Cylinder-to-boom attachment points.
4. Teardrop pins.
5. Protective covers for hydraulic fittings.

12R4751-MRM384
3.15 Grapple
Figure 16: Grapple
1. Grapple slew actuator.
2. Grapple roll actuator.
3. Liner lift actuator.
4. Grapple head.
5. Emergency stop button.
6. Hydraulic fittings.

12R4751-MRM384
3.16 Grapple Tool
Figure 17: Grapple Tool
1. Grapple attachment pin.
2. Load ring.
3. Lifting hook.
4. Grapple tool slide arms.
5. Grapple tool pins.
6. Liner safety bar.
7. Lynch pins for liner safety bar.
8. Protective plate.
9. Liner reaction foot.

12R4751-MRM384
3.17 Junction Box 2
Figure 18: Junction Box 2
1. Junction Box 2 (JBox2)
2. Cabinet latches.
4. Antenna for the radio remote control.
5. Sounder for the Liner Release Enable System (Page 117)
6. Cabinet drains.
7. Sockets for two of the magnetic work lights.
8. Socket for joystick and loopback plug connector
9. JBox 2 seals.

12R4751-MRM384
3.18 Hydraulic Mount Cabinet
Figure 19: Hydraulic Mount Cabinet
1. Adjustable mirror.
2. Junction box 2A.
3. Hydraulic manifold and solenoid block.
4. Cabinet cover.
5. Gas strut.
6. Latch for the cabinet cover.

12R4751-MRM384
3.19 Linercart
Figure 20: Linercart
1. Linercart trolley.
2. Linercart turntable.
3. Rubber support blocks.
4. Linercart wheels.
5. Turntable lock handles.
6. Tension adjustment bolt for linercart drive cable.
7. Anti-lift brackets.

12R4751-MRM384
3.20 Linercart Drive
Figure 21: Linercart Drive
1. Wire rope for linercart drive.
2. Linercart wire rope attachment points.
3. Idler pulley and cover.
4. Hydraulic manifold.
5. Linercart drive hydraulic motor.
6. Linercart drive sheave.
7. Wire rope guides.

12R4751-MRM384
3.21 Main Control Cabinet
Figure 22: Main Control Cabinet
1. Main electrical isolator.
2. Controls and indicators.
3. Locks for the cabinet door.
4. Loop-back plug and socket for linercart pendant.
5. Linercart Pendant (Page 125).

12R4751-MRM384
3.22 Hydraulic Tank
Figure 23: Hydraulic Tank
1. Breather/filter.
2. Oil return pressure gauge.
3. Sample point.
4. Hydraulic tank filling point.
5. Hydraulic oil return filter.
6. Transducer fittings container.
7. Hydraulic tank full level.
8. Hydraulic fluid level sight gauges
9. Hydraulic fluid level and temperature sensors.
10. Hydraulic fluid temperature gauge.
11. Hydraulic tank drain point.

12R4751-MRM384
3.23 Hydraulic Power Pack
Figure 24: Hydraulic Power Pack Components

12R4751-MRM384
1. Electric Motors (Page 54).
2. Hydraulic Pressure Filter (Page 55)
3. Motor pump.
4. System pressure gauge.
6. Powerpack covers
7. Baseframe Controls
8. Emergency stop button
9. Base enable switch
10. Motor heater isolator
11. Heat exchanger
12. Transport pendant

12R4751-MRM384
3.23.1 ELECTRIC MOTORS
Figure 25: Electric Motors
1. Main electric motor.
2. Bell housing.
3. Main hydraulic pump.
4. Hydraulic cooling pump.
5. Vibration-isolating mounts.
6. Cooling fan motor.
7. Heat exchanger.

12R4751-MRM384
3.23.2 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE FILTER
Figure 26: Hydraulic Pressure Filter
2. System pressure filter.
3. Filter blocked indicator.
4. System pressure gauge.

12R4751-MRM384
3.24 Platforms and Removable Stairs
Figure 27: Typical Platforms and Stairs
1. Platform.
2. Removable safety rail sections.
3. Safety gates.
4. Stairs have swivel castors.
5. Attachment fittings: indents, alignment lugs and catch plate.
6. Visual and audible alarm.
7. Bracket for the linercart pendant cable.
8. Linercart pendant holder.
9. Cable Reeler (Page 58).

12R4751-MRM384
3.25 Female Decontactor
Figure 28: Female Decontactor
1. Stainless Steel Enclosure.
2. Female Decontactor.
3. Rubber Flap.

12R4751-MRM384
3.26 Cable Reeler
Figure 29: Cable Reeler
1. Spool assembly
2. Electrical cable
3. Roller guide assembly
4. Male decontactor

12R4751-MRM384
3.27 Optional Machine Covers
Figure 30: Machine Covers
1. Baseframe side protective cover.
2. Baseframe top protective cover.
3. Boom and grapple protective cover.
4. Outer beam protective cover.
5. Fasteners

12R4751-MRM384
3.28 Lifting Kit
The lifting kit provides the equipment necessary to safely lift the Mill Relining Machine using either one or two
cranes. Refer also to Lifting the Machine (Page 62).
Figure 31: Lifting Kit
1. Spreader Bar.
2. Chain.
3. Shackle.

12R4751-MRM384
4. Operations
Within this section are operational procedures which must be followed each time the machine is used.
Procedures are presented in sequence from machine preparation to returning to storage. Operators should
be trained in and familiar with all procedures before using the machine. Each procedure will refer to a
paragraph with a more substantial explanation of the operation and safety procedures applying to that
particular operation.
If you are unsure of any safety issues, or the operational requirements relating to the procedure you should
read all other paragraphs referred to, so that you may gain a better understanding.
4.1 Training of Personnel
Mill Relining Operations are hazardous. It is imperative that all crew members become familiar with and
understand the requirements listed in this section.
All machine operators must be trained (Page 13). All relining crew members should understand and adhere
to the following safety measures:
1. All Safety (Page 13) warnings and instructions;
2. Be familiar with the machine Description (Page 25) and operation.
3. Know the location and use of all Emergency Stops (Page 26).
4. Understand the risks from falling objects and Falling Object Protection. (Page 17)
5. Understand all mill Access Restrictions (Page 138).
6. Know the site power and Machine Isolation (Page 140) procedures.
7. Know how to Prepare the Site and Mill (Page 76) for relining.

12R4751-MRM384
4.2 Lifting the Machine
At times the machine may need to be lifted, whether to relocate it, for example, during commissioning, or for
other reasons, for example, servicing. The following instructions must be followed whenever the machine is
lifted.
Lifting with a single crane:
The machine must first be set up in the Transport Configuration (Page 77). The power cable is then
retracted on the cable reeler. A spreader bar must be placed across the machine as shown below.
Figure 32: Typical Lifting Requirements

12R4751-MRM384
Crush Hazard. Exercise extreme caution when lifting the machine.

Follow all the instructions provided.
Make sure all personnel who are not involved in the lift are well clear.
Be careful to protect the machine’s paintwork from the lifting chains.
The total machine mass is approximately 28500 kg. Ensure the lifting equipment used is appropriate for this
load. Refer to Figure: Lifting Requirements (Page 62).
1. The machine must be in the ‘Transport Configuration’.
2. Make sure the power cable is wound up and secured on the cable reeler.
3. A spreader bar approximately 1500 mm wide must be used.
4. Orient the spreader bar across the machine.
5. The maximum angle between lifting chains is 60˚.
6. Use ONLY the lifting lugs provided to lift the machine.
7. Distance from front jack centreline to Centre of Gravity is approximately 2185 mm.
8. The machine should be kept level when being lifted.
Lifting with two cranes:
In this case the spreader bar will not be required.
One crane may be attached to the two rear lifting lugs and the second crane attached to the two front lifting
lugs. All other requirements for lifting the machine are as given above for the single crane case.

12R4751-MRM384
4.3 Operational Procedures
The following checklist of operational procedures should be used each time the RUSSELL 7 Mill
Relining Machine is used:
Item Procedure Initial
1. Complete the Training of Personnel (Page 13).
2. Complete the Inspections Before Use (Page 65).
3. Connect the Site Power Supply (Page 68).
4. Turn the machine isolator ‘ON’ at the Main Control Cabinet (Page 66).
5. Test Emergency Stops (Page 69).
6. Prepare the Site and Mill. (Page 76)
7. Start the Machine (Page 73).
8. Make sure the machine is in the Transport Configuration (Page 77) before it is relocated.
9. Use the Remote Transport Control (Page 81) to Manoeuvre the Machine (Page 87) to the front of
the mill.
10. Set up the machine in the Mill Entry Configuration (Page 89).
11. Complete the Falling Object (Page 17) risk management.
12. Initial Machine Entry (Page 91): align the machine with the front and rear tiedown points.
13. Tie Down the Machine (Page 92) to the mill floor.
14. Insert the Outer Beam (Page 93) into the mill.
15. Set up the machine in the Relining Configuration (Page 95).
16. Complete the Mill Relining Operations (Page 100) for the accessible liners.
17. Incremental Rotation of the Mill (Page 134) - Normal Charge Level or High Residual Charge
Level.
18. Remove the Machine from the Mill (Page 136).
19. Manoeuvre the Machine (Page 87) to the storage or maintenance location.
20. Complete the Inspections After Use (Page 138) for the machine.
21. Machine Storage (Page 139).

12R4751-MRM384
4.4 Inspections Before Use
A pre-use check of the RUSSELL 7 should be carried out prior to the mill shutdown to ensure the machine is
in a serviceable condition for the reline process.
The purpose of this inspection is to identify any deterioration, wear or damage which may have occurred
during the storage period. When this inspection is complete the inspection forms will be given to the
maintenance controller to rectify any faults or problems.
These inspection forms should be kept as a record of the machine's maintenance history.
Pre-use Inspection and Lubrication – Refer to Detailed Inspection Requirements (Page 175) and Detailed
Lubrication Schedule (Page 154).

12R4751-MRM384
4.5 Controls on the Main Control Cabinet
Before connecting the power supply, be sure you know the functions of the controls and indicators on the
main control cabinet.
Figure 33: Controls on the Main Control Cabinet
Arc flash and shock hazard. At all times when operating the Main Electrical Isolator appropriate personal
protective equipment (PPE) is required.
1. Main electrical isolator. To isolate the machine: turn the main isolator to the OFF (O)
position and disconnect the site power supply.
The cabinet door cannot be opened until this isolator is in the OFF position. There
are also four other keyed door locks which must be released in order to open the
door.
2. Electric motor run indicator lights to show that the main electric motor is running.

12R4751-MRM384
3. Control healthy indicator illuminates to show that the machine is ready to

start. If the control healthy is not illuminated, then the machine cannot be
started until all engaged E-Stops have been disengaged and/or any other
fault has been rectified. There is a short time delay before the indicator will
illuminate. This delay is due to the sequence that the programmable relay in
JB2 must do before the machine can operate.
4. Hour meter indicates the total machine operating hours since new.
5. Motor start button starts the main electric motor.
6. Motor stop button stops the main electric motor.
8. Hydraulic oil low level indicator. This fault will also shut the machine down and it
cannot be started until more oil is added to the tank. Ensure all cylinders are
retracted before adding oil.
9. Hydraulic oil over-temperature indicator. This indicates that the oil temperature is
above 80°C. This will shut down the machine and it cannot be restarted until the oil
has cooled to below 65°C.
10. Overload tripped indicator. When illuminated, either the main electric motor or the
cooling fan motor is in a state of thermal overload. This fault will shut the machine
down and it cannot be started until the motor has cooled. An electrician may have to
reset the circuit breakers for the main electric motor or the cooling fan motor.
11. E-Stop engaged indicator. When illuminated, an E-Stop is engaged on this machine.
It cannot be started until all E-Stops are disengaged.
If the fault is not indicated on the front of the main electrical cabinet, an electrician should be called to
establish the nature of the fault and rectify or repair the problem. Refer to Troubleshooting Guide (Page
251).
Indicator lights on the door on the electrical cabinet are ‘Press to Test’ type, and will illuminate if pressed, to
check that the lights themselves are functioning.

12R4751-MRM384
4.6 Connect Site Power Supply
The machine has two supply cables for connection to the site supply. If the machine is in storage then it will
already have the separate motor heater cable connected and the motor heater switched ‘ON’. This heater
must be switched ‘OFF’ before the motor is started.
Procedure for changing from the storage maintenance supply to the three phase main supply:
1. Turn the 120 V 60 Hz motor heater isolator to the OFF position and make sure the 120 V supply cable is
unplugged, rolled up and stored safely on the machine using the bracket provided.
Make sure the 120V Maintenance Supply is unplugged when the machine is operating on 480 V 60 Hz 3
phase power.
This is to avoid any possible problems which might occur due to two earth wires being connected and if an
electrical fault should also occur with the main motor.
2. Fully unwind the main electrical supply cable and plug it into the site supply outlet.
The machine power supply cable must be fully unwound prior to connection to the site power
supply socket.
Prior to connecting the site power supply to the machine, make sure the main electrical isolator is
turned to the ‘OFF’ position.
3. Switch ON the main three phase site supply switch at the site outlet and check that the control healthy
indicator lamp is OFF. Refer to Main Control Cabinet (Page 66).
4. Close the main electrical isolator on the door of the Main Control Cabinet (Page 66) - rotate to 'I'
position.
5. Make sure the Control Healthy indicator light is now ON, and the magnetic base work lights are also ON
(if plugged in).
If the control healthy indicator did not illuminate after closing the main isolator, then check all
indicators on the main control cabinet to identify the problem or refer to Troubleshooting Guide (Page
251).
6. Either turn the main isolator OFF ('O' position) or continue with Testing Emergency Stops (Page 70).

12R4751-MRM384
4.7 Emergency Stops
Emergency Stops, referred to as E-Stops throughout this manual, are placed near all control positions and
close to where personnel are working.
When an E-Stop is engaged, it shuts down the machine's power pack, and stops all machine motion. Any
time you see an emergency or dangerous situation, engage an E-Stop.
All E-Stops must be disengaged before the machine can be started. When the E-Stops are all disengaged,
the machine will not restart by itself. Start the Machine (Page 73) again in the normal manner.
Figure 34: Emergency Stop Button
1. Emergency Stop Button showing the three circular arrows on the

top button surface.
2. Emergency Stop Symbol is used throughout this manual and on

the machine to identify E-Stop buttons.
To Engage the E-Stop:
Press the E-Stop until it locks in the active (in) position. The E-Stop activated indicator on the door of the
main cabinet will be on; the control healthy indicator will be off and the machine will not start.
To Disengage the E-Stop:
Rotate the E-Stop clockwise, in the direction of the arrows, until it pops out by its own mechanism. Never
forcibly pull out an E-Stop.

12R4751-MRM384
4.7.1 TESTING EMERGENCY STOPS
Before testing the emergency stops, make sure:
 The main electrical isolator is in the ON position
 The Control Healthy indicator is ON and the E-Stop Engaged indicator is OFF. Refer to Controls on the
Main Control Cabinet (Page 66)
This is the starting condition for the testing of E-Stops. A different condition may be due to an already
engaged E-Stop; refer below.
The E-Stop circuit of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine may be tested without the need to start the
machine’s electric motor.
Procedure for testing for each E-Stop:
1. Engage the E-Stop;
2. Check that the E-Stop engaged indicator on the Main Control Cabinet (Page 66) is ON and that the
control healthy indicator is OFF for this E-Stop;
3. Disengage the E-Stop; and
4. Check that the E-Stop engaged indicator is now OFF and that the Control Healthy indicator is now ON.
E-Stops are essential safety equipment for avoiding harm to crew members. If any E-Stop fails any of the
steps above, the machine must be tagged ‘Out of Service’ until the fault is rectified.

12R4751-MRM384
Figure 35: Emergency Stop Locations on a Typical Machine

12R4751-MRM384
Test the E-Stops individually at all Emergency Stop Locations on the Machine (Page 71):
1. Main Control Cabinet (Page 50)
2. Hydraulic Power Pack (Page 52).
3. Front of Inner Beam (Page 38).
4. Right Side of Grapple (Page 44).
5. Left Side of Grapple (Page 44).
7. Joystick Controls (Page 107)
8. Radio Remote Control Pendant (Page 111).
9. Linercart Remote Control Pendant (Page 125).
10. Remote Transport Control (Page 81)
11. Observer’s pendant (Page 96)
12. Liner Release Enable System (Page 120)
A pendant or its loop back plug must be connected for the E-Stop circuit to be disengaged. An open
connection socket will be detected by the machine as an engaged E-Stop and the machine will not start.
This is a safety feature to ensure that the E-Stop on the pendant will function correctly. A loop back plug is
provided and tethered adjacent to each pendant connection socket.
A damaged pendant cable may also be detected as an engaged E-Stop.
If the machine is required for immediate operations or manoeuvring, it may now be started in the normal
manner, refer to Starting the Machine (Page 73).
OR
If it is not planned to continue operating the machine at this time, turn the machine’s main electrical isolator
to the ‘OFF’ position.

12R4751-MRM384
4.8 Starting the Machine
Figure 36: Starting the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

12R4751-MRM384
All the steps in Connect Site Power Supply (Page 68) must be completed successfully before starting the
machine.
To start the machine:
1. Make sure that the motor heater electrical isolation is OFF.
2. Make sure that the main electrical isolator is ON.
3. Make sure the ‘Control Healthy’ indicator is ON.
4. Press the motor start button. If the motor does not start, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide (Page 251).
5. Check the blocked filter indicator on the Hydraulic Pressure Filter (Page 55).
This filter indicator is checked each time the motor is started. It should normally show a green
indication.
If the hydraulic fluid is cold, then at start up, a false red indication could be shown. Only in this case (if the
hydraulic fluid is cold), the indicator may be reset (by pressing it) and checked again a short time later.
If this indicator shows red then machine must be shut down immediately, the filter changed and the
maintenance controller notified. The old filter element should be checked for contaminants.
This indicator will remain set, showing the red status, even when the machine is shut down. It may be
reset, by pressing it, after a new filter element is installed.
6. Check the system pressure. Correct pressures can be found on the Hydraulic Schematic Drawings
(Page 270).
7. Check the return filter pressure gauge on the Hydraulic Tank (Page 51) return filter.
This gauge is checked each time the motor is started. It should normally show a low pressure value
within the green range at all times. The higher the flow (more machine functions used) the higher
the reading.
If this gauge shows in the red range with no machine function being used, then the machine must be shut
down immediately, the filter changed and the maintenance controller notified. The old filter element should
be checked for contaminants.

12R4751-MRM384
This gauge does not retain the highest value and will revert to a zero indication when there is no hydraulic
fluid flow (motor is stopped).
If the oil level is low then this may first be noticed by the machine stopping for no apparent
reason.
When a cylinder (e.g. for the beam or boom) is fully extended then the oil level in the reservoir is
lowered and at the detection limit slight waves in the oil surface may be sufficient to shut down
the machine. Then, when the motor is stopped and the oil surface is calm, the low oil level may
not be detected. If these events are occurring then the low oil indicator on the main control
cabinet will flash briefly.
4.9 Stopping the Machine
When stopping the machine use the following procedure:
1. Press the Motor Stop button on the door of the main electrical cabinet to switch the hydraulic pumps off.
All machine motion will then cease.
2. Open the isolating switch on the door of the main electrical cabinet (rotate to ‘O’ position) when finished
with the machine for an extended time. Do not open this isolating switch if the machine and personnel
are still in the mill as the work lights will also be turned off. All personnel must evacuate the mill first.
Ensure all personnel have evacuated the mill before switching the machine off.
3. When the machine will not be restarted for an extended time, e.g. when it is going to be lifted or has
been stopped at its storage location after a mill reline is complete, the power cable must be
disconnected from the site supply, wound up and stored on the cable storage bracket mounted on the
rear of the left hand platform.
When the machine is stopped at any storage location, the separate motor heater supply cable must
also be connected to a suitable supply and the heaters turned on.
RME suggests that occasionally, an Emergency Stop button is used for routine stopping of the machine. By
selecting the switches in rotation, each will be given an in-service test in addition to the formal test procedure
outlined in Testing Emergency Stops (Page 70).

12R4751-MRM384
4.10 Prepare the Site and Mill
At this step the Mill Relining Machine has had a pre-use inspection and lubrication, Emergency Stop buttons
tested and has been test run. The machine can operate.
While the Mill Relining Machine is prepared, it is necessary for the mill and site to be in a condition for a
reline. Make sure that the site procedures are followed to prepare the mill. Do the site mill procedures and
the procedures that follows:
1. Inspect the RUSSELL 7 floor mounted tie down fittings for any damage. This includes the concrete
around the fittings.
Make sure that you do the pre-use inspection of the tiedown components and the concrete around them. If
either have damage then the machine can have uncontrolled movement.
2. Before you move the machine, make sure that the area at the front and around it is clear.
Before you move the machine, make sure that the area at the front of the machine is clear. This will help
to prevent damage to the machine wheels or rubber tyres.
3. Decrease the mill-charge to a safe quantity for the Mill Relining Machine to enter the mill and operate
successfully.
4. Do the site procedures to stop and isolate the mill.
5. Disconnect the mill-feed-chute. Push the mill-feed-chute away from the Mill Relining Machine.
6. Remove the liner-bolts from the liners in the mill shell. The liners can fall on the mill-charge.
Do not enter the mill before a risk assessment is completed. Do a risk assessment before relining and after
inching. Grinding balls, rocks or other unwanted material can become bonded on the mill wall.

12R4751-MRM384
4.11 Transport Configuration
The Mill Relining Machine must be in its transport configuration prior to being moved, either under its own
power or by lifting. ‘Transport Configuration’ specifies the position of machine components as detailed in
this section.
The most important components to be positioned are the beams (inner and outer both retracted) and the
boom (retracted and facing the rear). Other components (e.g. tiedown fittings) are removed and stored
safely on the machine, e.g. on the platforms. If the machine is to be lifted, then these components must be
suitably secured.
The RUSSELL 7 is most stable in its Transport Configuration.
The machine must be in its Transport Configuration while it is being stored, manoeuvred under its own
power or relocated by lifting.
Figure 37: Typical Machine in Transport Configuration

12R4751-MRM384
Transport Configuration procedure:
Refer to Figure: Machine in Transport Configuration (Page 77).
1. Remove the stairs and relocate them.
2. Fully retract the Inner beam.
3. Fully retract the outer beam and ensure it is pinned to the baseframe (by the outer beam cylinder pin at
the beam cylinder knuckle).
4. Set grapple roll and slew at midpoint and liner lift at full ‘UP’ position.
5. Fully retract the boom, face it rearward and rest the grapple on packing placed on top of the beam.
6. Remove the offside view mirror and store safely.
7. Lower the operator's hydraulic control levers and lower their cover over them, to protect them. Refer to
Raising and Lowering the Hydraulic Control Levers (Page 104). Secure the liner placement console
assembly close to (parallel with) the boom as specified in Operator's Console (Page 41).
8. Remove the operator’s seat, joystick controls assembly and platform and store them safely. (The seat
and joysticks assembly should be lifted off the platform and removed separately)
Hazard: Heavy objects. The combined operator’s seat and platform assembly weighs
approximately 48 kg. It is more easily lifted and installed when separated into two components.
Two persons are recommended for lifting for each component.
9. Fully retract the front jacks.
10. Drive the linercart to the rear of the beam.
11. Store front and rear tiedown equipment safely.
The outer beam must remain pinned to the baseframe at all times when the machine is in the transport
configuration. Being pinned means the outer beam is secured to the baseframe via the outer beam cylinder
pin.
If the outer beam is not pinned then it and everything attached to it (inner beam, turntable to grapple) is free
to move when the machine is manoeuvred or lifted. The only time this pin may be removed is when the
machine is tied down, e.g. is entering or exiting the mill. Refer to Insert the Outer Beam (Page 93).
Hazard: Sudden, unexpected movement. In the transport configuration, the outer beam must be pinned to
the baseframe, or the outer beam could slide on the baseframe without warning.

12R4751-MRM384
4.11.1 BASEFRAME CONSOLE
The Baseframe Console provides the operator with controls for all the baseframe functions and is mounted
on the Hydraulic Power Pack (Page 52). Controls are provided to enable the linercart pendant, extend and
retract the beam, operate the jacks and drive the machine.
The baseframe console has a lockout plate which enables selected controls while locking out those controls
not currently required. This lockout function is achieved by cut-outs in the plate for the hydraulic valve
levers. When the cut-out is aligned for a lever then that lever may move and allow that function.
The RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine is fitted with a Remote Transport Control (Page 81) pendant for
added safety and ease of operation. The baseframe lockout plate position must be coordinated with the
pendant controls for successful machine operation. Also, the Hydraulic Power Pack (Page 52) cover must
remain in place for safety. This cover must be fitted to prevent conflicting operation of machine functions by
independent operators and to protect the lockout plate and levers from damage and debris which could
impair machine operation.
Figure 38: Baseframe Console
The baseframe lockout plate position must be coordinated with the remote transport pendant controls for
successful machine operation.
The basedrive lockout plate must be in the linercart position during liner placement operations.
The Hydraulic Power Pack (Page 52) cover must be fitted during all relining operations.

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Baseframe Console (Page 79).
2. Drive Enable Button. The baseframe drive control lever function is disabled when the
power pack is first started. The drive enable button must be pressed once to enable the
baseframe drive function. If the hydraulic power pack is shut down, this button must be
pressed once after each motor start to enable the drive function to operate.
3. Lockout Plate Position Lever allows the control plate to be locked in any one of the three
positions for safety compliance at site:
Jacks and Drive With the plate in the left hand position, only four functions are available: jacks; drive
motors; front and rear wheel steering. These controls are used to manoeuvre and tie the
machine down in front of the mill, prior to relining operations.
Outer Beam In the centre lock position only the outer beam extend-retract function is available. This
position is used when the machine is tied down in front of the mill to extend or retract the
beam into or out of the mill.
Linercart With the plate in the right hand lock position, as shown in Figure: Baseframe Console
(Page 79), only the linercart function is available. This is a safety measure to prevent
inadvertent movement of the outer beam during the liner placement process.
The linercart is controlled by the Linercart Radio Remote Control Pendant.

12R4751-MRM384
4.11.1.1 REMOTE TRANSPORT CONTROL
The remote transport control pendant has been provided as a safety measure that allows the drive operator
to be positioned a short distance from the machine while it is in motion. The operator is then away from the
moving wheels and has better visibility around the machine. Alternatively, the drive operator may be on the
machine for best visibility and more precise manoeuvring.
The remote transport control pendant controls all functions on the base drive console except the linercart,
which has its own control pendant. When the remote transport control pendant is in use, the baseframe
console lockout plate must be manually set in the correct position. Refer to Baseframe Console (Page 79).
The operator of the remote transport control pendant must remain clear of the path of the wheels whenever
the machine is being moved.
If approved, via the outcome of site-specific risk analysis, the operator may manipulate the controls of the
remote transport control pendant while positioned on the machine itself. This may give the best visibility for
manoeuvring the machine.
In order to safely move the machine, travel speeds should be kept to a slow walking pace.
There should be a second person on the non control side of the machine to watch for any obstacles and
make sure the electrical cable is not in the machine path and is free to move.
All other personnel should be a minimum of three metres from the machine during motion.
The Relining mode and Beam mode functions cannot be operated at the same time. When the select switch
is moved between these two modes the machine will shutdown to prevent unexpected machine
movements.

12R4751-MRM384
Figure 39: Remote Transport Control Pendant
The two position baseframe lockout plate must be manually set in the corresponding position for the mode
switch.
Whenever any remote transport control pendant function is used the corresponding baseframe hydraulic
control must be free to move. Refer to Baseframe Console (Page 79).
To operate the remote transport control pendant joysticks, the enable button on top of each joystick must be
held down throughout the required function.

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Remote Transport Control Pendant (Page 81).
1. Indicator light is illuminated when the E-stop is reset and the hydraulic pump is ready to
run. This light indicates that the pendant is active and ready for use. The drive enable
button may need to be pressed.
2. Mode Switch is a three-position switch for selecting the mode required to operate the
linercart, beam and the drive/jacks. These mode selects must match the lockout plate
position:
Relining mode (top position): the linercart functions operate. (Lockout plate
to right.).
Beam mode (centre position): the outer beam will retract or extend. (Lockout
plate to right.) The beam mode has two actions:
Action 1: On power-up the beam can be moved with the remote transport
pendant without having to press the beam-enable button. Refer to Ancillary
Panel (Page 105) and How to Operate the Outer Beam. The machine needs to
be switched on in either beam mode or drive/jack mode.
Action 2: When the remote transport pendant has been switched into relining
mode the beam-enable button must be pressed for the pendant to move the
beam. (Lockout plate to right.)
When the beam mode is required without the beam-enable button then follow
this procedure (beam mode, Action 1):
Press the stop button on the motor control cabinet (MCC) before changing
modes. Refer to Controls on the Main Control Cabinet (Page 66)
Switch off the MCC isolator.
Choose either the beam mode or drive/jack mode on the remote transport
pendant.
Switch on the MCC isolator.
To start the machine, press the Motor Start button on the door of the main
control cabinet.
Drive/Jack mode (bottom position): all drive and steering functions operate.
The jacks will operate. (Lockout plate to left.)
The remote transport control pendant E-Stop has an insert to indicate when it is engaged.
In the four windows on the top of the E-Stop, the green colour turns red. This E-Stop
engages and disengages in the same manner as all other E-Stops.

12R4751-MRM384
Figure 40: Remote Transport Control Pendant

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Remote Transport Control Pendant - continued (Page 84).
4. Joystick #1 has four functions available only when the mode switch is in the Drive mode
position:
Front Wheels Steer Right; and
Front Wheels Steer Left.
The front steering does not centre when the control lever is released but remains in the
position where last set.
Drive Motor Control Forward; and
Drive Motor Control Reverse.
Drives the machine for manoeuvring up to or away from the mill. Control is proportional,
the further the lever is pushed the faster the machine will move. Movement will cease
when the lever is released.
5. Joystick #2 has two functions available only when the mode switch is in the Drive mode
position:
Rear Wheels Steer Right; and
Rear Wheels Steer Left.
The rear steering does not centre when the control lever is released but remains in the
position where last set.

12R4751-MRM384
6. Joystick #3 has four functions available only when the mode switch is in the Beam Setup
position.
Beam Extend; and
Beam Retract.
This control is used after the machine is tied down in front of the mill to extend or retract
the outer beam into or out of the mill. The outer beam must be fully extended to ensure
that the front beam clamps are engaged prior to relining operations, refer to Insert the
Outer Beam (Page 93).
During relining operations, this outer beam control may only be used when requested by
the operator inside the mill and this will be indicated by the beam enable beacon (Page
52). The beam enable beacon is activated from the Operator's Ancillary Panel (Page 105)
or Radio Remote Pendant (Page 111).
Jack control is available only when the mode switch is in the Jack mode position.
Front Jack Up; and
Front Jack Down.
Pulling the lever of the front jack control to the jack down position raises the machine in
order to pin or tie down the machine in front of the mill, or place packing under the
machine support plates while it is in its storage location.
If the pendant or its electrical cable is damaged:
If the remote transport pendant and/or pendant cable is damaged, then this fault may show as an activated
E-Stop. This will stop the machine and prevent it from starting.
In this case, a spare pendant and cable should be fitted while the damaged one is being repaired or
replaced.
In an emergency, to allow the machine to be started when a spare pendant and cable is not available,
disconnect the pendant cable from the rear of junction box 1 and replace it with the loop back plug tethered
nearby. This will clear the E-Stop detection and allow the machine to be started. To move the machine,
the cover on the Lockout Plate (Page 79) may be removed to access the control levers. This is only an
emergency measure and the cover must be replaced when the pendant is again ready for use.

12R4751-MRM384
4.12 Manoeuvring the Machine
Before the machine is moved it should first be set up in the Transport Configuration (Page 77).
All functions for manoeuvring (driving) the machine are located on the Remote Transport Control Pendant
(Page 81) which has to be coordinated with the position of the Baseframe Console (Page 79) lockout plate.
In order to safely move the machine, travel speeds should be kept to a slow walking pace. The machine is
driven by an operator walking beside the machine using the Remote Transport Control Pendant (Page 81).
Alternatively, the operator may be on the machine for improved visibility.
The operator is assisted by a travel observer who is positioned to check any blind spots for the operator
(typically on the opposite side of the machine). The observer warns the driver of any obstructions and also
ensures that the electrical trailing lead does not pull tight, is not in the machine’s travel path and is free to
move. All other personnel should be a minimum of three metres from the machine as it is manoeuvred.
The operator and the travel observer must pay attention to the power cable and ensure it will not be
pulled tight or run over by the machine wheels during machine manoeuvring operations.
Ensure the front jacks are fully retracted at all times when the machine is being manoeuvred.
Towing
The machine must not be towed or moved without the hydraulic pump operating and supplying pressure to
each drive motor/gearbox (by operating the drive control) or damage will occur to the gearbox brake
assemblies.
Steering
The independent operation of the steering control for the front and rear wheel sets is operated by two
hydraulic cylinders. These cylinders do not automatically centre but remain set in position when their control
levers are released.
Hence a steering direction may be set, the machine moved a little, the machine position checked and then
the steering direction adjusted if necessary. This facilitates manoeuvring the machine around any obstacles
and also accurate alignment of the machine during Initial Machine Entry (Page 91).
The independent steering control also allows for the use of four distinct steering modes. Refer to Steering
Flexibility (Page 88).

12R4751-MRM384
4.12.1 STEERING FLEXIBILITY
Figure 41: Typical Mill Relining Machine - Steering Flexibility
1. Crab steering. Both front and rear steering set to the same angle. The machine’s axis remains parallel to one
direction. A series of short forward/reverse movements with alternate crab angles will move the machine
sideways.
2. All wheel steering. Both front and rear steering set to the same direction. This gives the smallest turning
radius for highest manoeuvrability.
3. Rear wheel steering. Changes the direction of the machine axis while moving the rear of the machine to the
left or right.
4. Front wheel steering. Changes the direction of the machine axis while moving the front of the machine left or
right. This would be the normal steering mode in areas of few obstacles.

12R4751-MRM384
4.13 Mill Entry
4.13.1 MILL ENTRY CONFIGURATION
Figure 42: Typical Machine in Mill Entry Configuration
Mill Entry Configuration procedure:
Starting with the machine in the Transport Configuration (Page 77):
1. Make sure the offside view mirror has been removed and stored safely.
2. Make sure the operator’s seat and platform assembly have been removed from the machine.
3. Make sure the operator's hydraulic control levers are still in their lowered position with their cover down.
Also make sure the console on turntable console is secured close to (parallel with) the boom.
These first three steps were completed in the transport configuration procedure. They have been repeated
here as a check. If these components are incorrectly positioned then they will clash with the mill trunnion
and be damaged on attempted entry. Damaged hydraulic control levers will make the machine inoperative.
4. Check the position of the machine. It must be in front of the mill, in-line with the mill axis and with
sufficient room in front of the machine to allow slewing of the boom to the forward position. In this
position the machine will also be in-line with the floor mounted tiedown fittings.
5. Switch the machine control to a radio remote pendant at the Ancillary Panel (Page 105) and Activate the
Remote Control (Page 115) for use.
During this step the machine will automatically stop. The operator's hydraulic levers must be in their
lowered position with their cover down and then the machine may be restarted in the normal manner once
the radio pendant has been activated for use.

12R4751-MRM384
6. Using the Radio Remote Pendant (Page 111), position the boom so that it faces forward and is
horizontal.
To achieve this movement, the boom will need to be raised to avoid the grapple clashing with the
front safety rails, then slewed to the forward position and then lowered to the horizontal position. A
front safety rail section may be removed if necessary. Replace it immediately after this movement.
Do not extend the boom or beams (inner or outer).
Do not extend the boom or either beam section. Any one of these actions may cause the machine to
overbalance. It is not tied down yet.
The final boom position must be horizontal, parallel to the beams and facing forward, in line with the beams.
This position provides maximum clearances during entry through the mill trunnion.
The radio remote pendant may remain activated for setting up the machine inside the mill. It will not be
needed for the next steps in the mill entry procedure.

12R4751-MRM384
4.13.2 INITIAL MACHINE ENTRY
The floor mounted tiedown fittings in front of the mill will have been previously inspected (and repaired if
necessary) in Inspections Before Use (Page 65) and Prepare the Site and Mill (Page 76). The front and
rear tiedown equipment will also have been included in this inspection.
Before the machine enters the mill ensure that the mill has been prepared in accordance with Prepare the
Site and Mill (Page 76) above.
Make sure that all personnel are clear of the mill entry trunnion.
Make sure all personnel have evacuated the mill interior as access to or from the mill is blocked while the
Mill Relining Machine is entering through the trunnion.
1. Using the machine’s drive and steering functions for Manoeuvring the Machine (Page 87), drive the
machine into the mill with the machine axis parallel to the mill axis.
Ensure the machine front and rear tiedown equipment remains aligned with the floor mounted
tiedown assemblies. Refer to TQAMRM384 VDD 02 (Page 294), TQAMRM384 VDD 03 (Page 295)
and TQAMRM384VDD 05 (Page 297).
Align carefully the machine’s front tiedown plates with the floor-mounted front tiedown blocks.
If the tiedown plates hit the tiedown blocks, they can cause damage to the bolts and the concrete around
the blocks. Replace damaged tiedown equipment.
Ensure the front jacks are fully retracted at all times when the machine is being manoeuvred.
The Mill Relining Machine's boom has now entered the mill and the RUSSELL 7's axis is parallel with the mill
axis. The front pinning plates and rear baseframe tiedown rods are aligned (from above) with their
corresponding floor mounted fittings. Refer to Vendor Data Drawings (Page 265).

12R4751-MRM384
4.13.3 TIE DOWN THE MACHINE
Currently the machine is positioned in front of the mill with the boom having entered the mill trunnion. The
front pinning plates and rear baseframe shafts have already been aligned (from above) with their
corresponding floor mounted fittings. Refer to Initial Machine Entry. (Page 91)
Tie down Procedure:
Carrying out this procedure correctly ensures the operating reactions of the machine are supported by the
machine frame and front tiedown pins, not the wheels or jack hydraulic oil.
Refer to Front Tiedown Equipment (Page 33) and Rear Tiedown Equipment (Page 34).
1. Extend the front jacks to align the holes in the floor mounted blocks with the holes in the machine
pinning plates, on both sides. Refer to Baseframe Console (Page 79).
2. Insert both tiedown pins fully through the pinning plates at the end of the extension arms. Check that
each pin is secured by the overcentre latch.
3. Fully retract the front jacks to release the hydraulic load on the front jacks. Load will be taken by the
tiedown pins.
4. Fit the tiedown rods to the rear baseframe tiedown shafts and using the lynch pins provided, attach the
rear tiedown rod clevises to the rear floor mounted tiedown plates.
Each rear tiedown rod weighs 55.9 kg and will require more than one person to lift and install.
5. Tighten the tiedown rod nuts to just bear against the tiedown shafts. Do not overtighten. Use the outer
nuts to lock each rod from becoming loose due to machine vibration.
6. Place the floor grate over the tiedown floor access hole.
Ensure front jacks are relieved of pressure (fully retracted). Ensure the rear tiedown rods have tightened
down correctly.
The mill relining machine must rest on the front tiedown pins supported by the floor mounted blocks before
any relining procedure begins.
The machine is now tied down in front of the mill, with the machine boom inserted into the mill trunnion.

12R4751-MRM384
4.13.4 INSERT THE OUTER BEAM
Now that the machine is tied down the outer beam may be extended.
Figure 43: Machine Rear - Beam Pinning Positions
1. Outer Beam Cylinder is used to extend and retract the outer beam in three cylinder strokes.
2. Beam Cylinder Mounting Clamps are used to lock the position of the cylinder end on the baseframe.
3. Outer Beam Pinning Positions. The cylinder rod knuckle may be pinned to the outer beam at each of these
three positions.

12R4751-MRM384
Outer Beam Extension Procedure:
The outer beam control is located at the Remote Transport Control Pendant (Page 81). Starting with the
beam fully retracted, as shown in Machine Rear - Beam Pinning Positions (Page 93).
1. Fully retract the outer beam cylinder. This extends the outer beam into the mill by one increment.
2. Remove the beam pin from the (front) first pinning position.
3. Extend the cylinder and align the cylinder rod knuckle with the second (next) pinning position and
replace the pin in this next pinning position and cylinder knuckle.
4. Repeat the above steps 1 through 3 once more. The pin is now in the rear pinning position. Rotate
the pin to engage the pin handle in the locking bracket on the outer beam, this ensures that the pin
cannot become loose or fall out during relining operations.
5. Fully retract the outer beam cylinder. This extends the outer beam into the mill by the final increment.
The outer beam is now fully extended into the mill.
Hazard: Sudden, unexpected movement. At full extension the outer beam is vertically locked in place by the
beam clamps on the front baseframe end plate. Failure to extend the beam fully could result in dangerous,
unexpected beam movement.
Hazard: Sudden, unexpected movement. During relining operations, the beam cylinder pin must be
engaged with the cylinder rod knuckle and the beam at all times, or the beam could slide on the baseframe
without warning.
The machine may now be set up for mill relining operations.
Figure 44: Typical Machine with Outer Beam Extended (into Mill)

12R4751-MRM384
4.14 Relining Configuration
Relining configuration is the arrangement of fittings and controls necessary to conduct mill relining
operations.
4.14.1 ATTACH THE STAIRS
Before continuing, the stairs must be attached to the platform. They must only be attached at the access
point on the platform. They may be attached at any one of the three gateways at the top of the stairs.
Refer to Figure: Platform and Removable Stairs (Page 56).
To attach the stairs:
1. Insert the two alignment lugs into the indents on the platform;
2. Lower the catch plate over the alignment lugs.
3. Lock all four swivel castors before using the stairs.
4. Close the two gates at the top of the stairs to cover the gateways not being used.
To remove the stairs: unlock the castors, lift the catch plate and carefully move the stairs to extract the
alignment lugs from the indents.
The stairs must be removed from the platform before the Mill Relining Machine is moved.

12R4751-MRM384
4.14.2 OBSERVER'S PENDANT
The observer’s pendant is fitted with an E-Stop button which functions to shut down the machine. The
designated safety observer uses this pendant if an emergency is occurring or about to occur.
The pendant is attached via electrical cable to the junction box mounted on the front of the inner beam.
Figure 45: Observer's Pendant
1. Pendant enclosure is IP65 rated.
If the observer's pendant or its electrical cable is damaged:
In this case, a spare pendant and cable should be fitted while the damaged one is being repaired or
replaced.
To allow the machine to be started when a spare pendant and cable is not available, disconnect the pendant
cable from the side of the junction box and replace with the loop back plug provided. This will clear the E-
Stop detection and allow the machine to operate but will not allow the observer's pendant to be used.
Injury hazard. The potential risks to relining personnel are increased without an observer. Conduct a risk
assessment before allowing the machine to be used without this pendant.
Never let the pendant cable lie where it is likely to be damaged.

12R4751-MRM384
4.14.3 SET UP THE OPERATOR'S CONTROLS
Procedure for Setting Up the Operator's Controls:
1. Using the Radio Remote Control (Page 111), slew the turntable so that the operator’s seat and platform
assembly may easily be installed. Access to this position will normally be from the top of the outer
beam.
2. Transport the operator’s seat and platform into the mill. Refer to Operator’s Console (Page 41).
Attach the platform to the turntable deck, by tilting its rear upwards so that the platform frame legs
may be inserted into the mounts on the turntable, and the stop blocks on the underside of the frame
legs may clear the edge of the turntable retaining blocks. Lower the platform to engage the stop
blocks behind the retaining blocks. The operator’s seat may now be installed onto the platform
spigot.
3. Transport the offside view mirror into the mill and stand it in its socket on the hydraulic mount cabinet.
Adjust the mirror angle to view the grapple tool area on other side of the boom from the operator's
position and secure by using the screw locking pin in the pole socket.
4. Select and set up the operator's controls to be used for relining operations.
Changing the position of the radio-PVG-joystick switch or PVG lever cover may shut the machine down. It
will be started again (if necessary) in the normal manner from the main control cabinet at the conclusion of
this step.
For the PVG valve control levers:
a. Lift back the protective cover for the liner placement levers and raise the PVG control levers to their
operating position. Refer to Lowering and Raising PVG Control Levers. (Page 104) (proximity
sensor switches machine off, if it is not off already and the radio was selected.)
b. At the Operator's Ancillary Panel (Page 105), set the Joysticks-PVG-Radio select switch to the
centre "O" position. (If the radio was selected and this switch is operated first, before lifting the
cover, then the machine is still automatically switched off). The remote radio control pendant is
switched off, removed from the mill and stored safely for reuse at a later time. The joystick controls
may be left attached to the seat assembly or removed from the mill and stored safely for reuse at a
later time.

12R4751-MRM384
OR
For the radio remote controls:
a. Ensure the Joysticks-PVG-Radio select switch on the ancillary panel is in the radio ON position.
The joystick controls may be left attached to the seat assembly or removed from the mill and stored
safely for reuse at a later time.
b. Ensure the liner placement console protective cover is closed over the PVG valve levers.
c. Activate a remote radio control unit. For operation of the radio control refer to Radio Remote
Control (Page 111).
OR
For the joystick controls:
a. Transport the joystick controls assembly into the mill. Fit the joystick controls to the to the seat
assembly and secure at the rear to a suitable height with the linchpins provided. Refer to Joystick
Controls (Page 107).
b. Adjust the height of the operator's arm rests using the screw locking pins provided.
c. Unplug the loopback plug for the joystick controls (underneath the platform assembly). The
machine will stop. Plug in the cable for the joystick controls.
d. At the Operator's Ancillary Panel (Page 105), set the Joysticks-PVG-Radio select switch to
"Joysticks". This will disable the ancillary panel blue liner release enable button (only one, now on
the joysticks arm to be operational at any one time). The remote radio control pendant is switched
off, removed from the mill and stored safely for reuse at a later time.
5. Restart the machine from the main control cabinet using the normal Starting Sequence (Page 73).

12R4751-MRM384
4.14.4 CHECKS BEFORE COMMENCING RELINING OPERATIONS
Check that the following have been done before commencing relining operations:
a. Operator is seated at the console with seat belt buckled.
b. Worklights are connected and light pole (if fitted) is switched on at the Ancillary Panel (Page 105).
c. Lockout plate at the Baseframe Console (Page 79) is set to linercart.
The machine is now set up in mill relining configuration inside the mill and relining operations may
commence. Refer to Figure: Machine in Mill Relining Configuration (Page 99).
Crush hazard. When using any machine functions, the operator must be alert and constantly vigilant as to
the whereabouts of the other crew members in the mill.
Figure 46: Typical Machine in Mill Relining Configuration

12R4751-MRM384
4.15 Mill Relining Operations
4.15.1 RELINING MACHINE OPERATION
The Mill Relining Machine will handle new mill liners under all load cases to the specified rated capacity
indicated on the main boom. It is only to be used for placing new liners on the mill shell and lifting used
liners from the mill charge. The various motions of the machine will permit the operator to place the new
liners in exact position against the mill shell, ready for liner bolt fit-up.
On the front of the grapple tool is a load ring which, in conjunction with slings, is used to lift old liners onto the
linercart for transport out of the mill. The hook assembly may be used with the load ring when required. It
should not be fitted when it is not in use. This allows the load ring to be safely secured while the grapple
tool is in use.
The Mill Relining Machine places the new liners using the grapple and grapple tool as an interface with the
liners.
This RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine is to be used solely for the purpose of BALL Mill Liner
placement.
Never use the machine to dislodge or remove worn liners from the mill shell.
Never stand beneath a suspended load, as old liners are likely to be cracked and will fall if they break apart.
New liners may also have existing cracks.
Always stop the Mill Relining Machine when personnel enter or leave the mill as unexpected machine
movements create a risk for personnel within the confined space of the mill trunnion.
Worn liners may be removed from the mill floor and placed on the linercart with relative ease by using the
Russell Mineral Equipment O-ZONE tools in conjunction with the Mill Relining Machine. These tools may
also be used to reposition new liners so that their lifting lugs are up and may then be engaged with the
grapple tool for placement on the mill shell.

12R4751-MRM384
4.16 Operator's Controls
This section covers the controls available to the operator during relining operations.
The operator must wear the seatbelt at all times when seated at the operator’s console.
4.16.1 OPERATOR'S HYDRAULIC CONTROLS
The operator may use these controls while at the Operator's Console (Page 41).
The liner pin-release lever is interlocked with a liner release enable button on the Ancillary Panel (Page
105). Also, the liner pin-release lever is shorter than the others. This is to give the operator a tactile
reminder that operating this lever could release a suspended liner.
Figure 47: Operator's Hydraulic Controls

12R4751-MRM384
1. Boom slew control. Slewing is continuous, 360º, in either
direction. Pushing the lever rotates the main turntable, boom and
the operator console, counter-clockwise. Pulling the lever rotates
them clockwise.
Boom slew is fitted with a motion control manifold to allow gentle

acceleration of the load as well as function control and locking. It
also provides the pilot pressure to release the spring-loaded
brake on the slew gearbox. Note that a flow restrictor is fitted
into the circuit to control the speed of re-application of the slew
brake once the control lever is released.
2. Boom raise-lower control. This changes the elevation angle of the

boom. Pull the lever (towards the operator) raises the boom, push
the lever lowers the boom.
3. Boom extend-retract control. Push the lever to the ‘out’ position

will extend the boom. Pull the lever to the ‘in’ position retracts it.
The boom extend-retract function is carried out by an internal

cylinder attached to the outer and intermediate boom sections. A
wire rope cable controls the extension/retraction of the inner
boom and is attached to the outer and inner boom sections. It
runs on sheaves attached to the intermediate boom. This cable
configuration causes the inner boom section to move twice as fast
as the intermediate boom section.
4. Inner beam extend-retract control. Movement of the inner beam is

used when the position the turntable and grapple is required.
Pushing the lever ‘out’ causes the inner beam to extend out of the
outer beam into the mill, and pulling the lever ‘in’ makes the beam
retract into the outer beam. Total inner beam extension is
specified in VDD01 Placeholder Page (Page 293).
5. Liner pin-release control. Refer also to the liner release enable

button on the Ancillary Panel (Page 105). The liner pin release
control is the engagement of the grapple tool pins with the new
liner. Pushing this lever 'out' inserts the pins into the liner lugs,
securely pinning the grapple tool to the liner. Pulling this lever 'in'
releases the pins from the liner provided that the liner release
enable button is also pressed. This release operation may also
be called 'unpinning the liner'.

12R4751-MRM384
6. Liner lift-lower control is used to lift or lower liners at the grapple

head. When the grapple head is lowered, the loose fit of the
grapple tool mounting pin in the grapple head allows
approximately 10° of movement of the grapple tool for ease of
alignment with the attachment lugs on a liner.
When the liner lift lever is moved to the ‘raise’ position, the
rotation upward of the grapple head causes a locking action
between it and the grapple tool due to contact of the grapple tool
liner reaction foot with the liner. The liner reaction foot must be
correctly selected for each type of liner. This provides stability of
the liner for precise placement on the mill shell.
7. Grapple slew control. Use to control slew rotation of the grapple

body, including grapple tool, about an axis near the end of the
boom. Pushing the lever slews the grapple body counter-
clockwise. Pulling the lever slews the grapple clockwise. The
range of movement is listed in VDD01 Placeholder Page (Page
293).
8. Grapple roll control. The grapple head and the grapple tool can
rotate about an axis parallel to the centreline of the boom.
Pushing the lever will result in counter-clockwise roll of the
grapple, and pulling the lever will give clockwise roll. The range
of movement is listed in VDD01 Placeholder Page (Page 293).

12R4751-MRM384
4.16.2 RAISING AND LOWERING THE HYDRAULIC CONTROL LEVERS
The hydraulic control levers at the Operator's Console (Page 41) must be raised before they can be used.
Figure 48: Raising the Hydraulic Control Levers
The above figure Raising the Hydraulic Control Levers (Page 104) shows the two roll pins (items #1 and #2)
and the flat surface (item #3), that lock the lever in its normal operating position.
To raise a hydraulic control lever:
Start with the lever in its lowered position.
1. Rotate the lever upwards (A);
Rotate the lever fully into the vertical position so that when it is lowered, the rear ends of the lever will pass
in front of the roll pins #2.
2. Lower the lever vertically (B);

3. The lever is now locked in position (C) by the control face #3 and the two roll pins #1 and #2.
To lower the lever, reverse the above steps.
The hydraulic control levers at the operator's console must be lowered and covered whenever there is a
reasonable risk that they may be damaged. Refer to Insert the Outer Beam (Page 93) and Incremental
Rotation of the Mill (Page 134).
A safety interlock detects the position of the cover for the hydraulic levers. The levers and the cover must
be lowered before the radio remote control or the joysticks can be used.

12R4751-MRM384
4.16.3 ANCILLARY PANEL
Figure 49: Ancillary Panel
Crush Hazard. When the seat and platform are situated directly above the outer beam, the linercart and/or
its load can clash with the operator’s platform. The linercart switch may be used to disable operation of the
linercart. Also, the linercart must be prevented from passing through the mill trunnion whenever personnel
are entering or exiting the mill.

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Ancillary Panel (Page 105).
2. "Boom-Beam Clash Warning" Indicator. When lit, this indicator is a warning that the boom
slew and boom raise functions have been made unavailable, because the rear of the boom
could have clashed with the inner beam. The boom will need to be lowered sufficiently to
enable the slew function to become available again. Alternatively, the boom will need to
be lowered slightly and then slewed to a non-clash position.
3. "Liner Release Enable" Button. The liner cannot be released from the grapple tool unless
this BLUE liner release enable button is pressed at the same time. This is a safety
measure.
The liner safety bar is also used to manually lock the tool pins, as explained in Grapple
Tool and Liner Pinning Operation (Page 127).
4. Liner Release Interlock Fault Indicator. This indicator is a vital safety feature and during
normal operations it is not illuminated. When illuminated it alerts the operator to a fault in
the Liner Release Control Interlock system that prevents inadvertent liner release.
Press “RESET” to clear the fault.
If the indicator comes back on immediately, a potentially dangerous fault has been
detected in the system and mill relining operations must cease until the cause of the fault
has been identified and rectified. Refer to Liner Release Interlock Fault Indicator (Page
129).
5. "Console on Turntable (COT ) Enable Fault Reset" button. The red indicator light comes on
if there is a fault with the COT-enable and/or the PVG-enable operations (joysticks and
pendant). This indicator has two modes. The red light will flash until the fault is repaired
and the COT-enable-fault-reset button is pushed. The red light is fully on until the COT-
enable solenoid is repaired.
6. Joystick - PVG Controls - Radio Remote Control, Selection Switch. Allows the operator to
select between using Joystick Controls, Operator Hydraulic Controls or the Radio Remote
Control. Only one set of controls may be selected and used at any one time. The middle
position disables both the joysticks and the radio remote control, allowing the use of the
operator's hydraulic controls at the operator’s console.
The select switch light will flash until a mode selection is completed or if JB2 safety relay
E-Stop is on. A JB2 safety relay E-Stop fault must be repaired. Then push the COT-
enable-fault-reset button.
7. "COT Enable" indicator light. The indicator light comes on when the operator's controls are
available to operate.
8. "COT Enable" button. Lift the hydraulic-control-cover and push the COT-enable-button.
This is done each time the hydraulic-control-cover is lifted or the machine is re-started.
When enabled, pressing this button will disable the COT.

12R4751-MRM384
4.16.4 JOYSTICK CONTROLS
The mill relining machine is equipped with joystick controls which may be installed at the operator's platform.
This permits the operator to carry out the same relining functions of the machine that are controlled at the
main console.
The joystick controls are only installed after the machine has been tied down and the outer beam has been
inserted through the mill trunnion. Once the joysticks have been installed onto the operator’s control
platform, the plug beneath the platform needs to be connected for the joysticks to operate.
Figure 50: Joystick Controls

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Joystick Controls (Page 107).
1. Left Hand Joystick Control (Page 109)
2. Right Hand Joystick Control (Page 110)
3. "Console on Turntable (COT) Enable Fault Reset" button. The red indicator light comes on if there is a fault with
the COT-enable and/or the PVG-enable operations (joysticks and pendant). This indicator has two modes. The
red light will flash until the fault is repaired and the COT-enable-fault-reset button is pushed. The red light is fully
on until the COT-enable solenoid is repaired.
5. Liner Release Enable Button. Must be used in conjunction with the release button on top of the left hand
joystick, to enable opening of the grapple tool pins. This is a tactile reminder that the operator is about to
release the liner.
6. Joystick plug and loopback plug. Either the joystick plug or the loopback plug must be connected for the
machine to operate.
To operate the joystick controls, the three position switch on the Ancillary Panel (Page 105) must first be
turned to select the joystick controls. The joystick controls may be switched off by turning this selection
switch to the centre or to the right, pendant, position. In the centre position, the operator must use the PVG
Liner Placement Controls (Page 101) at the operator's console on the turntable.
When the joystick plug is disconnected, the loop back plug provided must be connected or the machine will
not operate, as the E-Stop circuit will be activated.
Each of the joysticks has a deadman trigger located on the front of the handle. The deadman trigger has to
be squeezed continuously for that joystick to be used.
Only one BLUE liner release enable button (for the selected control position) is activated for use. Liners
may only be released from one operator control position at any one time.
All E-Stops at all connected control locations remain useable at all times.
Never leave a selected joystick control unattended.
Ensure that all personnel are clear of the machine, including hands off all controls, before selecting
alternative controls.

12R4751-MRM384
4.16.4.1 LEFT HAND JOYSTICK CONTROL

.
Figure 51: Left Hand Joystick Control
1. The joystick has four functions:
Boom Slew Clockwise;
Boom Slew Counter-Clockwise;
Inner Beam Extend; and
Inner Beam Retract.
2. Buttons on top of the left hand joystick control liner pinning (front button) and liner release (rear button). The liner
release function must be operated in conjunction with the Liner Release Enable Button.
3. Toggle switch on top of the left hand joystick controls:
Liner Lower; and
Liner Raise.
4. Deadman switch. Must be pressed to activate joystick functionality.

12R4751-MRM384
4.16.4.2 RIGHT HAND JOYSTICK CONTROL
.
Figure 52: Right Hand Joystick Control
1. The joystick has four functions:
Boom Extend;
Boom Retract;
Boom Lower; and
Boom Raise.
2. Left hand toggle switch on top of the right hand joystick controls:
Grapple Roll Counter-Clockwise; and
Grapple Roll Clockwise.
3. Right hand toggle switch on top of the right hand joystick controls:
Grapple Slew Left; and
Grapple Slew Right.
4. Deadman switch. Must be pressed to activate joystick functionality.

12R4751-MRM384
4.17 Radio Remote Control
The Mill Relining Machine is equipped with a radio remote control unit. This allows the operator to control
the mill relining functions from any location inside the mill. The operator can take advantage of being in the
best position to view the relining operations.
Never leave an active remote unattended.
Always ensure that the remote is in clear line of sight of the machine and within 10 metres
Ensure that all personnel are clear of the machine before activating controls.
Do not use the radio remote control pendant if there is any doubt as to its serviceability.
Figure 53: 7-axis Radio Remote Control Functions
Each of the joysticks has a red deadman button set into the top of the handle. One of the deadman buttons
has to be pressed continuously for any joystick or other control to be used. The tool interlock switch is the
deadman function only for the grapple tool release.
When the radio remote control is in use then the blue liner release enable button on the operator’s
placement console is deactivated. Liners may only be released from one operator control position at any
one time. This is an important safety feature.

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: 7-axis Radio Remote Control Functions (Page 111).
1. Remote Control 'ON/OFF' switch is on the side of the pendant body. Insert the key and turn
it clockwise, then press the green button near it to activate the pendant.
2. Deadman buttons are located on each side of the unit. To operate any of the joystick
functions, depress and continue to hold either of the deadman buttons.
3. Joystick #1 has four functions:
Boom Slew Clockwise;
Boom Slew Counter-Clockwise;
Inner Beam Extend; and
Inner Beam Retract.
4. Green LED. The green LED conveys three messages:
LED off - The transmitting unit is switched off.

LED blinks fast - The transmitting unit is switched on and there is no radio link.
LED blinks slowly - The radio remote control is started and the radio link is present.
5. Red LED. The red LED conveys three main messages:
LED off - The transmitting unit works correctly.

LED blinks - The battery is nearly flat.
LED blinks once at power on - the E-Stop button on the pendant is engaged.
6. Joystick #4 has four functions:
Boom Extend;
Boom Retract;
Boom Lower; and
Boom Raise.

12R4751-MRM384
Figure 54: 7-axis Radio Remote Control Functions - continued

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: 7-axis Radio Remote Control Functions - continued (Page 112)
8. Joystick #2 has four functions.
Grapple Roll Clockwise;
Grapple Roll Counter-Clockwise;
Liner Lower; and
Liner Raise.
9. Joystick #3 has two functions:
Grapple Slew Right;
Grapple Slew Left.
or N/A – no machine motion occurs when moving this joystick in these directions.
10. Liner Release Enable Toggle Switch. This switch must be used with the Liner Release Switch to release a liner
. Operate and hold the toggle switch while also operating the Liner Release Switch.
11. Liner Pinning and Release Toggle Switch has two functions:
Liner Release. The Liner Release Enable Switch (see above) must be held for this function to operate.
Both hands are used to remind the operator that a liner is about to be released.
Liner Pinning. Operate this switch to pin a liner with the grapple tool or to return the grapple tool pins to
their closed position.
12. Liner Release Interlock Fault Indicator. This indicator is a vital safety feature and during normal operations it is
not illuminated. When illuminated it alerts the operator to a fault in the Liner Release Control Interlock system
that prevents inadvertent liner release.
Press “RESET” on the Ancillary Panel (Page 105) to clear the fault.
If the indicator comes back on immediately, a potentially dangerous fault has been detected in the system and
mill relining operations must cease until the cause of the fault has been identified and rectified. Refer to Liner
Release Fault Indicator (Page 129).
The Liner Release Interlock Fault Indicator provides an alert that the liner release control system has
detected a fault. The integrity of the liner release system is essential for the continuation of safe mill
relining operations. Do not conduct mill relining operations with this indicator illuminated. Death or serious
injury to personnel could result.
The liner release functions at the console are still enabled when this fault indicator is lit.
For more information about the radio remote control unit, refer to the manufacturer's manual.

12R4751-MRM384
4.17.1 ACTIVATE THE REMOTE CONTROLL
The radio remote control pendant must be activated to use any of its functions. To activate and use the
remote control unit:
1. Install a fully charged battery into the remote control unit.
2. Install the correct electronic key for the specific unit into the key position (see illustration below).
3. Turn the radio remote switch on the Ancillary Panel (Page 105) to the Radio position. This will
automatically stop the mill relining machine if it was already running.
4. Lower the Operator's Hydraulic Control levers and close the cover over them.
5. Make sure the E-Stop on the remote control pendant is not engaged.
6. On the Radio Remote Control, press the green START button on the transmitting unit (number 3 below)
until the green LED in the transmitting unit starts blinking slowly and the E-Stop light on the MCC goes
out. Refer to Figure: Radio Remote Control Functions (Page 111).
7. Start the machine normally.
8. Once the remote control pendant is active, test the pendant E-Stop by engaging and disengaging it, then
restart the machine.
Figure 55: Activating the Remote Control
1. Battery. Always start relining operations with a fully charged battery.
2. Electronic key is unique to each receiver. It must be inserted correctly before using the remote control.
3. Start button. Press this button to start the remote control. The green LED on the remote will start blinking
slowly when a link is established with the receiving unit in Junction Box 2.

12R4751-MRM384
4.17.2 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
The radio remote control requires basic maintenance and inspection prior to use to ensure that it is safe and
undamaged.
Pre-use Inspections
1. Rubber boots around joysticks, buttons and switches should be intact and remain weatherproof to
prevent the ingress of contaminants. Any tears or damage to the protective boots will require
replacement of the boots.
2. All joysticks, buttons and switches should work smoothly and correctly.
3. Labels should be legible.
4. Clean any dirt from the radio remote with a damp cloth. Do not immerse in any liquid.
5. Ensure the battery terminals are clean and the battery is fully charged (charging takes about four hours).
4.17.3 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Figure 56: Remote Control Battery Replacement
To replace the battery use the following procedure:
1. Make sure the remote control is turned off and not active. Press the E-Stop and leave it engaged.
2. Turn the unit upside down.
3. Push the battery sideways slightly and lift to disengage it from the base (A).
4. Lift and slide the battery out (B).
5. Insert a charged battery, ensuring it locks in correctly.
6. Disengage the E-Stop. Check that the machine is safe to start. To test the unit, use the procedure for
Activating the Remote Control (Page 115).

12R4751-MRM384
4.18 Liner Release Enable System
This is not a complete guide to the Liner-Release-Enable system. If a persistent fault occurs, call the RME
Help Hotline (Page 10) for technical assistance.
When a mill is relined, one of the main safety hazards is that a liner could be released accidentally from the
grapple tool. This could seriously injure or kill a crew member.
This mill relining machine has been fitted with a programmed Liner-Release-Enable System (LRE system).
The purpose of the LRE system is to reduce the risk of a liner being released accidentally.
With this system, the operation of two devices is needed to release a liner:
 the main radio remote control pendant (main radio) and
 the liner-release-enable radio (LRE radio)
The main radio is used by the operator. The LRE radio is used by a member of the relining crew who is
located on the mill charge in proximity to the grapple tool.
Before and during each reline, do the Checks of the Liner-Release-Enable System (Page 122).
The Liner-Release-Enable system is only required when relining in radio mode.

12R4751-MRM384
4.18.1 MAIN PARTS OF THE LINER RELEASE ENABLE SYSTEM
This section will refer to the following topics in this manual. The parts of the LRE system for that topic are
shown.
Radio Remote Control (Page 111) (main radio):
 Liner-release-enable switch
 Liner-release switch
 Liner-release-enable fault indicator
Liner-Release-Enable Radio (LRE radio) (Page 117):
 Liner-release-enable button
Ancillary Panel (Page 105):
 Liner-release-enable button
 Liner-release-enable fault indicator (which includes a RESET function)
Junction Box 2 (Page 46):
 Liner-release safety relay (inside junction box 2)
 Sounder for the LRE system

12R4751-MRM384
4.18.2 LINER RELEASE ENABLE RADIO
This is not a complete guide to the Liner-Release-Enable system. If a persistent fault occurs, call the RME
Help Hotline (Page 10) for technical assistance.
Figure 57: Liner Release Enable Radio
1. Pendant case is IP65 rated.
2. Liner-Release-Enable button. Refer to the Liner Release Enable System (Page 117).
3. Signalling LED. The signalling LED has four states:
 Switched off: unit is switched off or not yet started

 A single blink on startup: the E-stop button is engaged
 Slow blinking: the pendant is operational
 Fast blinking: low battery - the pendant will switch off 3½ minutes after the LED starts blinking
quickly
1. Starting key switch.
2. Start button.
To start the pendant:

1. Make sure the main isolator on the MCC is turned ON
2. Insert the starting key switch
3. Push the start button until the signalling LED starts to blink
4. Do the Start-up Checks

12R4751-MRM384
4.18.3 HOW TO RELEASE A LINER FROM THE GRAPPLE TOOL
The operation of releasing a liner requires the input of 2 devices:
 the Radio Remote Control Pendant (main radio) and
 the Liner-Release-Enable radio pendant (LRE radio).
The main radio is used by the operator. The LRE radio is operated by a relining crew member on the mill
charge.
Terminology:
For this procedure, the following terminology will apply:
Operator: The person operating the mill relining machine with the radio remote control pendant (main radio).
Crew member: The person operating the Liner-Release-Enable radio pendant (LRE radio).
Cycle: The length of time that the system allows for the entire procedure for releasing a liner, before it
engages a fault condition.
Procedure: The entire procedure for releasing a liner from the grapple tool, as shown below.
Fault condition: A condition caused by the Liner-Release-Enable system that disables the liner-release
function or engages an E-Stop, or both. Error codes are displayed on the liner-release safety relay. The
procedure cannot be restarted until the fault condition is reset.
Procedure for releasing a liner:
1. Make sure all hydraulic movement has stopped for at least two seconds.
2. The crew member decides that it is safe to release a liner. The crew member presses the liner-release-
enable button on the LRE radio. The LRE sounder comes on intermittently.
3. Within five seconds, the operator pushes the liner-release-enable switch on the main radio. The LRE
sounder comes on continuously.
4. The operator pushes the liner-release switch on the main radio to release the liner.
The entire procedure must be completed within 12 seconds, or the cycle will stop.

12R4751-MRM384
4.18.4 FAULT CONDITIONS IN THE LINER-RELEASE-ENABLE SYSTEM
Crush Hazard. The liner-release-enable system is essential to the safe operation of the mill relining
machine. Do not attempt to reline if the system has a persistent fault condition.
Fault Conditions for Incomplete Operation
a. If the procedure is not completed within 12 seconds:
 the sounder stops
 the liner-release-enable fault indicators illuminate
 the liner-release function is disabled
In this case, the system will reset if the operator and the crew member release the controls.
a. If the operator or crew member continues to hold the controls for a total of 20 seconds:
 the liner-release-enable fault indicators are latched
 an E-Stop condition is engaged
 an error code is displayed on the liner-release safety relay inside Junction Box 2 (Page 46)
In this case, one of the crew members must press the liner-release-enable fault indicator on the Ancillary
Panel (Page 105) to unlatch it and reset the system. This will also disengage the E-Stop condition.
The operator may operate other hydraulic functions while a liner is released. This does not extend the
cycle time.
If any of the liner-release functions on the main radio or the LRE radio are released during a cycle, that
cycle will stop and you will have to start the operation again.

12R4751-MRM384
Other Fault Conditions
A number of other situations can cause a fault condition in the liner-release-enable system. If a fault
condition occurs:
 the sounder stops (if it is operating)
 the liner-release-enable fault indicators illuminate
 the liner-release function is disabled
 an Emergency Stop condition may be engaged
 an error code is displayed on the liner-release safety relay inside Junction Box 2 (Page 46)
One of the crew members must press the liner-release-enable fault indicator on the Ancillary Panel (Page
105) to unlatch it and reset the system. This may clear the fault.
Persistent Fault
If the fault occurs again:

1. Stop the machine, if it is still operating
2. Switch OFF the main isolator on the Main Control Cabinet
3. All personnel must exit the mill
4. Call the RME Help Hotline (Page 10) for technical assistance.
4.18.5 CHECKS OF THE LINER-RELEASE-ENABLE SYSTEM
4.18.5.1 INSPECTIONS BEFORE EACH RELINE
Do these inspections before you start a reline:
 Examine the electrical enclosures for ingress
 Examine the push-buttons for ingress
 Make sure the wiring terminals are tight
 Make sure the push-button contacts are attached securely
 See if the liner-release-enable safety relay inside Junction Box 2 (Page 46) shows any fault codes
If any of the inspections give unsatisfactory results:
a. Do any repairs that are needed
b. If a fault code shows on the safety relay, try to reset it using the method shown above in Fault
Conditions (Page 121). If a persistent fault occurs, call the RME Help Hotline (Page 10) for technical
assistance.

12R4751-MRM384
4.18.5.2 TESTS BEFORE EACH RELINE
Do these tests of the liner-release-enable system before each reline:
1. At the Ancillary Panel (Page 105), select "Console" mode
a. Remove the cover of the operator's console and install a hydraulic lever in the valve for the liner-
release function. Operate the liner-release valve: make sure the grapple tool pins do not move.
Remove the hydraulic lever and replace the cover of the console.
b. Stay in Console mode and operate the liner-release-enable (blue) button: make sure the grapple
tool pins do not move
2. At the ancillary panel, select "Radio" mode
a. do the procedure to enable a liner to be released (Page 120), i.e. steps 1 through 3 (the sounder
operates continuously): make sure the grapple tool pins do not move
If any test results are unsatisfactory:
a. Stop the machine, if it is still operating
b. Switch OFF the main isolator on the Main Control Cabinet
c. All personnel exit the mill
d. Call the RME Help Hotline (Page 10) for technical assistance.
4.18.5.3 TESTS AT THE START OF EACH SHIFT
Do test 2 again at the start of each shift.
Crush Hazard. The liner-release-enable system is essential to the safe operation of the mill relining
machine. Do not continue if the system has a persistent fault condition.

12R4751-MRM384
4.19 Linercart Operation
The linercart is used to transport new liners into the mill and worn liners out of the mill for disposal. Controls
for the linercart are located on the linercart pendant. The Baseframe Console (Page 79) lockout plate must
be positioned fully to the right before the Linercart Radio Remote Control Pendant may be used.
The linercart operator must ensure the linercart path is clear of personnel or any obstruction, particularly in
the confined space of the mill trunnion.
The linercart operator must ensure the linercart rated capacity is never exceeded.
The linercart load must be stacked in a stable configuration. If loading multiple used liners on the linercart,
they must be loaded in a stable manner.
Linercart motion can cause the load to move and become unstable. Ensure the liner stack can clear the
mill trunnion.
Drive the linercart carefully; the slow speed detent should be used when the linercart approaches either end
of the beam. Stop the linercart before it hits the beam stop; a sudden jolt could dislodge the linercart load.
Do not ride on the linercart or attempt to enter the mill while the linercart is operating.
Commencing operation outside the mill:
1. Place the new liner on the linercart with its lifting lugs up.
a. The liner must be placed lengthways on the linercart, this ensures it can pass through the mill
trunnion. The linercart would typically be positioned at the rear of the beam and the linercart
turntable may also be rotated to assist with loading.
b. Check that the liner is stable and correctly aligned to fit through the mill trunnion. The turntable
hydraulic slew motor will prevent rotation while the linercart is moving.
2. Transport the new liner into the mill on the linercart.

12R4751-MRM384
4.19.1 LINERCART PENDANT
The linercart pendant is used for operation of the linercart and is attached via electrical cable to the main
control cabinet. It is normally stored with its cable looped on the bracket provided underneath the platform
near the cabinet. This hand held pendant may also be located in and operated from the platform handrail
bracket which is fixed to the top of the handrail. Never let the connecting cable lie on the ground where it is
likely to be damaged.
The pendant is fitted with dual position press buttons for linercart movement. The first detent position
results in a slow speed; pressing the button further to the second detent increases the linercart speed. This
provides control over the speed of the linercart as it approaches the stops at the end of the beam.
Figure 58: Linercart Pendant

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Linercart Pendant (Page 125)
1. Pendant Enclosure. IP65 rated to stop ingress of dirt and moisture into the pendant.
3. Two-position Motion Button. Pressing this button operates the linercart out of the mill.
4. Two-position Motion Button. Pressing this button operates the linercart into the mill.
5. Pendant ON Indicator. When illuminated it indicates that the pendant is available for use.
If the indicator is ‘OFF’, the pendant control may be disconnected or may have been
disabled at the Ancillary Panel (Page 105).
If the pendant or its electrical cable is damaged
If the pendant and/or pendant cable is damaged, then this fault may be detected as an activated E-Stop
which will stop the machine and prevent it from starting.
In this case a spare pendant and cable should be fitted while this one is being repaired or replaced.
To allow the machine to be started when a spare pendant and cable is not available, disconnect the pendant
cable from the side of the main electrical cabinet and replace with the loop back plug provided. This will
clear the E-Stop and allow the machine to be started, but will not allow the linercart to operate.

12R4751-MRM384
4.20 Grapple Tool and Liner Pinning Operation
The grapple tool attaches the liners to the machine. This is one of the most important functions of the
machine and the grapple tool enables fast, safe and secure attachment. It also allows liners to be readily
released when required. Only approved liner castings may be picked up by the grapple tool.
All parts of the grapple and grapple tool assembly present a pinch or crush hazard. Do not touch the grapple
or grapple tool assembly while the machine is operating.
For all grapple and grapple tool control functions refer to Operator's Hydraulic Controls (Page 101).
Figure 59: Grapple Tool and Liner Pinning Operation

12R4751-MRM384
Once the liner has entered the mill, it may be lifted and placed on the mill shell using the following procedure.
Refer to Figure: Grapple Tool and Liner Pinning Operation (Page 127):
1. Retract the grapple tool pins and align with the liner using the grapple function levers on the operator’s
console:
a. Remove one (1) of the lynch pins from the liner safety bar and open (retract) the grapple tool pins.
b. Lower the liner lift function until the grapple tool hangs vertically and loose from the grapple.
c. Align the inside of the grapple tool guide lugs with the outside of the liner lugs.
Crush Hazard. Incorrect lug spacing may cause a liner to fall from the grapple
tool.
Only the correctly manufactured and tested grapple tool and liners are to be used.
If any changes are made to the specifications of the mill liners, contact Russell
Mineral Equipment to assess the liner and grapple tool engagement integrity.
2. Align the grapple tool pins with the holes in the liner lugs:
a. Lower the grapple tool over the liner lugs, align the pins and lug holes.
b. An assistant may use the handles provided on the grapple tool to help with alignment.
Crush Hazard. Grapple tool operation exposes crew members to several pinch
and crush hazards, especially when pinning or releasing liners. Exercise extreme
caution at all times when working around the grapple tool.
3. Pin the liner to the grapple tool:
a. Use the controls to close the grapple tool pins and pin the liner to the grapple tool.
b. Replace the lynch pin (removed in step 1a) in the liner safety bar.
4. Raise the grapple tool using the liner lift function:
a. When the correct liner reaction foot is attached and the liner lift function is used the liner should
hang from the grapple tool at the correct angle for liner to fit up to the mill shell.
5. When the liner is fitted to the mill shell, insert the liner bolts and secure the liner to the mill shell.
6. Remove the lynch pin from the liner safety bar and release (unpin) the liner from the grapple tool.
7. Repeat all the above steps for each liner.

12R4751-MRM384
4.20.1 LINER RELEASE INTERLOCK FAULT INDICATOR
The Liner Release Interlock Fault indicator is an important safety feature. When illuminated it alerts the
operator to a fault in the liner release control interlock system which prevents inadvertent liner release. The
indicator is located on the Ancillary Panel (Page 105).
The Liner Release Interlock Fault Indicator provides an alert that the liner release
control has detected a fault. The integrity of the liner release system is essential for
the continuation of safe mill relining operations. Do not conduct mill relining
operations with this indicator illuminated. Death or serious injury to personnel could
result.
If the indicator illuminates during normal mill relining operations, a fault has been detected. The fault has two
possible causes and each requires a different course of action, as follows:
1. The Liner Release Enable solenoid in the hydraulic cabinet has been detected as being “open” when it
should be “closed”. This is a potentially dangerous fault and all mill relining operations should cease.
The liner release control system has a fault. Liner crews should exit the mill and the machine should be
shut down. No further relining can be carried out until the cause has been identified and rectified by a
service technician.
OR
2. When using the radio remote control, the Liner Release Enable has entered a faulty state after the
detection of signal interruption. In this case, the operator could be remote from the ancillary panel, but
will be alerted by a red LED indicator on the Radio Remote Control (Page 111). The radio remote control
should be switched “OFF” and another control mode selected using either PVG controls or joysticks.
Press the “RESET” function of the indicator. If the light in the indicator is extinguished and remains off,
the liner release interlock is functioning correctly and full mill relining operations may continue.
In any case, if the light remains illuminated after pressing the “RESET” button, then the liner release control
system has a fault. No further relining can be carried out until the cause has been identified and rectified by a
service technician.

12R4751-MRM384
4.20.2 LINER INTERFACE ATTACHMENTS
Liner interface attachments help the operator to position the liners precisely at the mill shell. Each liner
interface attachment will match one or more liners in your mill(s). For the actual attachments supplied with
your machine, refer to the List of Assembly Drawings (Page 266).
Figure 60: Typical Liner Interface Attachments
1. Typical short liner reaction foot
2. Typical medium liner reaction foot
3. Typical long liner reaction foot
4. Typical pulp lifter adaptor
5. Bolt, washer and nut.
Crush hazard. Using worn or faulty liner interface attachments could cause a liner to be dropped from the
grapple tool. Inspect liner interface attachments regularly.

12R4751-MRM384
4.20.2.1 CHOOSING THE CORRECT LINER INTERFACE ATTACHMENTS
The following figures show a typical selection of liner interface attachments for some mill liners. The last
figure shows a pulp lifter adaptor bolted to a typical pulp lifter liner. Again, the correct choice of reaction foot
must be made: different pulp lifter liners may require different adaptors.
If a liner shape is changed, contact Russell Mineral Equipment for supply of the correct load-rated
attachments.
Figure 61: Typical Liner Interface Using Short Reaction Foot
Figure 62: Typical Liner Interface Using Medium-Length Reaction Foot

12R4751-MRM384
Figure 63: Typical Liner Interface Using Long Reaction Foot
Figure 64: Typical Liner Interface Using Pulp Lifter Tool

12R4751-MRM384
4.20.3 LINER REACTION FOOT REPLACEMENT
The liner reaction foot contacts the liner during the liner lift procedure and holds the liner in a stable position.
This gives the operator precise control during the liner placement process. The RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining
Machine is supplied with liner feet of different lengths. The correct length liner foot must be used. Refer to
Grapple Tool and Liner Pinning Operation (Page 127).
To replace the grapple tool foot:
1. Unclip the retaining lynch pin (2);
2. Remove the foot (1);
3. Insert the other grapple tool foot; and
4. Secure foot in position with the lynch pin (2).
Figure 65: Grapple Tool Foot Attachment
1. Grapple Tool Liner Reaction Foot.
2. Lynch pin is used to lock the foot in position on the grapple tool.
3. Load Ring is secured by the magnet when not in use.

12R4751-MRM384
4.21 Emergency Hose Changeout
Both the boom and beam assemblies have spare hydraulic hose capacity fitted. In the event of an internal
boom or beam hose failing during a reline, another hose may be used to allow the reline to continue with
minimum delay. As soon as the reline is completed, the damaged hose must be replaced with a new one.
There is easy access to all other hoses which may simply be replaced as required.
The boom has two spare hydraulic hoses installed through its internal cableveyor. There is one spare hose
of each hose size and all boom hoses, including the spares, have the same 9/16 JIC connectors fitted. The
spare hose ends are capped to prevent ingress of contaminants. The rear ends of both spare hoses are
located behind the rear boom cover and the other ends are located behind the grapple attachment flange at
the front of the boom. If a hose fails then disconnect it and use one of the spare hoses to replace it.
The beam has two tank return hoses within the inner beam cableveyor. Tank hoses are not under pressure
and so should not burst. If a pressure hose fails, then disconnect it at the rotary union and at the JIC
connectors underneath the beam. All hoses have the same sized JIC connectors at these two locations.
Then use one of the tank hoses to replace the failed pressure hose. Ensure the tank return fittings at the
rotary union and underneath the beam are capped to prevent further fluid loss or contamination. The
machine will operate and is capable of completing the reline with only one beam tank return hose.
Ensure that the maintenance controller is aware of the need to replace the failed hose after the post-reline
inspection.
4.22 Incremental Rotation of the Mill
The mill may be relined from the first liners that are clear above the mill’s residual ore charge to as high on
the shell as is practical to reach. Once the accessible liners have been replaced and before ‘inching’ the
mill, the Mill Relining Machine must be set up for mill inching.
This is a neutral machine position inside the mill and is aimed at minimising any damage that might occur
due to falling objects. In addition, all local mill safety rules must be followed.
Do not allow the mill charge to be raised above the mill relining machine. If there
is a risk of this occurring then remove the machine from the mill prior to inching.

12R4751-MRM384
Mill Inching:
During this procedure the machine’s centre of gravity is forward of the front jacks. The rear of the machine
must remain tied down to the floor anchor plates at all times.
1. Set up the machine ready for mill inching:
a. Set the grapple roll and slew at midpoint and liner lift at full ‘UP’ positions.
b. Boom retracted, facing forward and horizontal.
c. Inner beam fully retracted.
d. Lower the operator's hydraulic controls and fold the protective cover over them. Refer to Raising
and Lowering the Hydraulic Control Levers (Page 104).
e. The radio remote control unit should be removed from the mill, even if it is not currently in use.
All personnel must evacuate the mill while it is being incrementally rotated. (Inched)
If using the THUNDERBOLT Recoilless Hammer to remove the liner bolts, all personnel must evacuate the
mill; and the machine should be protected from damage.
Risk: High velocity projectile bolts and shrapnel.
2. If using the THUNDERBOLT Recoilless Hammer to remove liner bolts the above precautions must be
followed.
3. The mill can now be incrementally rotated ready to remove the liner bolts and liners for the next relining
procedure.
When all liner bolts and liners have been removed from the mill shell ready for the next stage of
relining, the machine should again be made operational.
4. Return the machine to the Relining Configuration (Page 95).

12R4751-MRM384
4.23 Incremental Rotation - High Residual Charge Level
If the residual ore level in the mill is too high, Remove the machine from the Mill (Page 136) before
incremental rotation is carried out.
When the inching process has been carried out the machine may be inserted back into the mill. Refer to
Initial Machine Entry (Page 91) through Relining Configuration (Page 95).
4.24 Removing the Machine from the Mill
The Mill Relining Machine is only removed from the mill when the mill reline process is complete, or the mill
has a high residual ore charge level and the machine is to be removed prior to incremental rotation.
1. Set the machine up in the Mill Entry Configuration (Page 89). To achieve this from the relining
configuration:
a. Remove the offside view mirror (rotate the turntable if necessary) and transport it out of the mill for
safe storage.
b. Set the grapple roll and slew at midpoint and liner lift at full ‘UP’ positions.
c. Fully retract the boom.
d. Fully retract the Inner beam.
e. Ensure that all operator's hydraulic control levers are in their folded down position with their
protective cover lowered over them.
f. Change control to a radio remote pendant (if it is not currently in use) and restart the machine.
g. Rotate the turntable to position the operator’s seat and platform over the beam. Then remove and
transport the joysticks assembly, seat and platform out of the mill. Store them safely.
h. Position the boom facing forward and horizontal.
i. Remove the radio remote pendant from the mill. It may remain activated for use outside the mill.
j. Position the linercart at the rear of the outer beam.
2. Retract the outer beam:
a. Fully extend the outer beam cylinder – this retracts the outer beam from the mill by one increment.
b. Remove the beam pin from the rear pinning position.
c. Retract the outer beam cylinder and align the cylinder knuckle with the next pinning position and
replace the pin through this pinning position and cylinder knuckle.

12R4751-MRM384
d. Repeat steps “a” through “c” once more. The pin is now in the front beam pinning position.
Rotate the pin to engage the pin handle in the locking bracket on the outer beam, this ensures that
the pin cannot become loose or fall out during manoeuvring the machine.
e. Fully extend the outer beam cylinder – this retracts the outer beam from the mill by the final
increment.
3. Release the machine tiedowns:
a. Extend the front jacks just sufficiently to release the weight from the front tiedown pins. Refer to
Remote Transport Control Pendant (Page 81).
b. Remove both front tiedown pins and store them on the two brackets located on the inside face of
the baseframe front end plate.
c. Fully extend the front jacks.
d. Release the rear tiedown rods and lift them off of the floor mounted plates. Store the tiedown rods
safely.
e. Fully retract the front jacks to lower the machine onto the front wheels.
4. Use the Remote Transport Control Pendant (Page 81) to move the machine straight back until the boom
exits the mill trunnion.
Leave the machine in this position if it has been removed from the mill to allow for an incremental rotation. It
is now ready for reinsertion into the mill after the incremental rotation. Refer to Initial Machine Entry (Page
91).
OR
To continue with the removal from mill procedure:
5. Using the Radio Remote Control (Page 111) set the machine up in the Transport Configuration (Page
77).
The machine is now ready to be manoeuvred and repositioned away from the mill.

12R4751-MRM384
4.25 Manoeuvre the Machine away from the Mill
Follow techniques given in Manoeuvring the Machine (Page 87) to manoeuvre the machine away from the
mill.
4.26 Machine Inspections after Use
A post-use inspection of the RUSSELL 7 should be carried out after the reline is complete and before the
machine is placed in storage.
The purpose of this inspection is to identify any wear or damage that may have occurred during the reline
process. When this inspection is complete the inspection forms will be given to the technician or
maintenance controller to check and rectify any faults or problems.
This will allow ample time for any repairs or spare parts to be ordered, received and rectification work to be
carried out before the next scheduled reline.
These inspection forms should be kept as a record of the machine's maintenance history.
Refer to Lubrication, Inspection and Servicing (Page 141) for post-use check and lubrication forms.
4.27 Access Restrictions
Crush Hazard. The machine may move unexpectedly while it is being operated. At all times, access to
and operation of the RUSSELL 7 is restricted to personnel authorised by the owner.

12R4751-MRM384
4.28 Machine Storage
Manoeuvre the machine back to its storage location.
When the machine is stopped, connect the separate motor heater supply cable to a suitable supply and
switch the motor heaters ‘ON’.
The machine should be stored in a manner in which it is protected from extreme environmental conditions
and/or vermin and insect attack.
If the machine is to be in storage for periods greater than 6 months, RME can provide a procedure for long
term storage of the machine.
Site personnel should assess site storage conditions with respect to:
 period of storage;
 severity of environmental conditions; and
 service and inspection requirements.
If the machine has a cover, then fit the cover as follows:
1. Get the baseframe side cover and put each flat-hook fastener onto the platform rail, as the cover is
wrapped around the baseframe.
2. Get the baseframe top cover and put it on the top of the machine. Clip the baseframe top cover and the
baseframe side cover together with the fasteners.
3. Get the boom and grapple cover and put it over these parts. Clip the boom and grapple cover and the
baseframe cover together with the fasteners.
4. Get the outer beam rear cover and put it over this part of the machine. Clip the outer beam rear cover
and the baseframe cover together with the fastener.
5. To remove the covers then reverse the above steps.

12R4751-MRM384
4.29 Machine Isolation
This RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine has two separate sources of supply, and during normal operation or
storage only one supply will be connected and switched ‘ON’. Both supplies must be disconnected to fully
isolate the machine.
The Mill Relining Machine is isolated by:
1. Main Power supply cable:
a. Opening the main isolation switch (rotate to ‘O’ position) on the door of the main electrical cabinet.
b. Switching off the site supply and disconnecting the site power supply cable plug from its supply
socket.
2. Motor heaters supply cable.
a. Opening the heater isolation switch located on the power pack.
b. Switching off the site supply and disconnecting the heater power supply cable plug from its supply
socket.
3. Following site isolation and tagging procedures.
Both supplies must be disconnected to fully isolate the machine.

12R4751-MRM384
5. Lubrication, Inspection and Servicing

This section details the machine’s lubrication, scheduled inspection and servicing requirements to maximise
the service life of the RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine and its components.
5.1 Standard Maintenance Practices
The following information is provided to assist in the service and maintenance of the Mill Relining Machine
and details general practices and requirements of servicing:
 Safety During Inspection and Servicing (Page 142)
 Torque Specifications (Page 143)
 Wire Rope Care and Service (Page 146)
 General Reassembly Practices (Page 145)

12R4751-MRM384
5.1.1 SAFETY DURING INSPECTION, REPAIR AND SERVICING
All local site safety procedures are to be followed.
A site, safety and risk assessment should be made of all steps in each inspection/repair procedure.
The machine should be in the Transport Configuration and appropriately secured, e.g. Tied down, before
commencing any maintenance or repair procedures.
Removal of any component or assembly of the machine may make the Mill Relining Machine less stable.
Where components have been removed ensure they are positioned in a stable position.
During all maintenance procedures the machine will be taken out of service and electrically isolated, except
where function tests are required within the procedures.
The machine must be tagged “OUT OF SERVICE” in accordance with site safety procedures.
All lifting equipment used during servicing must have adequate Working Load Limits.
All Mill Relining Machine guards and covers removed for servicing must be replaced before power is
reconnected to the machine.

12R4751-MRM384
5.1.2 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The torque values for critical fasteners are noted on the assembly drawings. These values are supplied to
assist when conducting maintenance on the machine. If the torque value is not on the drawings, then tighten
the fastener until it is snug-tight. (Snug-tight means the tightness of a bolt achieved by a few impacts of an
impact wrench or by the full effort of a person using a standard podgier spanner.)
There may be different specifications for different size bolts, bolts in different positions or tightening bolts in
several stages. Use a good torque wrench, properly calibrated, and follow exact specifications for the proper
torque. The basic tightening procedure is to first snug up bolts, then tighten in stages, and then complete
with the final torque specified. If the hardware threads are lubricated, use only 70% of the torque values.
(e.g. for M12 – Grade 8.8 when lubricated: use 77 Nm x 0.7 = 54 Nm).
Torque values for critical fasteners are noted on assembly drawings. Refer to Assembly Drawings (Page 265).
Do not exceed the given value.
Always use good quality tools to avoid personal injuries.
If torque values are not specified on the drawings then tighten the fastener until it is snug-tight.

12R4751-MRM384
5.1.2.1 METRIC STEEL HYDRAULIC FITTINGS
The following torque charts and specifications are default values to be used when the particular fitting does
not have a torque value specified on the assembly or hydraulic drawing. These values are supplied to
assist when conducting maintenance on the machine.
Steel Hydraulic 37º Flare Fittings
Size Thread Pitch FFWR* Nominal Nm
¼" 6.4mm 7/16 20 2 18
5/16" 7.9mm ½ 20 2 23
3/8" 9.5mm 9/16 18 1½ 30
½" 12.7mm ¾ 16 1½ 57
5/8" 15.9mm 7/8 14 1½ 81
¾" 19.0mm 1 1/16 12 1¼ 114
7/8" 22.2mm 1 3/16 12 1 160
1" 25.4mm 1 5/16 12 1 228
1 ¼" 31.8mm 1 5/8 12 1 265
1 ½" 38.1mm 1 7/8 12 1 360
* - flats from wrench resistance
5.1.2.2 SPLIT FLANGE MOUNTING BOLTS
Split Flange Mounting Bolts
Thread Pitch Ft/lb Nm
5/16" 18tpi 15 20
3/8" 16tpi 18 25
7/16" 14tpi 35 50
1/2" 13tpi 60 80
5/8" 11tpi 110 150

12R4751-MRM384
5.1.3 GENERAL REASSEMBLY PRACTICES
Before reassembly of any components occurs, the following will have been carried out:
1. Any bolts, hardware or seals replaced must be of the same grade and specification as originally
installed.
2. All required spare parts, bearings and seals have been obtained.
3. All components will have been cleaned and inspected for damage, distortion and wear and replaced as
required. All threads in components will be cleaned, inspected and in good condition.
4. Tolerances of bushes, bores and pins in components and assemblies have been checked and bushes
or pins replaced as required.
5. All hydraulic components (cylinders, hoses, actuators, gearboxes and motors etc.) have been checked
for leakage and serviced or replaced as required.
6. Non-destructive testing will have been carried out on all reusable pins and fabricated components in
accordance with Non Destructive Examination (Page 231)
7. Condition of any associated electrical cables should have been checked and replaced as required.
8. Any required corrosion protection requirements of the components will have been carried out.
9. All hardware torques will be in accordance with the Assembly Drawings (Page 265) and Torque
Specifications (Page 143).
Prior to disconnecting any hydraulic hoses or equipment, have matching marked

blanking caps and plugs available. This prevents contamination of the hydraulic
system and helps to reconnect hoses and equipment in the correct orientation.

12R4751-MRM384
5.1.4 WIRE ROPE CARE AND SERVICE
5.1.4.1 INSPECTION
Wire rope is tough and durable, but nonetheless expendable and eventually reaches the end of its safe
service life. Wire ropes should periodically be inspected for signs of deterioration.
The inner boom section is controlled solely by the boom wire rope.
Rope deterioration becomes noticeable through the presence of broken wires, surface wear, corrosion, wire
or strand distortion due to mechanical abuse, or drastic reduction in diameter and lengthening of the lay.
Also deterioration can be detected by the use of modern non-destructive testing techniques.
While Statutory Regulations govern the inspection and discarding of certain ropes, the same rules cannot be
applied to all ropes. The proper frequency and degree of inspection depends largely on the possible risk to
personnel and machinery in the event of rope failure. The determination of the point at which a rope should
be discarded for reasons of safety requires judgment and experience in rope inspection, in addition to
knowledge of the performance of previous ropes used in the same application.
Where Statutory Regulations are laid down for the inspection and discarding of wire ropes and their
attachments, wire rope users should become fully acquainted with the regulations and see that they are
carried out.
Inspection of both operated and discarded ropes frequently indicates other equipment faults. It is therefore
essential to inspect the equipment on which the rope is installed as well as the rope itself.

12R4751-MRM384
5.1.4.2 DISCARD FACTORS FOR WIRE ROPE
Maximum allowable number of broken strands
Broken Wires ONLY Number in or Number of adjacent

one rope lay breaks in one strand
6 x 19S (9/9/1) 10 3
6 x 25FW (12/6 + 6F/1) 16 4
6 x 29FW (14/7 + 7F/1) 22 5
6 x 36SW (14/7 and 7/7/1) 22 5
6 x 41SW (16/8 and 8/8/1) 24 6
Maximum allowable Outer wires should not be worn down more than one-third
wear ONLY: (33per cent) of their diameter.
Total loss of area: The maximum allowable loss of metallic area due to visible
combined wire wear and broken or cracked wires = 15 per
cent.
Corrosion: Ropes should be discarded if corrosion is marked by

noticeable pitting or loosening of outer wires.
5.1.4.3 WIRE ROPE LUBRICATION
The frequency of lubrication in the field is determined by the operating conditions of the rope e.g.: high-speed
heavy duty operation calls for more frequent lubrication, as do wet and/or corrosive conditions.
For all conditions a high penetrating, water-repellent rust-inhibiting oil should be used.

12R4751-MRM384
5.2 Lubrication
5.2.1 LUBRICATION REQUIREMENTS
For all lubrication requirements on the Mill Relining Machine refer to Lubrication Summary (Page 150) and
Detailed Lubrication Schedule. (Page 154)
The lubrication schedule following should be regarded as a guide for lubrication requirements for the Mill
Relining Machine.
Site specific conditions may require more frequent lubrication of the machine.
5.2.2 LUBRICATION AND INSPECTION SYMBOLS
The following table provides definitions for the symbols used in this Manual.
Symbol Meaning
Make a thorough visual inspection of the component(s) for damage, excess wear
and security of fitting.
Carry out the task in accordance with the scheduled service.
Make a thorough visual inspection of the component(s) for damage, excess wear
and security of fitting.
Test the component(s) for proper function; replace if necessary.
Carry out Non-Destructive Examination (NDE) in accordance with the scheduled

service.
Overhaul the component(s) in accordance with the scheduled service.
Replace the component(s) in accordance with the scheduled service.
Check oil level for sufficient quantity. Fill as required.
Using a grease gun, grease at each nipple, purge old grease and clean excess
away.
Using a spatula or brush, and wearing appropriate protective equipment, grease by

hand.
Penetrating oil – spray wire ropes. Wipe excess from the rope.

12R4751-MRM384
5.2.3 LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Lubricant Specifications
Lubricant Specification
Hydraulic Oil ISO 32
Gearbox and Brake Oil EP 220
Moly Grease EP NLGI 2

(with Molybdenum Disulfide 3%)
Grease GP NLGI 2
(grease nipples or by hand)
Ring gear and Pinion Grease OGL 2

(open gear lubrication)
Electric Motor Refer to motor nameplate
5.2.4 OIL SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS
Hydraulic oil should be tested to the provisions of ISO standard 4407.
The target cleanliness level of particulate contamination per millilitre of hydraulic fluid for 2μm, 5μm and
15μm sizes is 17/15/13 respectively.

12R4751-MRM384
5.2.5 LUBRICATION SUMMARY
Summary of Lubrication Requirements
Application Lubricant and Quantity Frequency
Hydraulic Oil Before and After Use:

1. Visually inspect hydraulic tank site glass for oil
contamination.
ISO 32 2. Check level and top up the Hydraulic Tank (Page 156).
Hydraulic tank:
167 l. Annual/250 Hourly Inspection:
1. Carry out Oil Sampling and Analysis (Page 149).
2. Check level and top up the hydraulic tank.
5 and 10 yearly Inspections:

1. Empty tank and clean.
2. Totally flush hydraulic system with fresh oil.
3. Fill system with fresh oil.
Grease (GP) All Inspections and Before and After Use:

1. Grease all nipples until fresh grease purges from seals, bushes
or bearings. Clean waste grease away. Refer to Turntable
use NLGI 2 Lubrication through Boom Lubrication (Page 168).
All grease nipples – purge
old grease and clean
excess away.
2. Grease all slide pads in the boom and grapple where

applicable. Refer to Boom Lubrication (Page 168).
use NLGI 2
Use in grease by hand
applications – use a
spatula and PPE.
Moly Grease EP Inspections Before Use:

1. Grease all slide pads and sliding surfaces on the beam where
(with Molybdenum
applicable. Refer to Beam Lubrication (Page 166).
Disulfide 3%) use NLGI 2
Use in grease by hand
applications – use a
spatula and PPE.

12R4751-MRM384
Summary of Lubrication Requirements
Application Lubricant and Quantity Frequency
Gearbox Oil Before and After Use:

1. Check level and fill.
Drive gearboxes X 2. Refer to Front Basedrive Lubrication (Page
use EP 220 162).
Travel Drive Gearbox Slew gearbox. Refer to Slew Motor and Gearbox Lubrication
- 1.8 litres (0.5 US gal) (Page 158).
Slew Gearbox Annual and 5 yearly Inspections:
- 2.4 litres (0.65 US gal) 1. Drain gearboxes and flush with fresh oil.
2. Check level and fill. Refer to Slew Motor and Gearbox
Lubrication (Page 158) and Front Basedrive Lubrication (Page
162).
10 year Inspection:
1. Remove all old gearboxes and replace.
2. Check level and fill new gearbox (Refer to Slew Motor and
Gearbox Lubrication (Page 158) and Front Basedrive Lubrication
(Page 162)).
Open Gear All Inspections:

Lubricant Grease the Turntable (Page 160) slew ring and pinion gear.
use OGL 2
Slew ring and pinion
gear.
High Penetrating All Inspections:

Oil (spray on) Wire ropes used on the Mill Relining Machine are lubricated for
their service life. If necessary, a light coating of penetrating oil
Use spray on penetrant may be used and the excess wiped away.
Linercart and Boom
wire ropes.
Electric Motor 20,000 Hourly:

Lubrication (Page Use a non-powered grease gun to grease motor bearings in
170) accordance with the Electric Motor Data Sheet (Page 269). Do
Use recommendations of not overgrease.
manufacturer found on
Motor Data plate.

12R4751-MRM384
5.2.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
In the event of mechanical damage to hydraulic hoses or bursting of hydraulic hoses, or during gearbox oil or
filter element changing procedures, spillage of hydraulic oil could occur. It is recommended that a supply of
diatomaceous earth absorbent pellets should be kept on hand. These can be poured onto an oil spill, and
will absorb most of it. Final clean up should be with waste cloth.
Any oil-soaked diatomaceous earth and waste clothes should be disposed of at the mine site’s disposal area
for contaminated products, following site procedures for such disposal.
5.3 Lubrication and Inspection Forms
For those who are initially unfamiliar with the machine, the following sections detail where on the machine all
the grease nipples are located, areas to apply grease by hand (or brush) and when to apply lubricants. All
other inspections and servicing requirements are also included here.
Each section (for a machine assembly) has a Figure and a table. The table may be copied and used as a
check sheet to be filled in as the lubrication or inspection work is carried out.
Figure Sample Hydraulic Reservoir Lubrication Table (Page 153) shows a lubrication check sheet for the
hydraulic reservoir filled in for a Post-use lubrication. This Figure shows that:
1. Each task is initialled or ticked when completed (empty boxes filled-in for Post-use column).
2. Greyed-out boxes in this column are not required, i.e. not done, and not initialled or ticked.
3. Columns not required are not used, e.g. the "250 Hours or Annual" column in this example is not used.
4. As the final step, the completed sheet is signed off on the bottom row. This would not be done (as in
this example) if there were any outstanding (incomplete) tasks and so allows for a quick check for the
completeness of all the tasks.
5. Notes may be recorded in the space below the table and the completed check sheet given to the
maintenance controller for record keeping.

12R4751-MRM384
Figure 66: Sample Hydraulic Reservoir Lubrication Table

12R4751-MRM384
5.4 Detailed Lubrication Schedule
5.4.1 PRESSURE FILTER LUBRICATION
Figure 67: Pressure Filter Lubrication

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Pressure Filter Lubrication (Page 154).
250
Pre- Post-
No. Symbol Lubrication Task Hours
use use
Annual
1. Examine the manifold and filter fittings for hydraulic oil leaks.
2. Replace the hydraulic system pressure filter element. Inspect

old filter for contamination.
If contamination is found in the pressure filter, inform the

maintenance controller as further investigation may be required
to find the cause.
Inspection / Lubrication Complete Date:
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.4.2 HYDRAULIC TANK LUBRICATION
Figure 68: Hydraulic Tank Lubrication

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Hydraulic Tank Lubrication (Page 156).
250
Pre- Post- 5
use use Years
Annual
1. Examine hydraulic-fluid-level in sight-glass. If low, fill

to the full point as labelled (with all hydraulic cylinders
retracted).
Examine hydraulic-fluid colour in sight-glass. The

liquid colour will be a clear to amber. If the liquid
colour is a milkiness, then drain, flush and clean the
full hydraulic system.
2. If necessary to fill the oil in the tank, then only use this
filling-point (fitting attached to filter input, on front
side).
3. Examine the breather for damage and free-air flow.

Replace and/or clean area around the breather as
necessary.
4. Get a hydraulic oil sample at the sampling-point on the

reservoir and have it analysed. Contamination levels
must be less than recorded in Oil Sampling and
Analysis (Page 149).
5. Replace the hydraulic return filter element. Examine

the old filter for contamination.
6. Replace the hydraulic tank breather filter.
7. The tank must be drained, flushed, cleaned and filled

with new oil.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.4.3 SLEW MOTOR AND GEARBOX LUBRICATION
Figure 69: Slew Motor and Gearbox Lubrication

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Slew Motor and Gearbox Lubrication (Page 158).
250
Post-
use
Annual
1. Check motor and brake hydraulic fittings for any sign of hydraulic oil leaks.
2. Inspect gearbox breather for free air flow. Clean surrounding area as
required.
3. Check oil level for sufficient quantity. Fill as required.
To check, remove the sight glass (side of gearbox) and the filling plug (top
of gearbox). Slowly put oil in the filling plug hole until oil is seen to come
out of the sight glass hole, then replace the sight glass and filling plug.
Oil can become trapped in the sight glass and give a false reading. Do not
rely on sight glass, without removal, for oil level.
4. Drain the slew gearbox. Flush with fresh oil and refill.
5. Perform an internal inspection of the gearbox to ensure no corrosion is

present.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.4.4 TURNTABLE LUBRICATION
Figure 70: Turntable and Slew Ring Lubrication

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Turntable Lubrication (Page 160).
250
Pre-
use
Annual
1. Using a grease gun, grease the boom cylinder pivot bearings at each
nipple, purge old grease and clean away excess.
(The boom pivot bearings are greased in the boom section.)
2. Remove the pinion gear cover under the turntable. Grease the slew ring
and pinion gear by hand using a spatula or brush while the operator
incrementally turns the turntable between applications. Use personal
protective equipment.
Lubrication of the slew ring and pinion gear is more easily carried out if an
operator moves the turntable between applications of grease.
Do not move the turntable while grease is being applied.
The boom must be retracted at all times.

OR
The machine must be tied down before slewing the boom.
Otherwise the machine will overbalance.
3. Using a grease gun, grease the slew ring bearing at each of the four nipples
fitted to the mounting block fixed on the inside rear corner of the hydraulic
mount cabinet.
4. Inspect the slew and pinion gears for any signs of damage.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.4.5 FRONT BASEDRIVE LUBRICATION
Figure 71: Front Basedrive Lubrication

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Front Basedrive Lubrication (Page 162).
250
Pre- 5
use Years
Annual
1. Check gearbox oil levels for sufficient quantity. Fill as required.
2. Using a grease gun, grease at each nipple, purge old grease and
clean excess away.
3. Remove the pivot pins, clean and inspect for damage. Grease
by hand and reassemble.
4. Inspect the drive gearboxes internally for any corrosion or

damage.
5. The gearboxes must be drained, flushed, and filled with new oil. Refer
Note
The gearbox must be drained, flushed, cleaned and filled with

new oil after the first year of service only. Thereafter every five
years.
Drive gearbox full oil level is approximately 3/4 full. Lift and
support front of machine so that drive wheels just clear floor and
use hydraulic motor to rotate gearbox to obtain inspection holes
in drain and filling positions.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.4.6 REAR BASEDRIVE LUBRICATION
Figure 72: Rear Basedrive Lubrication

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Rear Basedrive Lubrication (Page 217).
250
Pre- 5
use Years
Annual
1. Check gearbox oil levels for sufficient quantity. Fill as required.
2. Using a grease gun, grease at each nipple, purge old grease and
clean excess away.
3. Remove the pivot pins, clean and inspect for damage. Grease
by hand and reassemble.
4. Using a grease gun, grease the rear axle pivot pin at the grease
nipple, purge old grease and clean excess away.
5. Inspect the drive gearboxes internally for any corrosion or

damage.
6. The gearboxes must be drained, flushed, and filled with new oil. Refer
Note
The gearbox must be drained, flushed, cleaned and filled with

new oil after the first year of service only. Thereafter every five
years.
Drive gearbox full oil level is approximately 3/4 full. Lift and
support front of machine so that drive wheels just clear floor and
use hydraulic motor to rotate gearbox to obtain inspection holes
in drain and filling positions.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.4.7 BEAM LUBRICATION
Figure 73: Beam Slides Lubrication

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Beam Slides Lubrication (Page 166).
Lubrication of the inner and outer beams is more easily carried out if an operator moves the beams between
and during applications of grease.
The machine must be tied down before extending beams. Otherwise it will overbalance.
250
Pre-
use
Annual
1. Using a spatula or brush and wearing appropriate protective equipment,

grease areas of the inner beam where the slide pads (mounted on the
cradle support and on the inside of the front outer beam, both sides) make
contact with the inner beam over its full travel, as well as the outer beam
slide pads as indicated.
2. On each side of the outer beam, remove the two cap screw covers and
apply grease through the two grease nipples. Replace all cap screw
covers. This lubricates the rocker slide pads that support the rear of the
inner beam.
3. Using a spatula or brush and wearing appropriate protective equipment, use

Moly Grease EP (with Molybdenum Disulfide 3%) to grease areas of the
outer beam where the front low-friction slide pads make contact with the
beam, over the full beam travel.
4. Inspect all slide pads for excess wear.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.4.8 BOOM LUBRICATION
Lubrication of the inner and intermediate boom sections is more easily carried out if an operator moves the
boom between and during applications of grease.
The boom must be slewed over the beam, facing the rear of the machine, before being extended
OR
the machine must be tied down before extending the boom.
Otherwise the machine will overbalance.
Figure 74: Boom Lubrication

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Boom Lubrication (Page 168).
250
Pre-
use
Annual
1. Grease nipple points on both sides of the boom, clean away excess grease.
Include the two front sheave bearings.
2. Grease both boom pivot points, purge old grease and clean away excess
grease.
3. Grease nipple points on the underside of the boom, clean away excess
grease.
4. Remove the plugs on both sides at the rear of the outer boom. Position the
boom (almost fully retracted) so that the rear sheave bearing is revealed
through the opening. Grease nipple on sheave bearing, clean away
excess grease. Replace both plugs.
5. Grease by hand using a spatula or brush (use personal protective

equipment), all faces on the boom where the low friction pads slide. This
can be done while an operator extends and retracts the boom.
Pay careful attention to the lower outside surfaces of the inner and
intermediate boom sections. Also remove the rear boom cover and grease
the inner upper surfaces of the outer and intermediate boom sections.
Replace the cover.
6. Grease nipple points in the centre of the teardrop flange pins attaching both
boom raise-lower cylinders to the outer boom. The other end of these
cylinders are lubricated in the turntable section.
7. Inspect low friction slide pads for excess wear.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.4.9 ELECTRIC MOTOR LUBRICATION
Figure 75: Electric Motor Lubrication
250
5 10
Years Years
Annual
1. Open drain valve to check for any condensation. The valve is

located underneath the front of the motor, just behind the bell
housing. It is a non-metallic plug which is pulled down a short
distance (not removed). Replace plug when finished.
Condensation in the motor is an indication of potential damage and

must be investigated by qualified personnel. Please contact RME
immediately for further instructions.
2. Use a grease gun to grease motor bearings in accordance with the

Electrical Motor Data Sheet (Page 269). Do not overgrease.
It is strongly recommended to grease the machine while running.
This allows the grease renewal in the bearing housing.
The injection of all the grease with the motor in standstill can make
the grease penetrate into the motor, through the inner seal of the
bearing housing. Only use a manual grease gun. Do not use a
powered grease gun.
Excess grease can cause bearing overheating, resulting in complete

failure of the motor and potential fire.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.4.10 GRAPPLE LUBRICATION
Figure 76: Grapple Lubrication
All grapple rotary actuators are sealed and lubricated by hydraulic oil flow only. There are no grease nipples
or oil levels to check. Also, the grapple tool itself does not require lubrication in addition to maintenance
overhaul servicing.

12R4751-MRM384
5.5 Inspection and Service
The information in this section details the Scheduled Servicing Program. It is a preventative maintenance
program recommended by RME for its Mill Relining Machine. It describes the various major components
and the normal life expectancy but there are many variables that affect their life span, such as environmental
factors, usage rate and adherence to the service program.
An essential part of the regular servicing program must include Non-Destructive Examination (NDE) for the
safe and effective operation of the RUSSELL 7. Testing of equipment is conducted at various intervals. If
NDE tasks are ignored, then it could lead to serious injury or death of personnel, or premature failure of the
equipment.
The NDE requirements within the scheduled service program are in NDE Inspections (Page 233).
5.5.1 STORAGE
To ensure that the equipment is given the best opportunity to perform its required operations it is
recommended that between relines it is stored correctly.
The equipment should be cleaned, given a Post-use service (refer to Detailed Inspection Requirements
(Page 175)), then stored either undercover or covered by a tarpaulin or similar type of cover if possible.
5.5.2 CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT MAINTENANCE
The environment the equipment operates in determines the level of corrosion protection required. The
following definitions are provided as a guideline:
 Severe – high quantities of powder-fine dust; cloudy high salt content process water; high humidity or
wet environment; cold (below 0º C) or hot (between 30ºC and 40º C) environment.
 Extreme – poor visibility due to high dust content in the surrounding air; dirty, high salinity or extremely
low quality bore process water; high humidity or wet environment; other corrosive materials falling on
machine; cold (below –10ºC) or hot (above 40ºC) environment.
The Corrosive Environment Maintenance program is detailed as part of the scheduled service requirements.

12R4751-MRM384
5.5.3 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
To reduce the likelihood of failure, components on the Mill Relining Machine are replaced or overhauled at
the intervals recommended by the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) or by RME, based on experience
of operators of the equipment from around the world.
The accurate recording of operations and maintenance data will ensure the Mill Relining Machine is
maintained to requirements and should assist in reliability of the equipment.
5.5.4 UPGRADES OR MODIFICATIONS TO EQUIPMENT
To assist in improving the capability and reliability of the Mill Relining Machine, RME continuously monitors
feedback from operators and technicians. It is recommended that at overhaul or major repair, any upgrades
or modifications that have been developed should be applied to the equipment.
Owners of equipment will be notified of any upgrades or modifications required prior to their machine being
refurbished. Whilst these changes are not mandatory unless they are safety related, they are
recommended, as they will keep future costs down due to obsolescence of components.
5.5.5 OBSOLESCENCE OF SPARES - OVERHAUL PERIODS
During construction RME makes every effort to install components that are reliable and supportable.
Unfortunately with the advance of technology some components, particularly electrical equipment, become
obsolete in a short time (3-5 years) and replacement parts may not be available.
It is recommended that customers undertake the 10 year overhaul to reduce the problems associated with
obsolete parts and ensure the asset meets its intended service life.

12R4751-MRM384
5.5.6 SERVICE LIMITS
If any defects are revealed by the inspections nominated in the Detailed Inspection Requirements (Page
175), then faulty components should be either repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
Refer to the Non-Destructive Examination (Page 231) requirements to identify possible faults.
5.5.7 SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
This Routine Servicing Program has been developed by RME to ensure the Mill Relining Machine has had
basic servicing requirements at the specified intervals. Failure to carry out this servicing could lead to
premature failure of the equipment and injury to personnel.
Intervals for each servicing are based on either (whichever comes first):
 Elapsed time - which is applied to account for periods of equipment inactivity and commences from
time of machine commissioning; or
 Hours of operation - as recorded by the hour-run meter on the door of the main electrical cabinet.
The following routine servicing intervals are applied:
 Pre-use checks may be carried out by a site trained operator.
 Post-use checks may be carried out by a site trained operator.
 Annual or 250 hour inspections must be carried out by a qualified technician;
 5 Year or 1000 hour service must be carried out by a qualified technician;
 10 Year or 2000 hours service must be carried out by a qualified technician;
The detailed requirements for checks, inspections and services are in Detailed Inspection Requirements
(Page 175). Service summary sheets are also found in this section.

12R4751-MRM384
5.5.8 MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL
Site trained operators may perform pre- and post-use checks. Any maintenance or repairs required after
these checks should be carried out by a site technician or Russell Mineral Equipment technician.
All other checks, inspections or repair and maintenance requirements should be carried out by RME or site
technicians.
5.6 Detailed Inspection Requirements
5.6.1 GRAPPLE TOOL INSPECTION
Figure 77: Grapple Tool Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Grapple Tool Inspection (Page 175).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
No. Symbol Inspection Hours
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check the grapple tool pins are not

damaged, bent or cracked. Replace as
required.
2. Visually check the grapple tool guide

extensions are not damaged, bent or
cracked. Contact RME for approved repair
instructions.
3. Check both safety lynch pins are not

damaged, bent or cracked, check for
security of their lanyards. Replace the
lynch pins and lanyards as required.
Check operation of lynch pins in the safety
bar and that the safety bar is free to move
(when a lunch pin is removed).
4. Visually check the hook and hook latch are

not damaged, bent or cracked. Function
test the hook latch. Replace the hook
assembly as required.
5. Visually check the load ring is not

damaged, bent or cracked. Replace the
Load Ring assembly as required.
6. Visually inspect all hydraulic hoses and

fittings for damage and leaks.
7. Visually check the slide/pinning arms for

damage or distortion.
8. Visually check there are no hydraulic oil

leaks from within the grapple tool.
9. Visually check the grapple tool liner

reaction feet and attachment hardware for
damage and security.
10. Replace the grapple tool liner reaction feet

and attachment hardware.

12R4751-MRM384
Figure 78: Grapple Tool Inspection - continued

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Grapple Tool Inspection - continued (Page 177).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
11. Visually check the grapple tool to grapple

attachment pin and end caps for security.
12 Visually check all bolted components for

damaged, missing or broken bolts.
13. Check the load ring retaining magnet is not

damaged and retains the load ring with
sufficient force. Replace the Load Ring
assembly as required.
14. Install the annual grapple tool service kit.

(grapple tool pins and cylinder pins)
15. NDE grapple tool components in

accordance with Grapple Tool NDE (Page
236).
16. Overhaul the grapple tool.
17. Replace the grapple tool
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.2 GRAPPLE INSPECTION
Hydraulic fittings – for connection of the grapple tool to the grapple. These two hydraulic ports are marked
‘A’ and ‘B’ on both the grapple and grapple tool. If they ever become disconnected then they must be
reconnected to the correct ports on the grapple tool and a function check carried out to ensure the movement
directions of the operator’s control lever and the grapple tool pins agree.
Ensure correct hose connections.
Grapple Grapple Tool
Port A Port A
Port B Port B
Test functions to ensure direction of grapple tool motion agrees with control lever.
Figure 79: Grapple Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Grapple Inspection (Page 179).
No. Symbol Inspection Pre- Post- 250 Hr 5 10

use use Annual Years Years
1. Visually check the rotary actuators and

covers for signs of damage or hydraulic
leaks.
2. Visually check both E-Stops for damage,

replace as required.
3. Visually check both imminent motion

warning lights for damage, replace as
required.
4. Visually check the grapple for security of

mounting to the boom.
5. Visually check the grapple head for cracks

or damage, particularly in the welded post
attachment area.
6. Visually check all bolted components for

damaged, missing, loose or broken bolts.
7. Visually check all hydraulic hoses and

fittings for damage and leaks.
8. NDE grapple components in accordance

with Grapple NDE. (Page 234)
9. Check torque all bolts attaching rotary

actuators to mounting plates. If any bolts
are found loose, remove and replace all
bolts in the same plate. Torque values in
accordance with the assembly drawing and
Torque Specifications. (Page 143)
10. Overhaul the grapple.
11. Replace the Grapple.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.3 TIEDOWN EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
Figure 80: Tiedown Equipment Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Tiedown Equipment Inspection (Page 182).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check the tiedown rods for any

damage or distortion. Check the
threaded section of the tiedown rods.
Ensure all components, including nuts and
washers, can be located and used.
2. Visually check the rear floor mounted

tiedown plates for any cracks, distortion or
damage.
3. Visually check the front jacks, including

extension arms and protective covers, for
security, distortion or damage.
4. Visually check the front jacks for any

hydraulic leaks.
5. Visually check the tiedown pins, lynch pins

and retaining latches for any damage or
distortion.

12R4751-MRM384
Figure 81: Tiedown Equipment Inspection - continued

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Tiedown Equipment Inspection - continued (Page 184).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
6. Examine the front floor-mounted tiedown

equipment for damage or distortion.
7. Examine the concrete adjacent to all floor

mounted tiedown equipment. If there are
cracks in the concrete, report this
immediately to the maintenance controller.
If there is tiedown damage or distortion, it is

reason to immediately replace the tiedowns
as there is high dynamic loads put on this
equipment.
Cement-floor-cracks adjacent to the floor

mounted tiedown equipment must be
reported to the maintenance controller to
examine.
8. The tiedown component NDE schedule is

recorded in Tiedown Equipment NDE (Page
238).
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.4 BOOM INSPECTION
Figure 82: Boom Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Boom Inspection (Page 186).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check the boom structure for any

signs of damage, distortion and corrosion.
2. Check for any signs of hydraulic leaks from

the boom. If any leaks are evident further
investigation is warranted.
3. Lubricate in accordance with Boom

Lubrication (Page 168).
4. Check wipers and seals for operation and

damage.
5. Inspect boom/turntable pivot pins and

bushes for excess wear and security to the
turntable.
6. Inspect the internal cableveyor for any

damage or broken links.
7. Inspect the boom wire rope for damage;

replace in accordance with Wire rope care
and service (Page 146).
8. Inspect the boom cable for adjustment;

adjust in accordance with Boom Wire Rope
Tension and Adjustment (Page 226).
9. Inspect all boom slide pads for excess

wear; replace as required.
10. NDE boom components in accordance with

Boom NDE. (Page 246)
11. Overhaul the boom.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.5 BOOM CYLINDER INSPECTION
Figure 83: Boom Raise-Lower Cylinders Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Boom Raise Lower Cylinder Inspection (Page 188)
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check both boom raise lower

cylinders for damage.
2. Visually check for any signs of hydraulic

leaks.
3. Check the cylinder rod protective sheath for

damage and sealing function.
If damaged, check the cylinder rod, wiper

and seals for damage and replace the
sheath. If damage to rod or seals is
causing leaks, overhaul or replace the
cylinder.
4. Visually check the cylinder attachment pins

(teardrop flange type) to the boom and
turntable for security of mounting.
5. Inspect boom cylinder attachment pins and

bushes for excess wear.
6. Lubricate the boom raise lower cylinders in

accordance with Boom Lubrication (Page
168) and Turntable Lubrication (Page 160).
7. Inspect boom cylinder attachment pins and

bushes for excess wear and security of
mounting.
8. NDE boom raise lower cylinder components

in accordance with Boom Cylinder NDE
(Page 240).
9. Overhaul the boom raise lower cylinders.
10. Replace the boom raise lower cylinders.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.6 TURNTABLE INSPECTION
Figure 84: Turntable Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Turntable Inspection. (Page 190)
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check the turntable structure for

signs of damage, cracks, distortion and
corrosion.
2. Visually check the motor and fittings for any

sign of hydraulic leaks.
3. Visually check all bolted components for

damaged, missing, loose or broken bolts.
4. Visually check the rotary union for security

and any hydraulic fluid leaks.
5. Lubricate the slew gearbox in accordance

with Slew Motor and Gearbox Lubrication
(Page 158).
6. Lubricate the slew ring and pinion gear in

accordance with Turntable Lubrication.
(Page 160)
7. Inspect boom pivot pins and bushes for

excess wear and security of mounting.
8. Inspect bushes and V-ring seals in the

boom cylinder pivot points for damage.
9. Check the torque of the slew gearbox

mounting bolts in accordance with Torque
10. Check the torque of the turntable leg

mounting bolts in accordance with Torque
If any bolts are loose, remove and replace

all bolts in the set.

12R4751-MRM384
Figure 85: Turntable Inspection - continued

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Turntable Inspection - continued (Page 192).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
11. Inspect all hydraulic hoses for excess

chafing and leaks
12. Inspect electrical cables for chafing and

electrical fittings for damage
13. Check the torque of the slew ring mounting

bolts (to the turntable and beam) in
accordance with Slew Ring Bearing Bolts
(Page 229).
If any bolts are loose, remove and replace

all bolts.
14. Overhaul the rotary union.
15. NDE the turntable components in

accordance with Turntable NDE (Page
248).
16. Replace the slew gearbox.
17. Overhaul the turntable.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.7 CONSOLE ON TURNTABLE INSPECTION
Figure 86: Console on Turntable - Console Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Console on Turntable Inspection (Page 194).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check the console structure for any

2. Check the PVG valve set for security and

hydraulic leaks.
3. Inspect all hydraulic hoses for damage,

chafing and leaks.
4. Inspect the PVG control levers; ensure they

automatically spring to the neutral position.
5. Inspect the pivot and locking mechanism on

the PVG levers for correct function.
6. Inspect the console pivot mounting for

correct function. Inspect hydraulic hoses
and electrical cables for chafing.
7. Check the console mounting to the

turntable for security.
8. Replace the PVG valve sets.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.8 JUNCTION BOX 2 INSPECTION
Figure 87: Junction Box 2 Inspection
Figure 88: Junction Box 2 Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Junction Box 2 Inspection (Page 196).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check the junction box 2 structure

for any signs of damage, distortion and
corrosion.
2. Visually check indicators and switches for

operation and signs of damage. Replace
as required.
3. Visually check junction box 2 for security of

mounting to the turntable.
4. Visually check all electrical cables and

fittings for damage and security.
5. Visually check work-light sockets for

damage.
6. Visually check the radio remote antenna for

damage.
7. Visually check that the drains are not

obstructed.
If necessary, disassemble a drain and

remove any dirt or debris. Reassemble the
drain. Replace a drain if it is damaged or
missing.
8. Inspect door seals for damage and function.
9. Inspect door latches for damage and

function.
10. Inspect all internal wiring for damage and

corrosion.
11. Inspect all internal components for damage

and security.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.9 INNER BEAM INSPECTION
Figure 89: Inner Beam Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Inner Beam Inspection (Page 198).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check the inner beam structure for any

Visually check the front mounting flange
(turntable well to beam) for any signs of
distortion, corrosion, loose or missing bolts.
2. Visually check the E-Stop and Observer

Pendant at the front of the beam for damage
and function.
3. Lubricate the inner beam according to Beam

Lubrication (Page 166).
4. Check turntable to beam V-ring seal for

damage and correct operation, replace as
required.
5. Inspect internal cableveyor for damage.
6. Inspect inner beam extend cylinder and fittings

for damage, leaks and security of mounting.
7. Inspect the inner beam structure for any

cracks or deformation. Carefully inspect the
front mounting flange (turntable well to beam)
for cracks or deformation. Check torque the
flange mounting bolts in accordance with
Torque Specifications (Page 143).
8. Inspect all internal hydraulic hoses, including

those in the cableveyor, for excess chafing
and leaks.
9. Inspect electrical cable in the cableveyor for

chafing and electrical fittings for damage.
10. NDE inner beam in accordance with Beams

NDE (Page 244).
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.10 OUTER BEAM INSPECTION
Figure 90: Outer Beam Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Outer Beam Inspection (Page 200).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check the outer beam structure for

any signs of damage, distortion and
corrosion.
2. Lubricate the outer beam in accordance

with Beam Lubrication (Page 166).
3. Check inner beam wiper for damage and

correct operation.
4. Inspect the outer beam structure for any

cracks or deformation.
5. Inspect the linercart rails for damage and

security of attachment.
6. Inspect the outer beam extend cylinder for

damage, leaks and security of mounting.
7. Inspect low friction slide pads for security

and excess wear.
8. Inspect outer beam rear covers for security

to the beam.
9. Inspect all external hydraulic hoses for

excess chafing and leaks.
10. Inspect external electrical cable for security

and chafing.
11. NDE outer beam in accordance with Beams

NDE (Page 244).
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.11 BASEFRAME INSPECTION
Figure 91: Baseframe Inspection
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check the baseframe structure for

any signs of distortion or corrosion.

12R4751-MRM384
2. Check tiedown pins are securely tethered to

jack body. Front jacks have been checked
in Tiedown Equipment Inspection (Page
182).
3. Inspect the baseframe structure for any

cracks, deformation, damage or corrosion.
Inspect welds attaching the front and rear
end plates. The front extension arm welds
were inspected in Tiedown Equipment
Inspection (Page 182).
4. Inspect outer beam slide pads for security

and excess wear.
5. Inspect the baseframe cableveyor for

damage.
6. Inspect all bolted components for damaged,

missing or broken bolts. Check torque
both sets (one set each side) of rear beam
clamp block mounting bolts in accordance
with Torque Specifications (Page 143).
If any bolts in a set are loose, remove and

replace all bolts in that set.
7. Inspect hydraulic hoses and electrical cable

in the cableveyor for chafing and leaks.
8. Inspect the hydraulic manifolds for security,

damage and hydraulic leaks.
9. Replace M30 bolts located on the bottom of

the baseframe to extension arm flange on
both sides of the baseframe front end plate.
Refer to Extension Arms to Baseframe
Bolts (Page 230).
10. NDE baseframe in accordance with

Baseframe NDE (Page 242).
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.12 LINERCART INSPECTION
Figure 92: Linercart Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Linercart Inspection (Page 203).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check the linercart assembly for

any signs of damage, distortion and
corrosion.
2. Check and ensure the linercart slew locking

mechanism functions correctly from both
handles.
3. Inspect the linercart anti-lift edges (two

located below each side near the front and
rear) are not damaged or worn and will
engage with the linercart rails if necessary.
4. Inspect all four linercart wheels for excess

wear and wheel bearings for freedom of
movement. Replace if required.
5. Function test the linercart slew bearing for

freedom of movement.
6. Replace the linercart wheel bearings and

inspect wheels for wear.
7. Overhaul the linercart.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.13 LINERCART DRIVE INSPECTION
Figure 93: Linercart Drive Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Linercart Drive Inspection (Page 206).
250
Pre- Post- 2 5
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Check and ensure the linercart drive cable

is not damaged or has frayed or broken
strands or cables in accordance with Wire
Rope Care and Service (Page 146).
2. Inspect the linercart wire rope tension in

accordance with Linercart Rope Tension
and Adjustment (Page 223).
3. Inspect the linercart drive sheave for

damage or excess wear.
4. Inspect linercart drive motor for damage,

leaks and security to its mounting plate and
to the outer beam.
5. Inspect the motor hydraulic manifold for

security and leaks.
6. Inspect the nylon wire rope guides for

damage or excess wear.
7. Replace the linercart wire rope drive cable.
8. Replace the linercart idler sheave and

bearings.
9. Replace the linercart drive sheave.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.14 HYDRAULIC POWER PACK INSPECTION
Figure 94: Typical Hydraulic Power Pack Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Hydraulic Power Pack Inspection (Page 208).

250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Function test the baseframe console lock-out

plate and latch; make sure they function freely.
2. Visually check the E-Stop and Drive Enable

buttons and any ancillary switches for damage.
3. Visually check that the cooling fan and heat

exchanger are clean and clear of debris.
4. Visually check the cooling and system pumps

for hydraulic leaks and security of mounting.
5. Function test the PVG valve levers; make sure

they return to the neutral position when
released.
6. Inspect the rubber mounts on the electric

motor; make sure they are not damaged.
7. Inspect the PVG valve set for security of

mounting.
8. Inspect the cooling fan and heat exchanger for

security of mounting.
9. Inspect the hydraulic manifold and filter for

security and leaks.
10. Lubricate in accordance with Pressure Filter

Lubrication (Page 154) and Electric Motor
Lubrication. (Page 170)
11. Replace the hydraulic pump drive coupling.
12. Replace the PVG valve set.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.15 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INSPECTION
Figure 95: Main Control Cabinet (MCC) Inspection
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Check all indicators and control buttons on

the Main Control Cabinet for damage.
2. Check all E-Stops on the machine for

function and any physical damage, replace
as required.

12R4751-MRM384
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
3. Check all labels on the machine and the

main and emergency lighting control
cabinets for legibility and any physical
damage, replace as required. This is
important for personnel safety.
4. Visually check the linercart pendant case,

buttons and switches for damage.
5. Inspect the main control cabinet and also

ensure that it is securely mounted to the
baseframe.
6. Inspect all cables, plugs and sockets for

damage, including those for work-lights.
7. Inspect the internal electrical wiring for

security, chafing, corrosion and damage.
8. Inspect electrical conduit cables and fittings

for damage.
9. Inspect all cabinet and junction box internal

components for security of mounting.
10. Inspect pressure reduction proximity

switches inside the boom assembly for
damage and security.
11. Replace the electric motor contactors.
12. Replace the rotating electrical connector

inside the rotary union.
13. Load test the electric motor.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
12R4751-MRM384
5.6.16 HYDRAULIC TANK INSPECTION
Figure 96: Hydraulic Tank Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Hydraulic Tank Inspection (Page 213).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Inspect hydraulic tank for damage,

corrosion and security to the baseframe.
2. Lubricate hydraulic tank in accordance with

the Hydraulic Tank Lubrication (Page 156).
3. Inspect all hydraulic hoses and fittings for

any sign of corrosion or chafing.
Any damage, corrosion or chafing on

hydraulic lines requires immediate
replacement due to the risks of bursting or
rupture under pressure.
4. Inspect entire hydraulic system for signs of

hydraulic leaks.
5. Drain the hydraulic tank completely, flush

and refill with fresh oil.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.17 FRONT BASEDRIVE INSPECTION
Figure 97: Front Basedrive Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Front Basedrive Inspection (Page 215).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually inspect the rubber tyres for

damage.
2. Visually inspect both wheels for loose or

missing wheel nuts.
3. Lubricate the front basedrive in accordance

with Front Basedrive Lubrication (Page
162).
4. Inspect the steering linkage and pins for

signs of damage or excess wear.
5. Inspect all axle pivot pins for security and

excess wear, replace on condition.
6. Inspect the basedrive motors for security

and leaks.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.18 REAR BASEDRIVE INSPECTION
Figure 98: Rear Basedrive Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Rear Basedrive Inspection (Page 217).
250
Pre- Post- 5 10
use use Years Years
Annual
1. Visually inspect the rubber tyres for

damage.
2. Visually inspect both wheels for loose or

missing wheel nuts.
3. Lubricate the rear basedrive in accordance

with Rear Basedrive Lubrication (Page
164).
4. Inspect the steering cylinder and linkage

pins for signs of damage or excess wear.
5. Inspect both stub axle kingpins and axle

pivot pin for security and excess wear,
replace on condition.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.19 PLATFORMS AND SAFETY RAILS INSPECTION
Figure 99: Typical Platforms and Safety Rails Inspection

12R4751-MRM384
Refer to Figure: Platforms and Safety Rails Inspection (Page 219)
No. Symbol Inspection Pre- Post- 250 5 10

use use Hours Years Years
Annual
1. Visually check both platforms for security to

the baseframe.
2. Visually check all fixed platform rail sections

for security to the platforms.
3. Visually check the operation of all movable

platform rail sections for freedom of
movement and positive position locking.
4. Visually check that the platform walkway is

safe and free of any obstacles. All platform
sections are present.
5. Visually check attachment fittings of

removable stairs for damage and security.
6. Visually check locking function of all four

wheels on the removable stairs.
7. Visually check alarm pole for security to the

platform safety rails.
8. Visually check the platform for damage or

cracks to the structure.
9. Visually check the safety rails for damage

or cracks.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.6.20 MILL RELINING MACHINE FUNCTION TESTS
The machine function test is required to be carried out after all post-use and higher inspections. Function
tests should be full range movements unless otherwise stated in the schedule.
Do not operate the Mill Relining Machine unless authorised by the owner.
Read manual for safety precautions and operations, refer to Safety (Page 13) and Operations (Page 61).
Function Test OK Repair / Comment
1. Ensure the machine is secured (tied down).
Do not extend beam unless the machine is tied down.
2. Test all E-Stops.
3. Start machine.
4. Check system pressure. Refer to TQAMRM384-HYD-01 (Page

461). Check hydraulic filter indicator after oil is warm.
5. Boom slew – CW and CCW (720º in each direction).
Do not extend boom unless the machine is tied down.
6. Boom – Raise and Lower.
7. Boom – Extend and Retract.
Do not extend boom unless boom is facing rear of

machine or machine is tied down.
8. Grapple Tool – pinning and release. Release (unpin), available

only with liner release enable button and a lynch pin removed
from the liner release safety bar.
Direction of operation of grapple tool pins must agree

with operation of lever, pinning and release.

12R4751-MRM384
Function Test OK Repair / Comment
9. Both grapple tool safety bar lynch pins tethered to tool and
usable. (safety bar undamaged)
10. Grapple liner lift – Raise and Lower.
11. Grapple slew – CW and CCW.
12. Grapple roll – CW and CCW.
13. Inner Beam – extend and retract.
Do not extend inner beam unless the machine is tied

down.
14. Repeat all the above machine function tests using the joystick
controls.
Repeat function tests 5, 6 and 7 using the turntable pendant.
15. Check single-point-of-control safety interlocks operate correctly.
16. Check operation of linercart interrupt switch located on ancillary

panel.
For the following six tests also check that the baseframe
light/sound beacon functions correctly for all six tests.
17. Linercart pendant – forward and reverse, two speeds in each

direction.
18. Outer Beam – extend and retract.
Do not extend beam unless the machine is tied down.
For the following four tests, ensure machine is not tied down and
is in the transport configuration.
19. Basedrive motors – forward and reverse.
20. Steering front wheels – right and left.
21. Steering rear wheels – right and left.

12R4751-MRM384
22. Front Jacks – extend and retract.
5.7 Wire Rope Tension and Adjustments
5.7.1 LINERCART ROPE TENSION AND ADJUSTMENT
Figure 100: Linercart Rope Tension Adjustment
1. Safety cover.
2. Anchor point for non-adjustable end of wire rope.
3. Adjustment bolt.
4. Adjustment marker.

12R4751-MRM384
Correct the tension of the linercart wire rope by using the adjustment system on the side of the linercart.
Adjustment Procedure:
1. Remove the safety cover from the side of the linercart.
2. Tighten or loosen the adjustment nut until the last belleville washer is in line with the adjustment marker
(refer to inset).
3. Operate the linercart to examine the tension of the wire rope. Make sure that the tension of the wire
rope is sufficient to prevent any slip between the linercart drive sheave and the wire rope.
4. If there is any slip, then replace the full set of belleville washers. Read the Assembly Drawings (Page
266) for the correct number of washers.
Inspections of the linercart wire rope should be carried out in accordance with Wire Rope Care and Service
(Page 146).

12R4751-MRM384
5.7.2 BOOM ROPE TENSION AND ADJUSTMENT
Checking the Rope Tension
1. The machine must be securely tied down. Start the machine.
Do not extend boom unless boom is facing rear of machine or machine is tied down.
2. Ensure that the beams are fully retracted.
3. Slew the boom so that it is facing the front of the machine.
4. With the boom horizontal, extend and retract the boom slightly.
Both the inner and intermediate boom sections should move simultaneously. If the intermediate
boom moves and there is a delay before the inner boom moves then the rope requires tensioning.
5. To confirm if adjustment is required, extend the boom slightly and then raise it.
If the inner section drops back a little when the boom is raised this also indicates that there is slack in
the boom rope and it should be tensioned up.
Adjusting the Boom Wire Rope Tension
1. Identify the Rope Tensioning Mount and threaded swaged ends of the rope on top of the outer boom,
refer to Boom Wire Rope Tension Adjustment (Page 226). The two threaded swaged ends of the boom
extend rope are held in a tensioning mount by hexagon nuts and lock nuts.
2. Release the lock nuts (these are either 7/8"UNF or 1"UNF depending on machine size), and with a
suitable spanner, tighten each of the retaining nuts by three turns.
3. Use the check procedure above (extending and raising the boom and observing if there is any drop back
of the inner boom).
4. Repeat the tightening of the adjustment nuts as required followed by checking, until there is no drop
back of the boom sections.
5. Tighten the lock nuts, and then proceed to adjusting the position of the boom sections.

12R4751-MRM384
Figure 101: Boom Wire Rope Tension Adjustment
Checking the Position of the Boom Sections
The position of the inner boom section, relative to the intermediate boom section, moves whenever the rope
tension is adjusted. The relative position of the inner and intermediate boom sections should be checked
periodically. To check position:
1. Partially extend the boom and measure the two dimensions ‘A’ and ‘B’ from the front and rear flanges of
the boom ends as depicted below in Boom Dimension Points (Page 227).
2. Fully retract the booms and again measure the two dimensions ‘A’ and ‘B’.
The two measurements, ‘A’ and ‘B’, should be equal when made at any boom extension position.

12R4751-MRM384
Figure 102: Boom Dimension Points
Adjusting the Inner Boom dimension ’A’:
This procedure refers to Boom Position Adjustment (Page 228).
1. Loosen the lock nuts and then the retaining nuts (#2) on the Rope Tensioning Mount (#1) on the Outer
Boom.
2. Remove the protective cover (#3) over the rope reeving guide.
3. Loosen the four socket head cap screws on the clamps (#4) that secure the semi-circular rope-reeving
guide to the clamps.
4. To increase dimension ‘A’:
a. Adjust the two wire rope tension adjuster bolts (#5) to push the front rope reeving guide clamps
forward far enough to increase dimension ‘A’ to the required value.
To decrease dimension ‘A’:
a. Loosen the two wire rope tension adjuster bolts (#5) to allow the front rope reeving guide clamps to
come toward the rear of the boom to decrease dimension ‘A’ to the required value.
b. Tighten the retaining nuts (#2) on the rope tensioning mount to bring the reeving guide back in
contact with the tension adjuster bolts.

12R4751-MRM384
5. Tighten the four socket head cap screws (#4) on the reeving guide clamps.
6. Tighten the Rope Tension Mount retaining nuts (#2) to take up any slack after the adjustment, and then
tighten the lock nuts.
7. Extend and retract the boom to ensure that the rope is adjusted correctly and then check dimensions ‘A’
and ‘B’ at various extensions, refer to Boom Dimension Points (Page 227). They should be equal
measurements, for any boom extension.
8. Replace the protective cover (#3) before placing the machine back into service.
Figure 103: Boom Position Adjustment

12R4751-MRM384
5.8 Specific Bolts Requiring Torques to be Checked
5.8.1 SLEW RING BEARING BOLTS
Check the torque of bolts on the slew ring bearings used on the turntable and linercart after the first reline
use and then at 1000 hr (or five yearly) intervals. This is to preserve the life of each bearing by ensuring
that it is not deformed by bolts losing their torque. The following information is taken from the Rollix slew
bearing manual. Check the size of the bolts and then use the correct torque for the bolt size as detailed:
Diameter 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 27 30 33
(mm)
Torque 69 117 185 280 390 560 750 960 1400 1900 2600
(Nm)
The bolts should also have torque applied in a ‘star’ pattern as depicted:
Figure 104: Typical Slew Ring Bearing Torque Pattern

12R4751-MRM384
5.8.2 EXTENSION ARMS TO BASEFRAME BOLTS
Both of the front extension arms are secured to the baseframe using bolts with cone lock nuts. Refer to the
baseframe assembly drawing in Assembly Drawings (Page 265) for the correct quantity of bolts, high tensile
washers and cone lock nuts to be fitted.
Replace the M30 bolts, high tensile washers and cone lock nuts at 1000 hr (or five yearly) intervals. These
are located at the bottom of the baseframe to extension arm flange on both sides of the baseframe. Check
the torque of the remaining M24 bolts on this flange. This is to preserve the life of the baseframe and each
extension arm by ensuring that they are not deformed by bolts losing their torque.
For the required bolt torques refer to the Torque Specifications (Page 143). Before replacing bolts and
checking the bolt torques ensure that the baseframe and extension arm flange mating surfaces are correctly
prepared and aligned.
Figure 105: Bolts to be Replaced
1. Baseframe Flange. One on each side of the baseframe front end plate.
2. Extension Arm Flange.
3. M30 bolts, high tensile washers and cone lock nuts to be replaced. Eight on
each side.

12R4751-MRM384
5.9 Non Destructive Examination
The Non-Destructive Examination (NDE) program is carried out in conjunction with the scheduled
inspections. Due to the associated safety risks it is imperative that all documentation associated with NDE
is retained with the logbook and copies with RME for establishing and maintaining future NDE intervals. All
inspections are to be carried out by RME or a certified NDE Inspector.
5.9.1 NDE REQUIREMENTS
The NDE Program is applied to all lifting and critical components fitted to the Mill Relining Machine. The
test program enables detection of early signs of damage or cracking that could cause component failure
leading to serious injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment.
Specific Areas and Items to be inspected:
1. All pins and mating holes;
2. All clevises;
3. Welded joints (clamping points, platform mounting legs, cylinder attachment points, linercart rails);
4. All cylinders;
5. Rope sheaves and guides; and
6. All boom lifting points.
5.9.2 NDE TESTING METHODS
The following methods are considered acceptable for NDE testing of the critical components:
Visual Examination: VE - AS3978-2003 and

AS2741-2002 for shackles
Dye Penetrant Examination: PE - AS2062-1997
Ultrasonic Examination: UE - AS1065-1988 and

AS2207-2007
Magnetic Particle Examination: ME - AS1171-1998

12R4751-MRM384
5.9.3 VISUAL EXAMINATION
The Figure for each major machine assembly, contained within this NDE section, shows the components that
are required to have NDE. The associated table also indicates any NDE and the "Areas" on the machine
that require visual examination at the lesser intervals of Pre and Post-use and 12 months or 250 hours.
Initial visual examination of the components should be conducted using the following inspection criteria:
1. Cracks. If any cracking is identified it will require either replacement or repair. If it is considered that
the item may be repaired and there are possible structural implications, contact RME for further advice.
2. Wear. Use the following as a guide for wear:
a. Pins. If a pin has 1% or more material worn off the overall diameter or if any protective plating has
worn off then the pin should be replaced as it will compound wear on other components.
b. Pin Bores. Any eccentric wear in the bore is cause to replace the pin, and also contact RME for
repair advice.
c. Wire Rope Sheaves. Any wear that decreases the diameter or that can cause an increase in wear
on the wire rope is cause for replacement.
3. Deformation or Damage. If there is any deformation or damage of a component, be it steel plate,

hollow or round section, this is cause for further investigation as to establish the initial cause, and
dependent on the component, replacement may be necessary. Any bulging or deformation of any
hydraulic cylinder is cause for replacement.
Procedure:
If the visual examination identifies any cracking, wear, deformation or damage, then:
1. the part may be replaced; or
2. repaired (if repairable, refer notes in associated table); or
3. the next most intensive NDE testing method employed to confirm (or otherwise) the part’s condition.
4. If any doubt still exists as to the part’s condition then use the next most intensive NDE testing method or
replace the part (this could be the most cost effective option).

12R4751-MRM384
5.10 NDE Inspections
Do the non-destructive examinations on these components, at the given intervals. Use the method of
examination shown for that interval.
If there is an indication of a fault, use a method of examination that is more intensive or replace the part.
Contact RME for any further advice.

12R4751-MRM384
5.10.1 GRAPPLE NDE
Figure 106: Grapple NDE

12R4751-MRM384
Grapple NDE Inspections
250 1000 2000

Hours Hours Hours
No. Components Remarks
or or 5 or 10
Annual Years Years
1. Grapple Raise Arms VE for cracks or damage. Replace if necessary.
2. Grapple Raise Arms VE for cracks or damage. VE welds around

grapple tool mount and raise arms for cracks. VE
rod clevises and pins. VE pins and bushes for
wear. Replace if necessary.
3. Grapple Slew Rotary VE all welds for cracks where actuator is attached.
Actuator Inspect entire unit for damage and wear. Replace
if necessary.
Grapple Mounting VE for cracks or damage. Replace if necessary.

Plate
5. Grapple Slew Plate VE for cracks or damage. Replace if necessary.
6. Grapple Roll Rotary VE all welds for cracks where actuator is attached.
if necessary.
7. Grapple Roll Plate VE for cracks or damage. Replace if necessary.
8. Liner Lift Rotary VE all welds for cracks where actuator is attached.
if necessary.
9. Rotary Actuator There is no life limit on the covers, repair or

Covers replacement is on condition.
10. Bolts, Nuts and Inspect all bolts for any damage. Any damage is
Studs cause for replacement. All bolts in the grapple
have specific torques which may be found on the
assembly drawing.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.10.2 GRAPPLE TOOL NDE
Figure 107: Grapple Tool NDE

12R4751-MRM384
Grapple Tool - Mandatory NDE Inspection
250 1000 2000

Hours Hours Hours
or or 5 or 10
Annual Years Years
1. Grapple Tool Inspect around centre and end bosses for cracks,
Retention Pin deformation and wear. Replace on condition.
*CRITICAL*
2. Grapple Tool Body Inspect all welds for cracks around the grapple
body. Pay attention to the liner/pin guide arm
welds. Check the body looking for deformation,
wear and cracks. Measure internal wear in slide
arm bearings – wear limit 1.0% of diameter.
3. Slide Arms Inspect for cracks and bending. Wear limit 1.0% of
diameter.
4. Liner Pins Inspect for cracks and bending. Wear limit 1.0% of
*CRITICAL* diameter. Replace if wear or damage is present.
5. Load Ring and Inspect for cracks, deformation and bending.

mounting plate with Wear limit on any part of the load ring is 1.0% of
magnetic retainer. material diameter. Magnet must be able to secure
*CRITICAL* the load ring when the load ring is not in use.
Replace if wear or damage is present.
6. Detachable Hook and Inspect for cracks, damage or deformation.

Shackle Replace if any present.
*CRITICAL*
7. Protective shield plate Inspect for cracks and bending. Replace if any
present.
8. Grapple Tool Replace hydraulic seals, rose joints and pins at 5

Cylinder years.
9. Grapple tool foot and Inspect for deformation and cracking. Replace on
foot Bracket condition.
10. Liner Safety Bar. Inspect for bending or deformation. Replace lynch
pins each year.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.10.3 TIEDOWN EQUIPMENT NDE
Figure 108: Tiedown Equipment NDE

12R4751-MRM384
Tiedown Equipment - Mandatory NDE Inspections
250 1000 2000

Hours Hours Hours
or or 5 or 10
Annual Years Years
1. Rear Tiedown Rods. VE whole rod and around welds for cracks.
Inspect for damage, corrosion, ‘necking’ or bending
to shank or threads. VE clevis bores for wear and
deformation. Wear limit for holes is 2.0% of
diameter. Replace if repair needed.
2. Rear Tiedown Rod VE for damage to threads. Replace if necessary.

Lock Nuts. Replace any missing nuts or washers.
3. Rear Tiedown Pins VE for bending or wear. Replace if necessary.

and Lynch Pins.
4. Rear Tiedown Shafts VE for cracks. Inspect for damage or deformation.

(fitted to baseframe). Replace if necessary.
5. Rear Tiedown Plate. Wear limit for bolt holes is 2.0% of diameter. VE
around welds for cracks. VE for deformation.
Replace if repair needed.
6. Front Jacks and VE for deformation, distortion and security of

Extension Arms. mounting, jack to extension arm and extension arm
to baseframe. VE extension arm welds for cracks.
7. Front Jack Pins. VE for deformation or cracks. Wear limit 1.5 %

diameter. Replace if necessary.
8. Front pinning blocks Inspect all welds for cracks. Wear limit for holes is
2.0% of diameter. Inspect for damage and
corrosion. Contact RME if cracking is found.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.10.4 BOOM CYLINDER NDE
The inspections shown below are specific for the boom raise-lower cylinders. These cylinders are critical to
the safe operation of the machine. Similar inspections may also be applied to all other cylinders. All
attachment and lift points should also be inspected.
The boom raise-lower cylinders are attached at the outer boom and to the turntable assembly.
Figure 109: Boom Raise-Lower Cylinders NDE

12R4751-MRM384
Boom Cylinders NDE Inspections
250 1000 2000

Hours Hours Hours
or or 5 or 10
Annual Years Years
1. Cylinder to turntable VE for cracks along all welds and threaded areas.
clevis mounts VE whole area for damage, deformation or wear.
2. Cylinder barrel. VE for cracks. Inspect whole area for damage,

deformation, bulging or wear.
3. Cylinder manifold. VE for cracks along all welds and threaded areas.
VE whole area for damage, deformation or wear.
4. Cylinder rod. VE for cracks on threaded areas. VE whole rod for

damage, deformation/bending or wear (particularly
chrome plating).
5. Rod end clevis. VE for cracks along all welds and threaded areas.
VE whole area for damage, deformation or wear.
6. Teardrop pins. VE pins and matching machined bores. Damage,

deformation or eccentric wear of more than 2% of
the pin or bore diameter is cause for pin
replacement. For wear or damage to the
machined bore, contact RME for repair advice.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.11 Recommended NDE Inspections
5.11.1 BASEFRAME NDE
The baseframe requires the inspections detailed, with particular attention to be paid to the forward supports
and tiedown areas.
There is no life limit on the baseframe; replacement is on condition. If the baseframe is damaged in any
way, RME should be contacted for advice on approved repair methods.
Figure 110: Baseframe NDE

12R4751-MRM384
Baseframe NDE Inspection
1000 2000
Hours Hours
or 5 or 10
Years Years
1. Rear beam clamp mounts VE for cracks. VE each unit for damage,
deformation or wear
2. Centre spine to front and rear VE vertical welds for cracks.

end plates (vertical welds)
3. Front beam clamp mounts VE for cracks. Inspect whole area for damage,
deformation or wear
4. Extension arm mounts to VE vertical welds for cracks.

baseframe
5. Axle attachment mounts VE all vertical welds for cracks, VE all welds.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.11.2 BEAMS NDE
The Beams comprise an outer and inner beam that requires the inspections detailed.
There is no life limit on the beams. Replacement is on condition. If any beam is damaged in any way,
RME should be contacted for advice on approved repair methods.
Figure 111: Beams NDE

12R4751-MRM384
Beams NDE Inspection
1000 2000
Hours Hours
or 5 or 10
Years Years
1. Outer beam rear flange. Inspect for cracks along all welds. VE whole area
for damage, deformation or wear.
2. Outer beam – beam lower flange Inspect for cracks along all welds. VE whole area
(and also top edge). for damage, deformation or wear.
3. Outer beam cradle. Inspect for cracks forward of mounting bolt holes.
VE whole unit for damage, deformation or wear.
4. Inner beam – beam corners. Inspect for cracks along all welds. VE whole area
for damage, deformation or wear.
5. Slew ring mounting to Inspect for cracks around all welds and bolt holes.
turntable well. VE whole area for damage, deformation or wear.
6. Beam cylinders. Inspect cylinders for bulging, deformation and wear.

Overhaul or replace as required.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.11.3 BOOM NDE
The Boom is comprised of an Outer, Intermediate and Inner assemblies which require these inspections.
There is no life limit on the boom. Replacement is on condition. If any boom assembly is damaged in any
way, RME should be contacted for advice on approved repair methods.
Inspect the following items:
Figure 112: Boom Sections NDE

12R4751-MRM384
Boom NDE Inspection
1000 2000
Hours Hours
or 5 or 10
Years Years
1. Outer Boom. Boom and VE pins and matching machined bores. Damage,
boom cylinder pivot pins and deformation or eccentric wear of more than 2% of
bores. the pin or bore diameter is cause for pin
machined bore contact RME for repair advice.
2. Outer Boom. Pad mounts VE for cracks along all welds. VE whole area for
and lower plate. damage, deformation or wear.
3. Intermediate Boom. All side VE for cracks along all welds. VE whole area for
welds. damage, deformation or wear.
4. Intermediate Boom. Front VE for cracks along all welds. VE whole area for
flange. damage, deformation or wear.
5. Inner Boom. Rear VE for cracks around the radius and any areas that
end of boom in radius areas. are welded. VE whole area for damage,
deformation or wear.
6. Inner Boom. Grapple VE for cracks around all welds and bolt holes.
attachment flange. Inspect whole area for damage, deformation or
wear.
7. Inner Boom. All upper and Inspect for cracks along all welds. Inspect whole
lower side welds area for damage, deformation or wear
8. Internal Boom Cylinder (not Inspect cylinder for bulging, deformation and wear.
shown). Overhaul or replace as required.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384
5.11.4 TURNTABLE NDE
The turntable is mounted to the front of the inner beam and requires these inspections. There is no life limit
on the turntable. Replacement is on condition. If the turntable is damaged in any way, RME should be
contacted for advice on approved repair methods.
Figure 113: Turntable NDE

12R4751-MRM384
Turntable NDE Inspection
1000 2000
Hours Hours
or 5 or 10
Years Years
1. Boom cylinder attachment Inspect all welds around the turntable legs.
bracket to platen. Inspect the flat panel for any distortion or
deformation. Inspect the bolt holes for any sign of
wear or movement.
2. Boom attachment points Inspect for cracks along all welds. VE whole area
(internal sides). for damage, deformation or wear.
3. Boom raise-lower cylinder Inspect for cracks around holes and radiating from
mounts – upper portion of mount holes. VE whole area for damage, deformation or
surrounding holes. wear.
4. Turntable base to stiffening ring. Inspect for cracks around the welds where the base
is welded to the stiffening ring. VE whole area for
damage, deformation or wear.
5. Boom pivot pins. Inspect pins and matching machined bores.

Damage, deformation or eccentric wear of more
than 2% of the pin or bore diameter is cause for pin
machined bore contact RME for repair advice.
6. Inspect support structure. Inspect for cracks in welds and surrounding flat
panels for deformation.
Signature:

12R4751-MRM384

12R4751-MRM384
6. Troubleshooting Guide
If troubleshooting requires the use of schematic drawings for either hydraulic or electric circuits these are in
Electrical and Hydraulic Schematics (Page 269).
Anyone may perform the initial checks, but if any electrical enclosure needs to be opened a qualified
electrician is required. If any hydraulic fittings need to be adjusted a qualified technician is required.
If the problem has not been resolved after checking through the troubleshooting procedures, then
contact:
RME HELP HOTLINE +61 408 334 600 24 hrs/day

12R4751-MRM384
6.1 Safety Precautions for Hydraulic Troubleshooting
Always consider safety precautions before beginning a service procedure. Protect yourself and others from
injury. Take the following general precautions whenever servicing a hydraulic system.
Unintended movement of the machine or mechanism may cause injury to the technician or bystanders. To
protect against unintended movement, secure the machine or disable/disconnect the mechanism while
servicing.
Some cleaning solvents are flammable. To avoid possible fire, do not use cleaning solvents in an area
where a source of ignition may be present.
Protect yourself from injury. Use proper safety equipment, including safety glasses, at all times.
Hydraulic fluid contains hazardous material. Avoid prolonged contact with hydraulic fluid. Always dispose
of used hydraulic fluid according to state, and federal environmental regulations.
6.2 Diagnostic Flow Charts and Guidelines
The machine may only be started at the main electrical cabinet. The first chart guides the operator where to
look if it will not start, stops immediately when the "motor start" button is released or stops after it has been
running. Note that whenever the power supply is first connected or restored, the machine will not re-start
automatically. This is a safety feature to prevent uncontrolled motion of any part of the machine.

12R4751-MRM384
6.2.1 STARTING DIAGNOSTIC - FLOW CHART 6-1
Figure 114: Starting Diagnostic

12R4751-MRM384
6.2.2 MACHINE DOES NOT START - FLOW CHART 6-2
Figure 115: Machine does not Start

12R4751-MRM384
6.2.3 MACHINE WILL NOT START - FLOW CHART 6-3
Figure 116: Machine will not Start

12R4751-MRM384
6.2.4 CHECK FOR MOMENTARY LOWERING/INCREASING OF SUPPLY VOLTAGE
The phase failure relay in the Main Control Cabinet monitors the voltage supply for correct supply. This is
protection for the machine circuitry. Incorrect three-phase rotation connection will cause this relay to trip.
The site electrician should check site outlet connections and change if necessary.
The site supply should be kept within the correct parameters required. If the site supply voltage is
permanently low, then the contactors won’t pull in. If the 24 V ac from the transformer is low, then this will
also cause starting problems. Also check for dirty or burnt contacts, refer to Check Site Power Outlet and
Relay Contacts (Page 258) below.
6.2.5 CHECK INDICATORS
Indicator lights on the electrical cabinet door are of the ‘press to test’ type. They will illuminate when their
lenses are pressed to show that the lights themselves are functional.
6.2.6 CHECK E-STOPS
If any E-Stop button was engaged during operation, then find out the reason and ensure safe working
procedures are consistently followed. If all E-Stops are disengaged (in the ‘out’ position) then:
1. Check all E-Stop button assemblies for any damage. Refer to Emergency Stops (Page 26) for the
location of all E-Stops;
2. Check continuity from the Main Control Cabinet terminals to Junction Box 4 located inside the well under
the turntable and from Junction Box 4 through the rotary union to junction box 2 on the turntable;
3. Check pendant control cables and plugs for integrity and damage; and
4. Check the E-Stop monitoring relay which is used to detect errors in the E-Stop circuit or in the main
motor contactors. Open the main isolator (‘O’ position), then close it (‘I’ position). Check to see if the
E-Stop monitoring relay has reset. If it has not, then check both main motor contactors for failure, e.g. a
‘welded’ contact.
Include all pendant control E-Stops in these checks. Check that either the pendants or their loop back plugs
are correctly connected. A damaged pendant cable, e.g. one having been overstretched, may have the
effect of an engaged E-Stop. Temporarily replacing the pendant with the loop back plug will test this
possibility. If the linercart pendant cable is damaged, then it must be replaced by a qualified electrician.
Also include the radio switch located on the Ancillary Panel (Page 105) and the E-Stops on any active radio
pendants, refer to Activating the Remote Control (Page 115).

12R4751-MRM384
6.2.7 CHECK OIL LEVEL
If level has become low then check the whole machine for any oil leaks, burst hydraulic hoses or damaged
fittings. Repair and add oil as required. Boom and inner beam cylinders must be retracted when adding
oil, to avoid an overflow the next time they are retracted. When oil is added, the oil level light on the main
control cabinet should turn off. Keep adding oil, up to the level mark labelled on the reservoir.
6.2.8 CHECK OIL TEMPERATURE
Check the oil temperature gauge reading (on oil tank). If the ‘High Oil Temp’ light on the main electrical
cabinet is illuminated and the gauge reading is above 75°C, then wait for the oil temperature to become
lower than 65°C and then restart machine.
If the hydraulic oil rapidly overheats again, then:
1. Ensure the heat exchanger is not blocked with foreign material and the fan is operating;
2. Check operation of the thermostatic valve in the heat exchanger;
If these steps do not fix the fault then
3. a more serious fault e.g. worn main pump, is indicated. In this case a qualified technician will be
required for further testing.
6.2.9 CHECK ELECTRIC MOTOR OVERLOAD THERMAL RELAY
If the main electric motor has overheated, then the thermistor sensors will prevent the motor from starting
until it has cooled and the relay reset button is pressed. Also check that the thermal overload relay is not
being tripped by a motor over current condition.
If the electric motor thermal overload relay trips again within a short time interval, then a more serious fault,
e.g. with the motor, control relays and/or site voltage level, is indicated.
Also check if either the main or cooling fan motor over current circuit breakers has tripped. Tripping of the
main electric motor circuit breaker will give a thermal overload indication and it will not allow the machine to
start until it is reset. Tripping of the cooling fan circuit breaker will also give a thermal overload indication
and will also remove power from the phase protection relay which in turn will prevent the machine from being
started. If this condition persists on restart, check electric motor and hydraulic pump condition.

12R4751-MRM384
6.2.10 CHECK SITE POWER OUTLET AND RELAY CONTACTS
Inside the main control cabinet, a phase rotation/phase failure relay is fitted to the machine. The indicator
lights on the relay should indicate correct phase rotation. If not, rectify phase connections on the site supply
outlet being used.
A dirty or burnt contact in the site power outlet or machine plug can cause the phase protection relay to trip,
stopping the motor. This problem can occur during start up as well as during operation under load. Also,
this can be a transitory problem and after tripping, the relay indicator lights may return to normal. Refer to
Check for Momentary Lowering/Increase in Supply Voltage (Page 256). The electrician should open the
cabinet door (temporarily bypass the interlock) and observe the indicator lights during load running or an
attempted start up to see if this problem is occurring.
The circuit breakers or main isolator may be tripped. The electrician should open the cabinet door
(temporarily bypass the interlock) and probe the incoming main cable to establish that there is correct power
supply (voltage and phases) available. Check that all circuit breakers are set. If any have tripped, test
those circuits for ground faults or short circuits. If neither fault is found, check that all breakers are reset.

12R4751-MRM384
6.2.11 MACHINE STARTS - SLOW OR DOWN ON POWER - FLOW CHART 6-4
Figure 117: Machine Starts - slow or down on power

12R4751-MRM384
6.2.12 HYDRAULIC TROUBLESHOOTING - FLOW CHART 6-5
Figure 118: Hydraulic Troubleshooting

12R4751-MRM384
6.2.13 HYDRAULIC TROUBLESHOOTING - FLOW CHART 6-6
Figure 119: COT Enable Troubleshooting

12R4751-MRM384
6.3 Danfoss PVG32 Control Valves
6.3.1 OVERVIEW
This section provides general steps to follow if undesirable system conditions are observed. Follow the
steps listed until the problem is solved. Some of the items will be system specific. Always observe the
safety precautions listed above, and those related to your specific equipment.
This troubleshooting guide for the PVG valve assemblies does not cover valves
that have been altered from original valve build specifications.
6.3.2 TROUBLESHOOTING A PVG VALVE
Every fault location process should follow a logical and systematic order:
1. Is the oil level correct when the pump is operating?
2. Is the condition of oil and filters acceptable?
3. Is pressure, flow and flow direction as specified?
4. Is the oil temperature too high or too low (oil viscosity)?
5. Are there any unusual vibrations or noise (cavitations)?
The Electrical and Hydraulic schematics (Page 269) show the order of, and the connections between, the
individual components.

12R4751-MRM384
When a defective component is identified:
1. Clean the component and its surroundings before removal.
2. Remove loose paint from pipes and fittings.
3. Seal all holes, hoses and pipe ends with numbered plugs after removal to avoid the entry of dirt during
repairs and to assist with reassembly.
4. Never disassemble hydraulic components outside.
5. Perform repairs in a workshop on a clean workbench (covered with clean cloth or newspaper).
6. Make sure that a Sauer-Danfoss service manual for the product is handy.
7. Follow the instructions word for word during disassembly and assembly.
If these instructions are not followed closely, the system may not operate correctly after repairs are
completed.
In some cases special tools are necessary for assembling the product.
Sauer-Danfoss service manuals give full guidance on use of special tools.

12R4751-MRM384

12R4751-MRM384
7. Vendor Data and Spare Parts
7.1 Vendor Data Drawings
Information Drawing or Document
Elevation - Working Range Dimensions TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293)
End Views - Mill Entry Details TQAMRM384-VDD-02 (Page 294)
Plan - Working Load Reactions TQAMRM384-VDD-03 (Page 295)
Manoeuvring and Floor Loading TQAMRM384-VDD-04 (Page 296)
Floor Interface Details TQAMRM384-VDD-05 (Page 297)
Grapple Tool Vendor Data Drawings GRAPPLE TOOL-VDD-01 (Page 298)
7.2 Assembly Drawings for Spare Parts or Maintenance
The Assembly drawings are referred to in the Maintenance procedures and are used to assist in assembly
and disassembly.
When ordering spare parts from an Assembly drawing it is important to supply the following information:
1. Drawing Number and Revision
2. Item Number on drawing
3. Part Number
4. Quantity Required
5. Title of the part
6. Machine Serial Number: 12R4751-MRM384

12R4751-MRM384
7.3 List of Assembly Drawings
Drawing Number Description
12R4751 (Page 302) RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine
12R4798 (Page 304) BASEFRAME ARRANGEMENT
12R4797 (Page 306) BASEFRAME GROUP
10R5649 (Page 308) BASEFRAME CABLEVEYOR GROUP
10R4378 (Page 309) BASEDRIVE MANIFOLD GROUP
10R4383 (Page 310) JACKS MANIFOLD GROUP
10R4416 (Page 311) BEAM MANIFOLD GROUP
12R1283 (Page 312) TRANSDUCER
12R2881 (Page 313) CABLE TURNTABLE TO MOTOR CONTROL CABINET
12R2986 (Page 315) CABLE JB4 TO MOTOR CONTROL CABINET
12R4118 (Page 317) FRONT BASEDRIVE GROUP
10R8609 (Page 320) FRONT BASEDRIVE CYLINDER GROUP
11R0219 (Page 321) REAR BASEDRIVE GROUP
10R8610 (Page 323) REAR BASEDRIVE CYLINDER GROUP
12R4823 (Page 324) POWER PACK GROUP
12R4822 (Page 327) POWER PACK FRAME GROUP
12R3702 (Page 329) PRESSURE FILTER GROUP
12R4831 (Page 330) BASEFRAME VALVE GROUP
12R4821 (Page 331) PUMP GROUP
10R6259 (Page 332) CLAMP GROUP
12R4834 (Page 333) ELECTRICAL MAIN CONTROL CABINET GROUP
12R4833 (Page 334) ENCLOSURE GROUP
12R4835 (Page 337) MOTOR CONTROL CABINET DOOR ELECTRICAL GROUP
12R4828 (Page 339) HYDRAULIC TANK ARRANGEMENT
12R4588 (Page 341) HYDRAULIC TANK GROUP
12R4806 (Page 343) OUTER BEAM ARRANGEMENT
12R4807 (Page 344) OUTER BEAM GROUP
12R4230 (Page 347) OUTER BEAM CYLINDER GROUP
12R4804 (Page 348) INNER BEAM ARRANGEMENT
12R4805 (Page 350) INNER BEAM GROUP

12R4751-MRM384
10R5395 (Page 352) CABLEVEYOR GROUP
10R7097 (Page 353) INNER BEAM CYLINDER GROUP
12R4152 (Page 354) TURNTABLE TO MOTOR CONTROL CABINET CABLE GROUP
12R4262 (Page 356) JBOX4 TO MOTOR CONTROL CABINET CABLE GROUP
12R4770 (Page 358) LINERCART ARRANGEMENT
12R1618 (Page 359) LINERCART GROUP
10R9837 (Page 360) LINERCART DRIVE GROUP
10R7696 (Page 361) LINERCART DRIVE GROUP
12R1651 (Page 362) TURNTABLE ARRANGEMENT
12R1650 (Page 363) TURNTABLE GROUP
12R2363 (Page 364) ROTARY UNION GROUP
11R0201 (Page 367) ROTARY UNION GROUP
12R4799 (Page 370) BOOM ARRANGEMENT
12R1590 (Page 372) BOOM GROUP
12R1589 (Page 373) OUTER BOOM GROUP
10R9133 (Page 375) INTERMEDIATE BOOM GROUP
10R9465 (Page 376) INNER BOOM GROUP
10R9559 (Page 377) PROXIMITY GROUP
10R9136 (Page 378) BOOM EXTEND-RETRACT CYLINDER GROUP
10R9544 (Page 379) BOOM RAISE-LOWER CYLINDER GROUP
12R1588 (Page 380) BOOM CABLETRAY GROUP
10R9138 (Page 381) BOOM CABLEVEYOR GROUP
12R4818 (Page 382) GRAPPLE ARRANGEMENT
12R1620 (Page 385) GRAPPLE GROUP
12R2614 (Page 387) GRAPPLE TOOL GROUP
10R8808 (Page 388) GRAPPLE TOOL EXTEND-RETRACT CYLINDER
10R9160 (Page 389) GRAPPLE TOOL SHIELD PLATE GROUP
10R9159 (Page 390) LOAD RING GROUP
12R4766 (Page 391) CONSOLE ADAPTER GROUP
12R4764 (Page 392) JBOX2 ENCLOSURE ARRANGEMENT
12R4765 (Page 397) ANCILLARY PANEL ENCLOSURE GROUP
12R4824 (Page 398) CONSOLE ARRANGEMENT

12R4751-MRM384
12R3472 (Page 400) CONSOLE GROUP
12R4826 (Page 401) OPERATOR'S VALVE GROUP
12R4809 (Page 402) SEAT ARRANGEMENT
12R4808 (Page 403) SEAT GROUP
12R0591 (Page 404) JOYSTICK CONNECTOR GROUP
12R3454 (Page 405) JOYSTICK CABLE GROUP
12R5098 (Page 407) JOYSTICK ARRANGEMENT
12R3430 (Page 408) JOYSTICK GROUP
12R4825 (Page 409) JBOX4 ENCLOSURE ARRANGEMENT
12R1600 (Page 411) JBOX4 ENCLOSURE GROUP
12R4829 (Page 412) MANIFOLD GROUP
10R4062 (Page 413) MIRROR GROUP
12R4810 (Page 414) LEFT HAND PLATFORM GROUP
12R2897 (Page 415) COVER GROUP
12R2898 (Page 416) HOOK GROUP
10R8744 (Page 417) BEACON GROUP
10R5050 (Page 418) FLASHING LIGHT POLE GROUP WIRING LOOM
12R4811 (Page 419) RIGHT HAND PLATFORM GROUP
12R4755 (Page 420) REMOVABLE STAIRS
10R7222 (Page 421) REMOVABLE STAIRS GROUP
12R4819 (Page 423) LINER INTERFACE GROUP
12R1667 (Page 424) DUAL SEATING GROUP
12R4839 (Page 425) RADIO CONTROL GROUP
12R3364 (Page 426) REMOTE TRANSPORT CONTROL GROUP
12R3759 (Page 427) CONTROL PENDANT CABLE GROUP
10R5727 (Page 429) PENDANT WITH LOOPBACK PLUG
12R4840 (Page 430) CABLE REELER GROUP
10106188 (Page 431) LIGHT GROUP
12R4752 (Page 432) FEMALE DECONTACTOR
12R4753 (Page 433) MACHINE COVERS GROUP
12R4754 (Page 434) TIEDOWN GROUP
12R5456 (Page 435) PROXIMITY GROUP

12R4751-MRM384
8. Electrical and Hydraulic Schematics
8.1 Schematics
The following schematic drawings are presented in the sequence as listed and should be used in conjunction
with:
1. Troubleshooting Guide (Page 251)
2. Vendor Data and Spare Parts (Page 265)
8.2 List of Electrical Schematics
TQAMRM384-ELE-01 (Page 436) Block Diagram
TQAMRM384-ELE-02 (Page 437) 3 Phase Schematic
TQAMRM384-ELE-03 (Page 438) Main Control Cabinet Control Schematic
TQAMRM384-ELE-06 (Page 439) Linercart Schematic
TQAMRM384-ELE-07 (Page 440) Transport Pendant
TQAMRM384-ELE-08 (Page 441) Beam & E-Stop Schematic
TQAMRM384-ELE-09 (Page 442) JBox 2 Power and Lights Schematic
TQAMRM384-ELE-10 (Page 443) JBox 2 Control Schematic
TQAMRM384-ELE-11 (Page 444) Radio Control Schematic
TQAMRM384-ELE-12 (Page 445) Turntable Joystick Schematic
TQAMRM384-ELE-13 (Page 446) Turntable Enable Schematic
TQAMRM384-ELE-14 (Page 447) Radio Joystick Select Schematic
TQAMRM384-ELE-16 (Page 448) Main Control Cabinet Terminal Assembly
TQAMRM384-ELE-18 (Page 449) JBox 2 Terminal Assembly
TQAMRM384-ELE-19 (Page 450) JBox JB1 JB2a and JBox 3 Terminal Assemblies
TQAMRM384-ELE-20 (Page 451) Main Control Cabinet Assembly Layout
TQAMRM384-ELE-21 (Page 452) JBox 2 Panel and Door Layouts
TQAMRM384-ELE-22 (Page 453) Joystick Control Layout
TQAMRM384-ELE-25 (Page 454) Bill of Materials
TQAMRM384-ELE-28 (Page 457) RME User Error Codes
TQAMRM384-ELE-29 (Page 458) ABB User Error Codes
Motor Data (Page 459) Motor Data

12R4751-MRM384
8.3 List of Hydraulic Schematics
TQAMRM384-HYD (Page 461) Hydraulic Schematic

12R4751-MRM384
Appendixes
Appendix A: Pre-Reline Inspection (Page 273)
Appendix B: Joystick Pendant COT Enable Control System User Information (Page 279)
Appendix C: Engineering Drawings (Page 291)

12R4751-MRM384

12R4751-MRM384
Appendix A: Pre Reline Inspection

The following checklist of operational procedures should be photocopied and completed each time the
RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine is used.

12R4751-MRM384

12R4751-MRM384
Russell Mill Relining Machine Pre Reline Inspection Blank
Blank template supplied if needed to enter different details:
Client:
Project:
Client TAG No:
RME Serial No:
Lifting Capacity:
RME TECHNICIAN (Print name):
RME TECHNICIAN (Signature): (INIT)
CLIENT REPRESENTATIVE (Print name):
CLIENT REPRESENTATIVE (Signature): (INIT)
Date:
This Pre Reline Checklist is applicable to RUSSELL 7 and RUSSELL 8 Mill Relining Machines.
Minimum Requirements: For completion of Pre Reline Inspection.
1. All functions to be tested and their relevant safety functions demonstrated to be operating.
2. No visible leaks or damage to equipment.
Using this document and important points to note:

● Tasks or options listed that are not required must be marked NOT APPLICABLE (N/A) by the RME technician.
● Tasks that do not test satisfactorily must be entered on the action sheet and if possible must be completed before
signing off the Pre Reline Inspection, or both parties must be in agreement that the machine is in a safe,
satisfactory condition to be operated.
● If in the opinion of the RME technician the machine cannot be operated safely without repair, immediate verbal
and written notification via the Action Item list below must be made by the RME technician to both the customer
and to RME Head Office. The RME technician must record the date and time of notification.
● If the machine is found to be unsafe to operate the RME technician is to tag the machine "Out of Service" using
the correct site lockout procedure or RME "Out of Service" tags.
● If the customer continues to use the machine unsafely, despite the notification to the customer, this should be
reported to RME Head Office. The customer is also required to sign off their acceptance of this in the Action Item
list and above in the Client Representative section.

12R4751-MRM384

12R4751-MRM384
Action List
Items requiring action before further use.
Priority: 1 – Immediate action required.
2 – Monitor and repair before next reline.
3 – Monitor and repair as required.
Item # Priority Action Requirement Signed Date
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12

12R4751-MRM384

12R4751-MRM384
Appendix B: Joystick Pendant COT Enable Control System User Information

The following information is for the use of the safety related parts on the control system on the RUSSELL 7
Mill Relining Machine.

12R4751-MRM384

12R4751-MRM384
Joystick Pendant COT Enable Control System User Information

B
Joystick/Pendant/COT Enable Control System User Information
This information is for the use of the safety related parts of the control system above the turntable. Its
objective is to ensure that the safety performance level of the safety control system does not deteriorate over
time, with a resulting increase in risk and potential harm to personnel. It is intended for site personnel
involved in the maintenance and repair of the SRP/CS.
Console on Turntable safety functions implemented are:
 SF1: Emergency Stop supplementary protection from dangerous motion via Enable Safety relay:
Power shall be removed from the machine by the Enable Safety relay emergency stop contacts
opening. This is a sub part of the main emergency stop system, required by COT enable safety
function failure. ISO 13849-1:2006 Category 3 Pl d.
 SF2: Enable function dropping of liner hazard: The release of the liner via the PVG bank solenoid
valve shall be permitted only when the Liner Release Enable solenoid is opened. The safe (de-
energized) state shall be the Liner Release Enable solenoid closed. ISO 13849-1:2006 Category 2, 3
Pl d.
 SF3: Mode control operation from one source: Mode selection shall only permit Liner Release
Enable, COT Enable or PVG control from one location. ISO 13849-1:2006 Category 1, 2 Pl c.
 SF5: Prevention of unexpected motion on hydraulic start-up in any mode: At start-up of the machine,
a Console on Turntable (COT) Enable function shall ensure that no hydraulic pressure is available
until a separate enable action by the operator occurs from any location. ISO 13849-1:2006 Category
2, 3 Pl d.
 SF6: Prevention of unexpected motion of PVG while in Joystick or Pendant mode during operation:
Once the COT is enabled it is possible that PVG failure can cause unexpected operation. When both
joysticks are released the PVG bank solenoids should be closed. Motion pressure should be used as
feedback to check this. It is important to understand that once a requested motion is in progress due
to one joystick, this safety function cannot monitor the other joysticks PVG induced motion due to
pressure feedback already being on. The prevention of unexpected motion therefore consists of two
parts, prevention of motion start while no joystick triggers or pendant enable is active and safe stop
when all joystick triggers or pendant enable is released. ISO 13849-1:2006 Category 2, 3 Pl d.
 SF7: Unexpected energization of PVG while in Joystick or Pendant mode due to joystick or pendant
bump: Once the COT is enabled it is possible that a joystick or pendant bump can cause unexpected
motion. The energization function shall ensure that no PVG power is available to that part of the
PVG bank associated with the bumped motion until a separate enable action by the operator occurs
from the joystick trigger or the pendant enable. This safety function ensures a bumped joystick will
not cause unexpected motion even if the other joystick is in use. It also ensures that the part of the
PVG bank not being used remains unpowered, the unpowered state having a higher MTTFd (Mean
time to failure dangerous). ISO 13849-1:2006 Category 2, 3 Pl d.

12R4751-MRM384
1. Limits of the enable safety system
The following figure illustrates the limits of the Enable safety system.
Refer to the MRM electrical schematics to identify and understand these components and signal paths in
detail.
COT means “Console on Turntable”, referring to functions above the turntable.

12R4751-MRM384
2. Operating limits, deviation effects and maintenance

Understanding the operating limits is a major part in preserving the integrity of the safety control system.
Deviation can result in systematic or common cause failure.
Three major areas are considered, environmental, hydraulic specific and electrical specific.
2.1. Environmental limits and effects
Dust and fluid ingress to electrical components can lead to corrosion and failure. In a well-designed safety
control system many faults will be detected, and the system made safe automatically. The first result of
ingress is the inconvenience of unreliability and unavailability. However the MTTFd for the safety system is
also degraded as a result of ingress and the performance level is lowered since not all faults can be
detected.
The JB2 enclosure is designed for an ingress rating of IP65, i.e. exclusion of dust and powerful jetting of
water. The sealing is tested at commissioning. This sealing should be checked by regular inspection.
The Liner Release Enable solenoid and COT Enable solenoid Hirschmann connectors should be inspected
for ingress.
The Enable push buttons, Mode Control switch and Pendant should be checked for ingress.
Failure rates increase with an increase in temperature. The temperature limits of use are a maximum of
50degC inside the JB2 enclosure. Any further heat loads added inside JB2 can cause a higher temperature
rise. The design assumes a maximum ambient of 45degC and an internal 5degC heat rise.
The non-condensing maximum humidity is 90%. The result of excessive condensing humidity over long
periods is fungal growth and corrosion.
Shock and vibration can result in wiring faults caused by disconnection. Cross signal shorting can result, as
well as to 24V and ground. All single faults will be detected in a PL’d’ safety control system. However some
double faults will not be detected and could lead to dangerous failure of the safety control system. Regular
service checks should ensure that terminals are tight, i.e. torqued correctly, and wires and looms are secure.
The contact blocks of the Mode Control switch and the console mounted and joystick mounted pushbutton
can become detached due to shock.
The relays in JB2 should be inspected for placement. The arc suppressors and the relays could become
dislodged or unclipped and cause intermittent contact due to shock.
2.2. Hydraulic limits and effects

Maintainers should recognize common cause failure due to lack of hydraulic maintenance.
The greatest risk to the valves is damage the spool lands due to contamination. Contamination can result in
silting or erosion. The hydraulic maintenance procedures and service should be adhered to with respect to
filters and their replacement interval, oil type and viscosity, and oil replacement interval. The vent filter should
be maintained to prevent external contamination. The hydraulic oil level and temperature should be
maintained within operating limits.
Leakage can also increase due to over pressure in the system. The hydraulic settings for over pressure and
relief should not be changed from the documented values. Refer to the hydraulic drawings for these settings.

12R4751-MRM384
The COT Enable and Liner Release Enable solenoid valves should not be replaced with alternative parts
without appropriate part qualification. The solenoids are specifically chosen for use in a safety application.
The solenoid Hirschmann connector with its integrated freewheeling diode suppressor should always be
used to ensure that the Safety relay switching outputs are not prematurely degraded due to sparking erosion
of the relay contacts as the contact opens.
Do not swap or replace different PVG electronic elements except with the correct version. In the COT PVG
bank there are two different types of PVG electronic elements. The major motions use PVEH elements with
active fault monitoring. Major machine motions are Inner beam (on telescoping beam machines), boom slew,
and boom raise/lower. The others are PVEM without fault monitoring. The higher cost active fault monitoring
elements are used for major motion to reduce residual risk of unexpected motion. When a spool position fault
is detected the spool is shut. With passive fault monitoring the spool is not shut and the PVG can continue to
be used. When an active fault the PVEH goes into fault mode and a re-power will reset the fault. (Refer
Section 4 for LED behavior)
2.3. Electrical limits and effects
Over-voltage and under-voltage can produce unpredictable actions, or cause damage. Normally the safety
control system will fail to a safe state. Extreme overvoltage, i.e. above 30Vdc, could cause damage. Refer to
the ABB error code table (part of electrical drawings) for the appropriate action to clear the fault in the Enable
Safety relay.
Changing the MRM DC power supply from the part specified could result in higher overvoltage under some
power supply failure modes, with resulting unexpected behavior. The maintainer should recognize that this is
an example of a typical common cause that could take out both channels in the Enable Safety relay in an
unsafe way (and both radio receiver channels of a radio pair if used).
Overcurrent in the Enable Safety relay output contacts can cause welding closed, an unsafe condition. The
miniature circuit breakers used to protect these circuits should not be changed to another size or curve type
(the Z curve used is specifically for this purpose, and is not to be replaced with B, C, D or K).
Freewheeling diode suppressors on relays should not be removed. This could cause subsequent overvoltage
damage to the driver circuits.
Solenoids use Hirschmann connectors with built in surge suppression diodes to handle solenoid flyback
voltages (a high voltage that occurs when the solenoid is switched off). This protection is essential.
To maintain the MTTFd of the safety control system, certain assumptions have been made for the number of
cycles before the Enable Safety relay, Selector Switch module and joysticks need replacing. This information
is part or RME’s ASP (Asset Service Platform) database. This replacement interval should be observed.
In the case of programmed parts like the Enable Safety relay, shelf life should be observed, since memory
can degrade. This information is part of RME’s ASP (Asset Service Platform) database. This shelf live should
be observed.
In designing the safety system various fault exclusions are made. In this design fault exclusions have been
made for shorts between wires in enclosures and connectors, by ensuring creepage and clearance distances
are maintained. Electrical wiring in cabinets and connectors must be maintained securely. If rewiring or fault
finding ensure terminals are tight and wiring is replaced correctly in ducts. When re-ferruling ensure strands
of wire are not left out of the crimp.

12R4751-MRM384
3. Start-up checks to help ensure the integrity of the safety system

The following basic checks should be performed prior to a reline.
 The electrical enclosures and pendants should be checked for ingress.
 The pushbuttons should be checked for ingress damage.
 The wiring terminals should be checked for tightness
 The pushbuttons contacts should be checked for secure attachment.
 The Enable Safety relay should be checked for fault codes.

The following basic checks shall be performed per shift.
 In Console mode, with the main Liner Release valve held open by moving the hydraulic lever, the release
pins should not drift open.
 Still in Console mode, with the Liner Release Enable solenoid valve open by pressing the console enable
push button, the release pins should not drift open.
 The Motion Waring lights turn on with motion.
4. Specific part instructions

4.1 ID tag
Incorrect part replacement or wiring will normally be detected due to the extensive fault detection in the
Enable Safety relay. This part must have the appropriate software installed, to perform that purpose.
To ensure correct Enable Safety relay replacement the installed software must agree with the ID tag located
in JB2. The identifier is a separate component connected to the ID terminal (by black lead) and 0V terminal
(by blue lead) of the Enable Safety relay. The circuit contains a unique ID number that is read by the relay on
start-up. The function gives protection against a relay being exchanged with an incorrectly programmed part
by mistake. The identifier circuit should always be securely located in the nearby duct.
ID code 10118021 is used for this Enable Safety relay, encompassing:
 COT Enable solenoid with pressure switch
 Liner Release Enable solenoid with proximity feedback
 Console COT Enable pushbutton
 Console Liner Release Enable pushbutton
 Console Cover safety proximity
 Joysticks
 Joystick Liner Release Enable pushbutton
 Turntable pendant

12R4751-MRM384
4.2 Enable Safety relay terminals
External wiring to the Enable Safety relay is connected via replaceable screw terminals. Ensure the wires are
fully inserted since the terminal tunnels are deep.
To make it easy and to avoid incorrect connection when the relay is exchanged, the connector blocks are
detachable so that individual wires do not have to be disconnected. If corrosion is present the terminals
should also be replaced.
The power shall be off during connection and disconnection.
Important: Do not twist the terminal blocks over when levering the block out,
lever them upwards gently while pressing them inwards towards the LED’s with
the other hand.
Important: When inserting the block it cannot be properly inserted unless the
key on the back of the block slides into the frame. Ensure this by sliding the
block in from the top of the frame. It is not properly inserted if there is a small
(>0.5mm) gap between the block and the frame.
4.3 Select switch module Type1
The Select Switch module integrates many mechanically linked safety relays. The module eliminates much
wiring by using the circuit board. It includes the mode change over select switch relays with their feedback,
the Liner Release Permission relay with its feedback and the multiplying
relays that take the small motion signals from the joysticks and switch
the heavier PVG power current. Also included are the vital PVG Power
safety relays that are part of SF6 and SF7 and their feedback. All
motion signals are diode ORed on this module, as Group 1 and Group 2
& 3 before being sent to the Enable Safety relay. Group 2 &3 are joined
externally. LED’s in the module can be used for diagnosis.
External wiring to the Enable Safety relay is also connected via removable
screw terminal blocks to avoid incorrect connection when the module is
exchanged. If corrosion is present the terminal blocks should also be
replaced. The power shall be off during connection and disconnection.
Important: Do not twist the terminal blocks over when levering, lever them
upwards gently, using leverage against the cover, while pressing them
inwards towards the cover center with the other hand.
Keys are used to ensure correct location otherwise the safety function will
be compromised even though it may still work. Be aware that it is possible
to force the blocks into the incorrect location.

12R4751-MRM384
When fault finding it is useful to observe the status of the relays on the Select Switch module using the
LED’s. Use the above template to identify the relays and the following table for the relay functions. The
template also identifies the Key locations if any become dislodged.

12R4751-MRM384
K1 Joystick Select relay When the console Mode switch is in Joystick position this relay is on. It
prohibits K17, K18, K19 and K20 (the pendant switch relays) from turning on.
When K1 is on K13, K14, K15 and K16 (the joystick switch relays) are also
on.
K2 Liner Release Permission This relay turns on whenever the Liner Release Enable solenoid is turned on
relay by the Enable Safety relay.
K3 Radio SAF2 relay Radio SAF2 signal. When using radio the relay is used for isolation.
K4 Left Joystick X-Axis motion When this axis is moved the relay turns on to switch power to the path
relay through K13 and K21.
K5 Left Joystick Y-Axis motion When this axis is moved the relay turns on to switch power to the path
K6 Left Joystick Right Hand When this axis is moved the relay turns on to switch power to the path
Rocker motion relay through K13 and K21.
K7 Right Joystick X-Axis motion When this axis is moved the relay turns on to switch power to the path
K8 Right Joystick Y-Axis motion When this axis is moved the relay turns on to switch power to the path
K9 Right Joystick Left Hand When this axis is moved the relay turns on to switch power to the path
K10 Right Joystick Right Hand When this axis is moved the relay turns on to switch power to the path
K11 Left Joystick lower When this axis is moved the relay turns on to switch power to the path
pushbutton through K15 and K22.
K12 Left Joystick upper When this button is pressed the relay turns on to switch power to the path
pushbutton through K16 and K2.
K13 to Joystick Select Switch relays When the console Mode switch is in Joystick position these relay are on and
K16 K17, K18, K19 and K20 (the pendant switch relays) will be off.
K17 to Pendant Select Switch relays When the console Mode switch is in Pendant position these relay are on and
K20 K13, K14, K15 and K16 (the joystick switch relays) should be off. If both
Mode switch contacts are closed due to a fault K13 to K16 (Joystick
selection) take precedent.
K21 PVG Group 1 Power relay This relay is turned on by the Enable Safety relay whenever PVG group 1
power is required. Group 1 is defined as those motions that can be caused
by the left joystick (and the pendant equivalent motions)
K22 PVG Group 2&3 Power These relays are turned on by the Enable Safety relay whenever PVG group
K23 relays 2 or 3 power is required. Group 2 is defined as those motions that can be
caused by the right joystick (and the pendant equivalent motions) and Group
3 are those motions caused by the mini-joystick (as used on an 8-axis
machine).

12R4751-MRM384
4.4 PVG indications

The PVEM electronic module used for minor motions have no fault monitoring. PVEH electronic modules
with active fault monitoring are used by major motions. Major motions are boom raise/lower, boom slew,
boom extend/retract and inner beam extend/retract. The PVEH module has an indicating LED. View this LED
by looking between the hosing on the vertical face of the PVEH above the connector. The table below
provides the interpretation of the LED light behavior. The PVEH must be powered i.e. in operation, to
observe the fault indication.
4.5 Console cover proximity (Safety dual output)

The Console Cover safety proximity has detection distance requirement and LED indications. For mild steel,
the enable zone is 1 to 5mm. Keep out of the close zone or one output (A2) will be switched off (this only
applies for mild steel).
The proximity sensor generates test pulses to self-test if the outputs have faults or shorts.
There is one LED indication (viewed from both sides of the sensor):
 When the LED is yellow it is indicating signal status.
 When the LED is green it is indicating power status.
4.6 Enable safety relay pulse outputs
A pulse and B pulse refer to two outputs on the Enable Safety relay. They are used to allow the detection of
short circuits when fed through input contacts and so aid in fault detection. If the wrong pulse appears on a
circuit (in time) there must be a short circuit between channels.
A pulse and B pulse are used on the left and right joystick triggers. It means that short circuit between these
triggers or to +24V can be detected easily since the correct pulses will no longer arrive. Putting a millimeter
on a pulse signal will only show a voltage of about 12V due to the low duty cycle.
The right illustration also shows another use for A Pulse. To save I/O terminals on the Enable Safety relay,
IQ24 and IQ26 are used as both an input and an output. While A pulse is on the safety relay reads the status
of the pushbutton. When A pulse is off the safety relay outputs the status of the lamp. It also means the lamp
will be on (powered by A pulse duty cycle) whenever the button is pressed, so serving as a lamp test.

12R4751-MRM384

12R4751-MRM384
Appendix C: Engineering Drawings

The following engineering drawings and schematics are provided to assist with maintenance, servicing and
the ordering of spare parts.

12R4751-MRM384

12R4751-MRM384
CLIENT DOCUMENT REVIEW
~ CERTIFIED ~
Please review and return with the following Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd
information completed and return within 10 Brent Stevenson 19/12/2016
working days;
1. Approved for Manufacture
2. Revise and resubmit as indicated. LINER PICKUP GRAPPLE BOOM FRONT REAR
Work may proceed subject to PINS SLEW CL SLEW CL TIEDOWN CL TIEDOWN CL
incorporation of changes requested.
3. Revise and resubmit as indicated.

Work may not proceed.
Name:_________
Signed:_________Date:_____
700 3300
840 5036 5260 4818 B0 4800 500
21253 B0
FULLY EXTENDED
NOTE: ITEMS MARKED ** ARE DESIGN CRITICAL LINER PICKUP GRAPPLE BOOM FRONT REAR
AND MUST BE VERIFIED BY CUSTOMER PINS SLEW CL SLEW CL TIEDOWN CL TIEDOWN CL
MACHINE MASS 10% 28500 kg
LIFTING CAPACITY 2500 kg
GRAPPLE SLEW ±75 deg
GRAPPLE ROLL ±40 deg
LINER LIFT +25 to -125 deg
BOOM RAISE/LOWER +39 to -33 deg
BOOM SLEW 360 CONTINUOUS deg
BOOM EXTEND 3000 mm
B0
INNER BEAM EXTEND 4365 mm
840 2036 895 1418 4800 3900
OUTER BEAM EXTEND 3400 mm
LINER CART CAPACITY 2500 kg
13888 B0
DRIVE STYLE 2 WHEEL DRIVE
STEER STYLE 4 WHEEL STEER FULLY RETRACTED
SITE ALTITUDE **3500 m
SITE FREQUENCY **60 Hz DO NOT SCALE
3 PHASE MOTOR VOLTAGE **460 Volts IF IN DOUBT - ASK
This drawing remains the property of
REV Description DWN CHK APD DATE SOUTHERN PERU COPPER CORPORATION 3rd ANGLE PROJECTION U.N.O.
RUSSELL MINERAL EQUIPMENT
PTY LTD and must not be SCALE 1:100 UNO
A4
P0 PRELIMINARY DRAWING - - - -
A0 ISSUED FOR CLIENT APPROVAL BMS AM LO 10/11/16
manufactured from, copied, or
transmitted to a third party without TOQUEPALA Equip #: 293200-LH-001
prior written approval from RUSSELL
B0 UPDATED DIMENSIONS & ADDED EQUIPMENT No. AM SP LO 07/12/16 MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- -
Copyright Russell Mineral Equipment RUSSELL 7 MILL RELINING MACHINE
- -
Pty Ltd
TEMPLATE REVISION B0 ELEVATION - WORKING RANGE DIMENSIONS TQAMRM384-VDD01 B0
Please review and return with the following
information completed and return within 10
working days;

Work may proceed subject to
incorporation of changes requested.

Name:_________ 1748 MILL CLEAR ENTRY 1748 MILL CLEAR ENTRY
Signed:_________Date:_____ 1631 MACHINE
DESIGN WINDOW
LINER ENTRY AREA
MILL CENTRELINE HEIGHT

MILL CENTRELINE HEIGHT
LINER CART HEIGHT

2014
1930
1930
C0 C0 C0
FLOOR
75
1278 REAR
1961 FRONT WHEEL CTRS TIEDOWN CTRS
1486 REAR
2261 OS FRONT WHEELS WHEEL CTRS
2880 TIEDOWN CLEARANCE 1786 OS REAR WHEEL
3300 FRONT TIEDOWN CTRS
FRONT ELEVATION REAR ELEVATION

MACHINE ENTRY LINER ENTRY
DO NOT SCALE
IF IN DOUBT - ASK
REV Description DWN CHK APD DATE SOUTHERN PERU COPPER CORPORATION
3rd ANGLE PROJECTION U.N.O.
A4
B0 UPDATED DIMS, ADDED EQUIP No. & VERIFIED MILL DIMS AM SP LO 15/12/16 MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
C0 UPDATED DIMENSIONS AM BDS BMS 16/01/17
- -
Pty Ltd
TEMPLATE REVISION B0 END VIEWS - MILL ENTRY DETAILS TQAMRM384-VDD02 C0
4365 5713 B0 ~ CERTIFIED ~
R2875 Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd
Brent Stevenson 19/12/2016
R5875
2261 OS FRONT WHEELS B0
3300
7600 - MILL DIAMETER I/S SHELL
R2 FRONT TIEDOWN CTRS

R4 1278
REAR TIEDOWN CTRS
1786 OS REAR WHEELS B0
R4y
R4x R4z
R3y
R3 R4 R3x R3z
24'-11"
R1
R2y
R3
670 ±50 R2x R2z
R1y
41'-7" 4800
12685 MILL LENGTH R2 R1x R1z
(12840 CENTRE TO CENTRE OF END PLATES) 1620 ±25
PLAN VIEW R1
ARCS SHOW MACHINE LIMITS
Machine Loads (kN) 10% B0

Operating Load Cases R1 Left Front Tiedown R2 Right Front Tiedown R3 Left Rear Tiedown R4 Right Rear Tiedown
Dynamic Factors Applied R1x R1y R1z R2x R2y R2z R3x R3y R3z R4x R4y R4z REACTION LOADS ARE CALCULATED WITH
Boom Left 0 -402 0 0 -194 0 76 131 0 -76 131 0 BEAMS AND BOOM AT MAXIMUM
EXTENSION IN MILL WITH NOMINATED
Please review and return with the following Boom Right 0 -194 0 0 -402 0 76 131 0 -76 131 0 MAXIMUM MASS IN THE GRAPPLE AND A
information completed and return within 10 Boom Forward 0 -334 0 0 -334 0 96 167 0 -96 167 0 LOADED LINER CART ON THE END OF THE
working days;
Discharge Reach - Boom Left 0 -408 0 0 -211 0 82 143 0 -82 143 0 BEAM.
A DYNAMIC FACTOR OF 1.34 IS APPLIED TO
Discharge Reach - Boom Right 0 -211 0 0 -408 0 82 143 0 -82 143 0
THE MOVING LOAD.
incorporation of changes requested. Jammed Load Cases NO OTHER SAFETY FACTOR HAS BEEN
No Dynamic Factors Applied APPLIED TO THE REACTIONS
Work may not proceed. Beam Jammed on Mill or Charge 0 -236 -69 0 -236 -69 59 102 0 -59 102 0
Name:_________ Boom Left pulling liner off wall -177 -324 0 0 -134 0 120 208 0 0 0 0 DO NOT SCALE
Signed:_________Date:_____ Boom Right pulling liner off wall 0 -134 0 177 -324 0 0 0 0 -120 208 0 IF IN DOUBT - ASK
A4
B0 UPDATED DIMS & MACHINE LOADS, VERIFIED MILL DIMS AM SP LO 07/12/16 MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- -
- -
Pty Ltd
TEMPLATE REVISION B0 PLAN - WORKING REACTION LOADS TQAMRM384-VDD03 B0
CLIENT DOCUMENT REVIEW 2185 TO COG SPREADER BAR REQUIRED
Please review and return with the following APPROX 1500 WIDE
information completed and return within 10 MACHINE COG
working days;
APPROX LIFTING MASS 28500kg

incorporation of changes requested. 60°
Name:_________
Signed:_________Date:_____
3728
C0
3584 700 3300 4700
12284
TRANSPORT AND LIFTING - BOOM REAR
WHEEL REACTIONS DRIVING INTO MILL
BOOM FORWARD AND FULLY RETRACTED R7260 EXTREMITY NOM
(REFER TO DIAGRAM ON VDD01) RNING REAR R7400.5
ONT TU TURN
NOM FR ING E
LOAD 10% CONTACT AREA XTREM
R2848 NOM ITY
(kN) (mm) R1 R3
R1 95 300 x 194 R2956 NOM
R2 95 300 x 194
3700 OA WIDTH
R3 45 300 x 136
R4 45 300 x 136
TRANSPORT WHEEL REACTIONS
BOOM REARWARD
(REFER TO DIAGRAM ON THIS DRAWING)
LOAD 10% CONTACT AREA
(kN) (mm)
R1 81 300 x 184
R2 R4
R2 81 300 x 184
APPROX TURNING CIRCLES - BOOM REAR
R3 59 300 x 149 DO NOT SCALE
R4 59 300 x 149 IF IN DOUBT - ASK
A4
B0 UPDATED DIMS & WHEEL REACTIONS, ADDED EQUIP No. AM SP LO 07/12/16 MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
C0 UPDATED DIMENSION AM BDS BMS 16/01/17
- -
Pty Ltd
TEMPLATE REVISION B0 MANOEUVRING AND FLOOR LOADING TQAMRM384-VDD04 C0
TIEDOWN ANCHOR PLATES INSTALLED BY CUSTOMER.
1620 ±25 4800 ±5 PLANT FLOORING MUST BE DESIGNED FOR
MAXIMUM FORCES SHOWN ON VDD 03.
FRONT TIEDOWN REAR TIEDOWN TIEDOWN ANCHOR PLATES WILL BE PAINTED TO
PIN CL LUG CL RME'S STANDARD 3 COAT SYSTEM.
670 ±50 3300 ±5

~ CERTIFIED ~
FRONT Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd
TIEDOWN CTRS Brent Stevenson 19/12/2016
6x 36
FIX WITH
1278 ±5 M30 Gr8.8 BOLTS
REAR TIEDOWN CTRS BOLTS NOT SUPPLIED
2270
50 150 150 50 BY RME
A RAIL CTRS
45
30
REAR TIEDOWN
A PIN CL
500 RECESS
590 STEP
300
200
30 75
TIEDOWN LAYOUT
45 REAR TIEDOWN
PIN CL
PIN REMOVED THIS SIDE
150 4 x 26 HOLES
65 FIX WITH M24 Gr 8.8 BOLTS
PIN CL 65
BOLTS NOT SUPPLIED BY RME STEP FOR COVER PLATE
(COVER SUPPLIED BY RME) 75 DESIGN
60
460 RECESS PIN DEPTH

210
16 STEP
420
300
MRM FRONT
FRONT TIEDOWN TIEDOWN CL REAR TIEDOWN
ANCHOR PLATE ANCHOR PLATE
SCALE 1:20 1x LH - AS SHOWN +15
1x LH - AS SHOWN 300 1x RH - OPP HAND 200 0
1x RH - OPP HAND SUPPLIED BY RME REAR TIEDOWN
SUPPLIED BY RME JACK PLATE PIN SUPPLIED BY RME TO SUIT MOUNT
25 ALLOWANCE SECTION A-A
268
SHIM TO ACHIEVE SCALE 1 : 20

182
207 DESIGN HEIGHT AT PIN

DESIGN PIN (SUPPLIED BY RME)
FLOOR DO NOT SCALE
HEIGHT IF IN DOUBT - ASK
A4
B0 ADDED EQUIPMENT No. & VERIFIED DIMESIONS AM BAS LO 15/12/16 MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- -
- -
Pty Ltd
TEMPLATE REVISION B0 FLOOR INTERFACE DETAILS TQAMRM384-VDD05 B0
GRAPPLE TOOL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS
1008 OPEN
B0 900 CLOSED
202
PIN CL
300
289
SHORT FOOT (PREFERRED)
190
240 ENSURE LUGS ARE ORIENTATED

PARALLEL TO THE LINER CENTRE PLANE
FOR LINER SECURITY DURING PLACMENT, WHERE POSSIBLE ENSURE AT LEAST TWO
BOLT HOLES ARE FREE FOR BOLT INSERTION WHEN GRAPPLE TOOL IS CLOSED
550 10
45 MIN TO SUIT 40 PIN
OUTSIDE OF LUGS
LONG FOOT
40 MIN
+38 kN
84 MAX
IN 18 kN.M
65 M
40 MIN
GRAPPLE TOOL CLOSED POSITION GRAPPLE TOOL OPEN POSITION
• 3D CAD MODELS OF THE GRAPPLE TOOL CAN BE PROVIDED BY RME 12 kN.M

UPON REQUEST FOR ACCURATE CHECKING OF THE LINER INTERFACE 38 kN
• RME PROVIDES A LINER INTERFACE CHECK AND REQUEST 3D LINER

MODELS BE SUPPLIED LIFTING LUG LOAD DIAGRAM
DO NOT SCALE
IF IN DOUBT - ASK
No. Description DWN CHK APD DATE 3rd ANGLE PROJECTION U.N.O.
-
RUSSELL MINERAL EQUIPMENT STANDARD 1500kg/2000kg/2500kg SCALE 1:20 UNO
A4
P0 PRELIMINARY DRAWING - - - PTY LTD and must not be
A0 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION AM DH LO 27/09/11 manufactured from, copied, or
transmitted to a third party without
2 PIN GRAPPLE TOOL
B0 GRT UPGRADED AM BAS BMS 24/02/14 prior written approval from RUSSELL
RME Drawing Number REV
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD
- - Copyright Russell Mineral Equipment
- -
Pty Ltd 2010
GRAPPLE TOOL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS GRT-2500-2-VDD01 B0
CoG OFFSET
CoG SHOULD BE
ON OR BELOW
LUG CENTRELINE.
LINER CoG RELATIVE TO

GRAPPLE PIN CENTRE
LINER CENTRE OF GRAVITY CALCULATION
• THE LINER CoG OFFSET IS THE HORIZONTAL DISTANCE FROM THE LUG HOLE CENTRE TO THE
CoG OF THE LINER WHEN HELD IN THE VERTICAL POSITION AS SHOWN.
• LINERS THAT WEIGH LESS THAN THE CAPACITY OF THE GRAPPLE MAY HAVE THE CoG FURTHER
FROM THE CENTRE OF THE LUG. FOR EXAMPLE: USING A 2500kg GRAPPLE, A 2000kg LINER MAY
HAVE THE CoG 250mm AWAY FROM THE CENTRE OF THE LUG.
• RME PROVIDES A LINER INTERFACE CHECK AND REQUEST 3D LINER MODELS BE SUPPLIED.
DO NOT SCALE
IF IN DOUBT - ASK
-
A4
2 PIN GRAPPLE TOOL
B0 UPDATED DRAWING AM DH LO 07/07/15 prior written approval from RUSSELL
- - - Copyright Russell Mineral Equipment
- - -
Pty Ltd 2010
GRAPPLE RAISE CAPACITY GRT-2500-2-VDD02 B0
LUG CENTRE PLANE
CoG OFFSET
LINER CoG RELATIVE TO

LUG CENTRE PLANE
CoG OF 2500kg LINER MUST BE HORIZONTALLY WITHIN

300mm OF LUG CENTRE PLANE.
LINER CENTRE OF GRAVITY CALCULATION
• THE LINER CoG OFFSET IS THE HORIZONTAL DISTANCE FROM THE LUG CENTRE PLANE TO THE
CoG OF THE LINER
• LINERS THAT WEIGH LESS THAN THE CAPACITY OF THE GRAPPLE MAY HAVE THE CoG FURTHER
FROM THE LUG CENTRE PLAN. FOR EXAMPLE: USING A 2500kg GRAPPLE, A 2000kg LINER MAY
HAVE THE CoG 425mm AWAY FROM THE LUG CENTRE PLANE.
• RME PROVIDES A LINER INTERFACE CHECK AND REQUEST 3D LINER MODELS BE SUPPLIED
DO NOT SCALE
IF IN DOUBT - ASK
-
RUSSELL MINERAL EQUIPMENT STANDARD 1500kg/2000k/2500kg SCALE 1:20 UNO
A4
2 PIN GRAPPLE TOOL
B0 UPDATED DRAWING AM DH LO 07/07/15 prior written approval from RUSSELL
- - -
Pty Ltd 2010
GRAPPLE ROLL CAPACITY GRT-2500-2-VDD03 B0
500
55
200
RECOMMENDED LINER INTERFACE HOLES

ALTERNATE LIFTING METHOD FOR
PULP LIFTER LINERS
• FOR LINERS THAT DO NOT ALLOW DIRECT GRAPPLE TOOL INTERFACE WITH LINER
LUGS, 2 x Ø55mm HOLES CAN BE CAST THROUGH TO ALLOW A PULP LIFTER
ADAPTOR TO ENGAGE THE LINER.
• LINER CoG MUST NOT FALL OUTSIDE THE GRAPPLE LIFTING CAPACITY CURVES
(REFER TO FIGURES ON VDD02 & VDD03).
• RME PROVIDES A LINER INTERFACE CHECK AND REQUEST 3D LINER MODELS BE

SUPPLIED.
EXAMPLE PULP LIFTER ADAPTOR TOOL

Approx. 85kg DO NOT SCALE
IF IN DOUBT - ASK
-
A4
2 PIN GRAPPLE TOOL
B0 GRT DRAWING UPDATED AM DH LO 07/07/15 prior written approval from RUSSELL
- - -
Pty Ltd 2010
GRAPPLE TOOL PULP LIFTER ADAPTER GRT-2500-2-VDD04 B0
ITEM PART No. QTY TITLE M(kg)ea ITEM QTY
No. PART No. TITLE M(kg)ea
No.
1 12R4798 1 BASEFRAME ARRANGEMENT 3483.7 26 12R4812 1 PACKING GROUP 1175.5
2 12R4118 1 BASEDRIVE GROUP 852.1 27 12R4816 1 PACKING GROUP 614.7
3 11R0219 1 BASEDRIVE GROUP 901.6 28 12R4187 1 PACKING GROUP 812.4
4 12R4823 1 POWERPACK ARRANGEMENT 979.1 29 12R4819 1 LINER INTERFACE GROUP 22.4
5 12R4834 1 ENCLOSURE ARRANGEMENT 69.6 31 12R4839 1 RADIO CONTROL GROUP 13.6
6 12R4828 1 TANK ARRANGEMENT 248.5 32 12R3364 1 REMOTE TRANSPORT CONTROL GROUP 38.1
7 12R4806 1 OUTER BEAM ARRANGEMENT 7649.1 33 12R4840 1 CABLE REELER GROUP 114.9
8 12R4804 1 INNER BEAM ARRANGEMENT 5521.8 34 23R1477 1 LABEL 3.0
9 12R4770 1 LINERCART ARRANGEMENT 972.6 35 10135832 1 LABEL -
10 10R9837 1 LINERCART DRIVE GROUP 57.8 36 10124715 2 LABEL -
11 12R1651 1 TURNTABLE ARRANGEMENT 1054.6 37 01B2268 1 SCREW -
12 12R2363 1 ROTARY UNION GROUP 67.5 38 12R5098 1 JOYSTICK ARRANGEMENT 28.3
13 12R4799 1 BOOM ARRANGEMENT 2792.8 39 12R5456 1 PROXIMITY GROUP 1.2
15 12R4818 1 GRAPPLE ARRANGEMENT 1403.0
16 12R2614 1 GRAPPLE TOOL GROUP 177.7 34 37 36 4 32 8 7 9 10
17 12R4766 1 ADAPTER GROUP 29.8
18 12R4764 1 ENCLOSURE ARRANGEMENT 78.5
19 12R4824 1 CONSOLE ARRANGEMENT 127.7
20 12R4809 1 SEAT ARRANGEMENT 65.5
21 12R1667 1 DUAL SEATING GROUP 18.9
22 12R4825 1 CABINET ARRANGEMENT 82.3
23 12R4810 1 PLATFORM GROUP 600.2
24 12R4811 1 PLATFORM GROUP 584.7
25 10106188 7 LIGHT GROUP 4.1
19 38 20 13 17 18 11 22 24
27
33
31 2 28 1 23 6 36 5 35
29 16 15 25 39 21 8 12 26
EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW
- - - - - - - - SCALE 1:60 UNO 3rd ANGLE PROJECTION U.N.O. A3
- - - - MASS: 30671.4kg RUSSELL 7 MILL RELINING DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN JLP 26/09/2016
- - - - MACHINE RELEASED
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK DRAWN JLP 05/12/16 TQAMRM384 RUSSELL 7 2500kg RT4x2
RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- - - - This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
28524
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK BAS 05/12/16
B0
B0 ITEM 30 REPLACED BY ITEM 38, ITEM 14 REPLACED BY ITEM 39 WS SP BDS 22/02/17 2 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
- A0 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION AS PER APPROVAL without prior written approval from RUSSELL MINERAL
APP'D LO 6/12/2016 SHEET 1 of 2 12R4751 VER
CODE
EQUIPMENT PTY LTD Copyright Russell Mineral

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

ECN/RT REV DESCRIPTION DWN CHK APPD DATE TEMPLATE REVISION C0 SEALING, BONDING AND LUBRICATION DESIGNATION - 30
35
50
50
20
20
146
6
12
LOCATE SYMMETRIC
106 ABOUT THE CL
36 34
512
CROPPED RIGHT SIDE VIEW

CROPPED LEFT SIDE VIEW
LABEL ITEMS
- - - - - - - - SCALE 1:7.5 UNO 3rd ANGLE PROJECTION U.N.O. A3
- - - - MASS: 30671.4kg RUSSELL 7 MILL RELINING DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN JLP 26/09/2016
- - - - MACHINE RELEASED
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK DRAWN JLP 05/12/16 TQAMRM384 RUSSELL 7 2500kg RT4x2
28524
B0
B0 ITEM 30 REPLACED BY ITEM 38, ITEM 14 REPLACED BY ITEM 39 WS SP BDS 22/02/17 2 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

ITEM No. PART No. QTY TITLE M(kg)ea
1 12R4797 1 BASEFRAME GROUP 3514.4
2 30R0430 1 LABEL 3.0
3 31R6279 4 SCREW -
4 10128406 1 LABEL - 155 830
5 10128404 1 LABEL -
6 10128408 1 LABEL - 5 6
7 10103617 1 LABEL -
8 10135824 4 LABEL -
9 12R2881 1 CABLE GROUP 8.4
10 12R2986 1 CABLE GROUP 1.9
100
6
5
REAR VIEW
670
120
10
2 9
85
4 2
3 8
7
EXPLODED
ISOMETRIC VIEW FRONT VIEW
SCALE 1:35

- - - - MASS: 3527.8kg BASEFRAME ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN NB 23/11/16
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 28/11/16 0823 PIN 4x2 ES/EN
- -
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK SP 28/11/16
A0
- - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

7 CENTRE LABEL ON BOX
10
10
8 8
20
TOP VIEW
CROPPED
40
SCALE 1:10
DETAIL A
SCALE 1 : 5 DETAIL B
SCALE 1 : 5
A B
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
LABEL ITEMS
- - - - MASS: 3527.8kg BASEFRAME ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 28/11/16 0823 PIN 4x2 ES/EN
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

ITEM No. PART No. QTY TITLE M(kg)ea ITEM No. PART No. QTY TITLE M(kg)ea
1 32R2142 1 BASEFRAME ASSEMBLY 2462.8 50 01b1045 8 WASHER -
2 32R2146 2 BRACKET ASSEMBLY 58.6 51 01B0304 8 BOLT 0.1
3 32R2141 2 ARM ASSEMBLY 173.0 52 01B2290 16 SCREW 0.7
4 31R3711 2 COVER 12.2 53 01B0306 2 BOLT 0.1
5 31R8776 2 COVER 0.3 54 01B2207 4 NUT 1.2
6 31R1212 2 BRACKET 0.4 55 01B2208 2 WASHER 0.1
7 30R6945 2 PIN 6.5 56 01b0051 10 BOLT -
8 31R0717 2 SHAFT 20.4 57 01b0165 10 WASHER -
9 31R9451 2 TIEDOWN ROD ASSEMBLY 37.5 58 01b0355 4 SCREW 0.1
10 31R8777 2 PIN 2.6 59 01B0595 4 WASHER -
11 01B1640 2 PIN - 60 01b0599 4 NUT 0.1
12 31R9244 2 SAFETY - 61 01B1847 4 BOLT 0.8
13 10R8385 2 BEARING GROUP 7.7 62 01B1878 4 SCREW -
14 31R1146 2 SHIM 0.1 63 01b1049 4 NUT -
15 31R1145 2 BEAM REACTION PAD 6.6 64 01B1796 4 SCREW -
16 31R1152 1 CLAMP 87.4 65 01b0621 8 BOLT 0.5
17 31R1151 1 CLAMP 87.4 66 01B0761 8 WASHER -
18 31R1150 4 RETAINER 0.5 67 01B0765 8 NUT 0.2
19 30R8580 4 BEAM WEAR PAD KEEPER 0.2 68 12R1283 1 TRANSDUCER GROUP 1.8
20 31R1149 2 PAD 0.9
21 30R9066 2 PAD 0.2
22 31R1165 2 SHIM 0.1
23 30R7912 2 BUMP STOP PIN 11.2
24 31R6106 2 BRACKET 7.1
25 30R8282 1 COVER 1.4
26 10R5649 1 CABLEVEYOR GROUP 24.5
27 31R2187 1 BRACKET 13.3
28 10R4378 1 MANIFOLD GROUP 18.8
31 03B0890 2 CYLINDER 28.4
32 03B1587 2 NIPPLE -
33 03B1518 2 ELBOW 0.1
34 03B2046 2 ELBOW 0.1
35 01B1500 2 SCREW 0.5
36 31R9564 2 SLEEVE 0.2
37 01b0350 16 SCREW -
38 01B0939 16 WASHER 0.1
39 01B2584 16 BOLT 0.7
40 01b1583 16 NUT 0.1
41 01b1797 32 WASHER -
42 01B2440 12 BOLT 0.4
43 01b0767 32 NUT 0.1
44 01B0305 4 BOLT 0.1
45 01B1560 2 SCREW -
46 01B0437 14 WASHER -
47 01b1748 4 BOLT 0.8
48 01b1047 2 WASHER -
49 01b1758 2 BOLT -
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 3514.4kg BASEFRAME GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 25/11/16 0823 PIN 4x2
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

43 41 52
TORQUE TO 914 N.m.
37
25
26 18
16 22
64 54 54 55
20
37
19
62 50 50 63 61 59 60
21
8 9 12
17
10 11
27 36 35
58 13 14 15
56 57
28 29
68
45 23 30 49 48 24
53 46
47 41 43 2
30 68
70
3
1 2
43 41 42 46 44
31
TORQUE TO 914 N.m.
34
33 32
56 57
40 38 39
51 46
TORQUE TO 1300 N.m.
67 66 65 7
TORQUE TO 640 N.m. 6
5
4
TOP VIEW
CROPPED
EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW SCALE 1:10
- - - - MASS: 3514.4kg BASEFRAME GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 25/11/16 0823 PIN 4x2
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 02B2715 28 LINK 15.6
2 02B2716 1 BRACKET 1.0
MOVING END IS ALWAYS THE

OUTER SIDE CHAIN LINK
2
ISOMETRIC VIEW
137 2548
56
FRONT VIEW
LEFT SIDE VIEW CHAIN PITCH = 91mm

- - - - MASS: 17.6kg CABLEVEYOR GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN BAH 18/01/11
- - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - DRAWN BAH 18/01/11
- - - This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK JMS 27/01/11 E4.56.13.200x28 KMA PIVOTING B0
RT 14533 B0 REPLACED 400 SERIES WITH E4. 400's IN MTR244 BAS MTM AJT 21/08/12 2 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
A0 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION AS PER APPROVAL without prior written approval from RUSSELL MINERAL
APP'D BAH 27/01/11 10R5649 VER
Code

Rev.
Equipment Pty Ltd 2011

ECN/RT REV Description DWN CHK APPD DATE TEMPLATE REVISION B0 SHEET 1 of 1 40
ITEM No. PART No. QTY. TITLE M(kg)ea
1 03B1112 1 MANIFOLD 18.0
2 03B1686 2 NIPPLE 0.1
3 03B1861 1 NIPPLE 0.1
4 03B1522 5 NIPPLE -
5 03B2039 4 NIPPLE 0.2
5 3
4 1 2

- - - - MASS: 18.8kg MANIFOLD GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN AJL 15/01/10
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
RT 19242 D0 REPLACE 4 OF IT 3 WITH IT 5, CORRECT IT 3 DESCRIPTION FROM ½ " TO ¾" MB MTM AJT 05/12/12 2 DRAWN AJL 15/01/10 BSF MRM BASEDRIVE
- C0 UPDATED TITLE, DESCRIPTION AND TEMPLATE; REMOVED MOUNTING BOLTS OF BAH 09/12/10 1 This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
- B0
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK DV 15/01/10
D0
REPLACED 4 OF 03B2039 WITH 03B1861 JMT DV AJL 16/03/10 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D AJL 18/01/10 SHEET 1 of 1 10R4378 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

ITEM NO. PART NO. QTY TITLE M(kg)ea
1 03B1486 1 FRONT JACK MANIFOLD 6.3
2 03B1522 6 NIPPLE -
2 1
2

- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN DS 22/09/09
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
RT 19026 D0 REMOVED ITEM 3 AND PARTS PAGE MDL SC AJT 13/12/12 1 DRAWN BAH 28/05/10
- C0 UPDATED ASSEMBLY TITLE AND DESCRIPTION GN OF BAH 09/12/10 1 This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK OF 28/05/10 BSF MRM JACKS D0
- B0 REMOVE ITEM 4 FROM ASSEMBLY BAH OF BAH 25/11/10 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D BMS 02/06/10 10R4383 VER
Code

Rev.

1 03B0204 1 MANIFOLD 1.1
2 03B0196 2 CARTRIDGE 0.2
3 03B1686 4 NIPPLE 0.1

- - - - - - - - MASS: 2.2kg DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN DS 16/10/09
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
MANIFOLD GROUP RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN BAH 28/05/10
- - - - - - - - This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK OF 28/05/10 BSF MRM BEAM
- B0 UPDATED ASSEMBLY TITLE, DESCRIPTION AND TEMPLATE GN OF BAH 9/12/10 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D BMS 02/06/10 10R4416 B0
Code

Rev.

ECN/RT REV Description DWN CHK APPD DATE TEMPLATE REVISION A0 SHEET 1 of 1
1 10102279 1 ENCLOSURE 0.9
2 07B0211 1 COUPLING -
3 03B0192 1 SUCTION TRANSDUCER 0.2
4 03B1576 1 CAP 0.3
5 03B1577 1 CAP 0.2
6 03B1762 1 NIPPLE -
7 03B2239 2 REDUCER 0.1
1 7
ISOMETRIC VIEW
7 3 6 2

- - - - MASS: 1.8kg TRANSDUCER GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN OF 18/02/14
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SP 07/04/14 SUCTION
-
A0
- - - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D OF 08/04/14 SHEET 1 of 1 12R1283 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10131473 1 CABLE 7.0
2 10105128 1 CONNECTOR 0.5
3 10104654 1 CONNECTOR 0.7
4 10117548 1 GLAND 0.2
5 10117956 1 COVER -
6 10131562 1 HEATSHRINK -
MARK CABLE WITH ITEM NUMBER ""

USING HEATSHRINK LABEL "08B1584"
COVER WITH CLEAR
HEATSHRINK "10131562"

- - - - MASS: 8.4kg CABLE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SDL 19/06/15
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SDL 19/06/15 TRU TO MCC 18 Core x 2.5mm² 7m
-
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK AM 24/06/2015
A0
APP'D DD 30/06/15 SHEET 1 of 2 12R2881 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

USE CABLE 10131473
1
3
PE
CABLE TERMINATION SCHEDULE 13

1
Pin No. of Female Cable Core No.
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11 2
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 NOT USED
19 NOT USED
20 NOT USED
21 NOT USED
22 NOT USED 24
23 NOT USED 12
24 NOT USED
PE green / yellow
TERMINATE GREEN / YELLOW EARTH CONDUCTOR,

AT PE TERMINAL.
10104654
CONTACT ARRANGEMENT
AS VIEWED FROM TERMINATION SIDE
BROKEN OUT SECTION

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SDL 19/06/15 TRU TO MCC 18 Core x 2.5mm² 7m
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10131474 1 CABLE 1.1
2 10117443 1 CONNECTOR 0.2
3 10117445 1 CONNECTOR 0.4
4 10127394 1 GLAND 0.1
6 10117989 1 COVER 0.1
MARK CABLE WITH ITEM NUMBER

"12R2986"
COVER WITH CLEAR HEATSHRINK
"10129039"

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SDL 19/06/15 JB4 TO MCC 7 Core 1.5mm2 TPE/TPE 300/500V
7m RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
-
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK SL 23/06/15
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 USE CABLE 10131474
2 3
CABLE TERMINATION SCHEDULE

Pin No. of Female Cable Core No. 4 6
1 1
2 2
3 3 PE
4 4
5 5
6 6
PE green / yellow
1 3
TERMINATE GREEN / YELLOW EARTH CONDUCTOR

AT PE TERMINAL
10117445
CONTACT ARRANGEMENT
BROKEN OUT SECTION

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SDL 19/06/15 JB4 TO MCC 7 Core 1.5mm2 TPE/TPE 300/500V
7m RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10R8609 1 CYLINDER GROUP 32.2
2 31R4672 2 WHEEL ASSEMBLY 195.7
3 32R1436 2 TIEROD 9.4
4 31R5015 2 PIN 4.5
5 31R5016 2 PIN 3.2
6 31R5014 2 RETAINER 0.6
7 31R5007 1 HUB 111.3
8 31R5006 1 HUB 111.3
9 30R3389 2 ADAPTOR 0.1
10 02B0243 2 PIN 0.4
11 02B0980 4 NIPPLE -
12 03B1531 2 ELBOW 0.1
13 03B1708 4 ELBOW -
14 03B1523 4 NIPPLE -
15 02B0185 3 BEARING -
16 06B6476 6 SEAL -
17 02B2787 8 BEARING -
18 06B6503 2 SEAL -
19 02B2798 2 BEARING 0.8
20 02B2053 2 GEARBOX 67.0
21 03b0035 2 MOTOR 12.5
22 03B1527 2 NIPPLE -
23 06B0060 2 SEAL -
24 01b1254 2 CIRCLIP -
25 01B0295 4 WASHER -
26 01B0174 4 BOLT -
27 01B1683 32 WASHER -
28 01B0092 8 SCREW -
29 01B0352 24 SCREW 0.1
30 01B2326 32 SCREW 0.1
31 01B1944 2 WASHER -
ISOMETRIC VIEW
NOTE: SEAL KIT SUPPLIED WITH HYDRAULIC MOTOR TO BE FITTED ON ASSEMBLY

- - - - MASS: 852.1kg BASEDRIVE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN NB 06/06/16 BSD DRIVEN 113kN Ø830
28333 B0
B0
REMOVED 1x ITEM 15: QTY NOW 3, WAS 4 NB SP BDS 28/11/16 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D SDL 11/07/16 SHEET 1 of 3 12R4118 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

26
25
23
18
19
2 2
17
11
13 1 7
13 16
30 27 14
12 14
29 31 9 22
24
16
20 21 28
8
17
16 15
5 10
3
25
26
EXPLODED PICTORIAL VIEW
NOTE: SEAL KIT SUPPLIED WITH HYDRAULIC MOTOR TO BE FITTED ON ASSEMBLY

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
28333 B0
B0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

7 10 3 15 10 8
15 3 SECTION C-C
26 25 19
4 STEERING LINK ASSEMBLY DETAILS
23
6 2
7 15 10
18
1
17
30
17
16 30
29
20
28
SECTION B-B
21 CYLINDER ASSEMBLY DETAILS
24
16
17 C C
17
B
25
26 5 16 8 A A
PLAN VIEW
SCALE 1:10
SECTION A-A
NOTE: SEAL KIT SUPPLIED WITH HYDRAULIC MOTOR TO BE FITTED ON ASSEMBLY WHEEL ASSEMBLY DETAILS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
28333 B0
B0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 03B1105 1 CYLINDER 32.0
2 03B2046 2 ELBOW 0.1
3 02B0185 1 BEARING -
2
3

- - - - - - - - MASS: 31.9kg CYLINDER GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN JTB 08/08/12
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN JTB 08/08/12
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK MTM 09/08/12 BASEDRIVE STEERING A0
- - - - - - - - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D BAH 09/08/12 10R8609 VER
Code

Rev.

1 30R7582 1 REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY 180.7
2 30R7583 1 TEARDROP PIN 8.1
3 02B0185 3 BEARING -
4 02B0090 4 BEARING 0.1
5 06B0322 2 SEAL -
6 02B0091 4 WASHER -
7 06B0049 4 SEAL -
8 02B2562 2 HUB 48.2
9 02B0243 2 PIN 0.4 13
10 02B0980 4 NIPPLE -
11 01B1363 4 PIN - 12
12 01B0295 2 WASHER -
13 01b0176 2 BOLT -
14 01B0437 1 WASHER - 18
15 01B0306 1 BOLT 0.1
16 30R7974 1 STUB AXLE YOKE 98.3 6
17 25R0016 4 SEAL RETAINER 0.8
18 30R1102 2 PIN 10.7 7
19 30R7973 1 STUB AXLE YOKE 99.2
20 31R1211 2 TIEROD 6.4 17 15
21 10R8610 1 CYLINDER 31.3
11 14
22 31R4674 2 WHEEL ASSEMBLY 174.2
23 01b1520 1 SCREW - 2
4
5
1
19
23
16
8
20
3 10
5 4 22
3
9
11
17
7
6
21
EXPLODED
ISOMETRIC VIEW
ISOMETRIC VIEW
- - SCALE 1:20 UNO 3rd ANGLE PROJECTION U.N.O. A3

- - - - RME Underground Pty Ltd MASS: 901.6kg BASEDRIVE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - ACN 098 444 332
DO NOT SCALE DESIGN JMT 2/04/2012
- - - - 149 Hursley Road, Glenvale, Toowoomba IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN JMT 02/04/12 BSD NON-DRIVEN 100kN
PO Box 100 RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- - - - This drawing remains the property of RME
26406
TOOWOOMBA QLD 4350 UNDERGROUND PTY LTD and must not be CHECK MTM 10/04/12
B0
B0 ADDED ITEM 23 NB SP SDL 13/03/17 1 AUSTRALIA manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
- A0 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION AS PER APPROVAL without prior written approval from RME
CODE
p + 61 7 46 989 100 UNDERGROUND PTY LTD

REV
Copyright RME Underground Pty Ltd

ECN/RT REV DESCRIPTION DWN CHK APPD DATE e rme@rmeGlobal.com
TEMPLATE REVISION A0 SEALING, BONDING AND LUBRICATION DESIGNATION - 25
2 20
1 21 19
1
5
SECTION A-A 3 9 18 19
SCALE 1 : 10 16 18 9 3 20 SECTION C-C
SCALE 1 : 10
SECTION B-B
22 18 13 12
16
17
A
1
4 D D
1
C
7 A C
17
6
B B
8 16 PLAN VIEW
SCALE 1:10
SECTION D-D
- - - - RME Underground Pty Ltd MASS: 901.6kg BASEDRIVE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - ACN 098 444 332
DO NOT SCALE DESIGN JMT 2/04/2012
- - - - 149 Hursley Road, Glenvale, Toowoomba IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN JMT 02/04/12 BSD NON-DRIVEN 100kN
PO Box 100 RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- - - - This drawing remains the property of RME
26406
TOOWOOMBA QLD 4350 UNDERGROUND PTY LTD and must not be CHECK MTM 10/04/12
B0
B0 ADDED ITEM 23 NB SP SDL 13/03/17 1 AUSTRALIA manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
- A0 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION AS PER APPROVAL without prior written approval from RME
CODE
p + 61 7 46 989 100 UNDERGROUND PTY LTD

REV
Copyright RME Underground Pty Ltd

ECN/RT REV DESCRIPTION DWN CHK APPD DATE e rme@rmeGlobal.com
TEMPLATE REVISION A0 SEALING, BONDING AND LUBRICATION DESIGNATION - 25
1 03B1688 1 CYLINDER 29.0
2 03B1587 1 NIPPLE -
3 03B2046 1 ELBOW 0.1
4 02B0185 1 BEARING -

- - - - MASS: 29.9kg CYLINDER GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN BAH 09/08/12
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BAH 09/08/12
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK MTM 09/08/12 BASEDRIVE STEERING CYLINDER A0
- - - - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D BAH 09/08/12 10R8610 VER
Code

Rev.

1 12R4822 1 FRAME GROUP 231.7 26 10106707 1 LABEL -
2 12R3702 1 MANIFOLD GROUP 68.5 27 23R0388 1 LABEL -
3 12R4831 1 VALVE GROUP 34.0 28 10106710 1 LABEL -
4 12R4821 1 PUMP GROUP 719.4 29 10117294 1 LABEL -
5 10101999 1 TERMINATOR 0.1 30 01B1993 4 SCREW -
6 10100689 10 GLAND - 31 01B1515 4 WASHER -
7 10100262 1 CONTACT BLOCK 0.2 32 01B1049 1 NUT -
8 10105381 1 DRAIN - 33 01b0985 1 SCREW -
9 10102666 1 BUTTON 0.1 34 30R9077 1 MOUNT -
10 10102667 1 BOOT - 35 10135826 1 MODULE 0.6
11 10117214 1 BUTTON - 36 10105312 1 ENCLOSURE 2.0
12 10102028 1 LOCKNUT - 37 10103541 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER 1.8
13 10102829 1 CONNECTOR 0.1 38 10102012 2 FITTING 0.1
14 10102832 1 CONNECTOR 0.6 39 10101998 2 FITTING 0.1
15 10104678 2 NUT - 40 10100690 1 GLAND -
16 10102033 2 PLUG - 41 01B1824 2 SCREW -
17 10106703 1 LABEL - 42 10114170 1 LABEL -
18 10122533 1 LABEL - 43 10135866 1 LABEL -
19 10122532 1 LABEL - 44 10129731 1 CABLE 24.6
20 10101852 1 LABEL - 45 02B2052 1 SNODDER 0.2
21 10103192 1 LABEL -
22 10118317 1 LABEL -
23 10101897 1 LABEL -
24 10103623 1 LABEL -
25 10128405 1 LABEL -
ISOMETRIC VIEW
REAR ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 1084.8kg POWERPACK ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN BAS 01/12/16
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 05/12/16 HYP 37kW 225S/M 100/44cc BEA 125/80 ES/EN
- -
A0
APP'D BDS 05/12/16 SHEET 1 of 3 12R4823 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

45 24
34
44 4
33
7 15 31 30
9 27 16 26
14
10 3
20 13
28
11
21
6
39
38
38
41
29
42
36
35
37
39
19
8
40 5 2
18
12
17
1
25
23
22
1

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 05/12/16 HYP 37kW 225S/M 100/44cc BEA 125/80 ES/EN
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

50 TYP
19
IN LINE WITH CUTOUT
21 PLACED ONTO GAUGE MOUNT PLATE

22 CENTRED WITH CUTOUT
10
PLACED ONTO ELECTRICAL
ENCLOSURE COVER
10
CENTRED WITH BUTTON 20 45
17
18
25
30
30 FRONT VIEW
90
70
PLACE CENTRED ON FLAT

23 FACE OF FILTER HOUSING
28
29
PLACE CENTRED
ON FLAT FACE 43 PLACE ON TOP 24
OF MOTOR
42
PLACE CENTRED
26 ON FLAT FACE
FRONT VIEW
COVERS REMOVED LABEL DETAIL
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 05/12/16 HYP 37kW 225S/M 100/44cc BEA 125/80
ES/EN RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 32R2169 1 FRAME ASSEMBLY 130.0
2 31R0988 4 SHIM 0.1
4 02B0361 4 MOUNT 0.1
5 31R1166 2 BRACKET -
6 30R8999 6 SPACER -
7 30R8998 1 LEVER 0.2
8 10108001 1 COVER 1.6
9 31R1652 1 COVER 1.3
10 30R8456 4 GASKET -
11 30R6919 6 GASKET -
12 02B0536 4 HANDLE 0.1
13 32R1261 1 COVER 30.8 11
14 32R0019 1 COVER 33.5
15 03B0186 1 GAUGE 0.2
16 03B0259 1 HOSE 0.1
17 32R2065 1 COVER 1.5
31 11 B
18 32R2067 1 GASKET - 39 38 35
19 01B2671 4 SCREW - 18
21 01B0177 8 BOLT - 17
22 01b0293 19 WASHER - 29
23 01b0297 11 NUT - 27 34 33
24 01b0308 4 BOLT 0.1
25 01B0435 4 WASHER -
26 01b0437 4 WASHER -
27 01B1360 15 BOLT -
28 01b1133 1 WASHER -
29 01b1135 10 WASHER -
30 01b1137 1 NUT - A
31 01b1241 4 PIN - 10 24
32 01B2262 5 WASHER -
33 01B1045 2 WASHER -
34 01b1048 2 NUT - 25
35 01b1476 2 BOLT -
36 01B2139 4 SCREW -
37 01B2275 4 WASHER 0.2 26
38 02B2315 2 COVER 0.1
39 02B2321 2 BODY - 1
40 32R2816 1 BRACKET 49.5
15 16 22 23
41 01b0220 3 SCREW 0.1
42 01B0216 1 SCREW -
12
13
14
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:20
- - - - MASS: 251.6kg FRAME GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 1/12/2016 HYP POWERPACK
28850
B0
B0 IT 3 REP BY IT 40; IT 20 REP BY IT 41; QTY IT's 22 & 23 REDUCED; ITEMS 41 & 42 ADDED SL SP SDL 20/04/2017 2 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

THIS DAMPER ONLY
42
23
6
5
8 22
28
32
27 30
6 40
19
32
27 21
9
37
36 2
22
6
7 4
32
41
27
DETAIL B
SCALE 1 : 5
DETAIL A
SCALE 1 : 5

- - - - MASS: 251.6kg FRAME GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 1/12/2016 HYP POWERPACK
28850
B0
B0 IT 3 REP BY IT 40; IT 20 REP BY IT 41; QTY IT's 22 & 23 REDUCED; ITEMS 41 & 42 ADDED SL SP SDL 20/04/2017 2 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 03B7365 1 MANIFOLD 45.0
2 03B1060 1 FILTER 21.0
4 03B2036 4 NIPPLE -
5 03B0550 2 NIPPLE 0.2
6 03B1434 1 COUPLING 0.1
7 03B1097 1 ELEMENT 0.7
8 01B0174 4 BOLT - 4 1
9 01B0295 4 WASHER -
9 01b0055 6 BOLT -
11 01B0165 6 WASHER -
13 03B1892 1 CAP - 5
8
14 03B1587 1 NIPPLE -
15 03B2109 1 PLUG -
16 03B1954 1 NIPPLE -
9
14
16
15
4
13
11
7
ISOMETRIC VIEW
2

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
28659 D0 REPLACED ITEMS 3 AND 12 FOR 14 & 15. ADDED ITEM 16 SRM SP BDS 07/03/17 2 DRAWN SDL 15/01/16 PRESSURE FILTER - MACHINE ENABLE
25076 C0 ADDED ITEM 13 WS SP JLP 01/03/17 2 This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
27358
D0
B0 REPLACED 1 OFF ITEM 6 WITH ITEM 12 JM AM LO 20/05/16 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 03B4161 1 VALVE 97.0 13
2 03B1527 1 NIPPLE - 12
3 03B1700 1 TEE 0.1 11
4 03B0310 1 ELBOW 0.1
5 03B1870 1 NIPPLE 0.1 7
6 03B1531 1 ELBOW 0.1 16 4
7 03B1951 2 COUPLING -
8 03B1523 8 NIPPLE - 3
17
9 03B1569 4 NIPPLE 0.1 2
10 03B1848 2 NIPPLE -
11 10100689 1 GLAND - 18
12 10101986 1 FITTING -
13 10103666 1 SWITCH 0.8 5
6
14 01B1863 5 SCREW -
15 01b1048 6 NUT - 1
16 01b0952 4 SCREW - 7
17 01b1047 4 WASHER -
18 01b1045 4 WASHER -
19 01B1873 1 SCREW -
15
19
15
14
10
8
9
8
10
9
8 8
9
8
9
8 EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW
ISOMETRIC VIEW 63
10
TO CLEAR
TE
LOCK PLA
14
8 9 8 9 8
BOTTOM VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW

- - - - MASS: 34.0kg VALVE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 1/12/2016 HYP PVG32 6-BANK BEA 125/80
28909
B0
B0 ITEM 6 QTY REDUCED TO 1 FROM 3 KKS SP JMS 12/05/2017 - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10135701 1 MOTOR 460.1
2 30R7838 1 BELL HOUSING 29.9
3 02B0586 1 COUPLING 0.1
4 02B0638 1 COUPLING 2.0
5 02B2372 1 COUPLING 0.3
6 03B0818 1 PUMP ASSEMBLY 93.3
7 03B1817 1 ELBOW 0.2
8 03B1820 1 ELBOW 0.2
9 03B0550 1 NIPPLE 0.1
10 10R6259 1 CLAMP GROUP 1.2
11 03B2175 1 ADAPTER 0.4
12 03B2179 1 CLAMP KIT 0.8
13 03B1406 1 HOSE END 0.7
14 03B0211 1 HOSE END - 1
15 10R6493 1 CLAMP GROUP 0.4
16 03B1889 1 ADAPTER 0.3 22
17 03B2520 1 CLAMP KIT 0.3
18 01b0439 4 NUT - 25
19 01B0437 4 WASHER -
21 01b0435 6 WASHER -
22 01B0599 4 NUT 0.1
23 01b0307 2 BOLT 0.1
24 01B1756 4 BOLT 0.2
25 01B0595 8 WASHER - 2 27
26 31R6976 1 REDUCER 0.1
27 03B1594 1 FITTING 0.4
25
28 10136175 2 FITTING - 24
29 01B0316 4 BOLT 0.2 10
11
26
29 17
21
19 5
18 3 16
28 21
4
23
6
14
7 8 9
15
13
EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW 12

ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:7.5

- - - - MASS: 593.7kg PUMP GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 1/12/2016 HYP 364/5T - 100/44cc
28850
B0
B0 ITEM 20 REPLACED BY ITEM 29 SL SP SDL 20/04/2017 2 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 03B2131 1 FLANGE KIT 1.0
3 01B2373 4 BOLT -
REPLACE BOLTS SUPPLIED WITH 03B2131 FLANGE KIT WITH 01B2373 BOLTS
3
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:2

- - - - MASS: 1.2kg CLAMP GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SC 08/06/11
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SC 08/06/11 1-1/4" SAE CODE 62 CLAMP KIT
1/2" UNC x 3" HEX HEAD RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
RT 20693 B0 REPLACED ITEM 2 WITH ITEM 3
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK DH 08/06/11
B0
SC BJ MSM 04/03/13 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D SC 09/06/11 SHEET 1 of 1 10R6259 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R4833 1 ENCLOSURE GROUP 62.4
2 12R4838 1 ELECTRICAL GROUP 1.6
1
3 10117193 1 PENDANT 5.1
4 23R0388 1 LABEL -
5 10106708 1 LABEL -
4
6 10103599 1 LABEL 0.4
7 10104069 1 LABEL 0.1 8
8 10103678 1 LABEL - 3
9 10128406 1 LABEL -
10 10100535 2 LABEL -
10
6
POSITION ON ASSEMBLY
8
5
10
FRONT VIEW 100
20
(DOOR OPEN)
6 ALIGN WITH BUTTONS 4
ALIGN WITH
ISOLATOR 7 6 ALIGN WITH BUTTONS
50
9 5 ALIGN WITH ISOLATOR

390
50
50
ISOMETRIC VIEW
FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW
- - - - MASS: 69.6kg ENCLOSURE ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BAS 05/12/16 480V 60Hz 37kW ES/EN
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 32R2184 1 ENCLOSURE 44.1
3 31R6946 1 COVER -
4 30R1343 1 GASKET -
5 10112444 1 PLATE 3.0
6 31R1106 1 PLATE 1.3
7 10101999 1 TERMINATOR 0.1
8 10104010 1 FITTING 0.3
9 10102028 1 LOCKNUT -
10 10102008 1 FITTING 0.1
11 10104012 1 LOCKNUT -
12 10101998 2 FITTING 0.1
13 10104013 5 LOCKNUT -
14 10100689 3 GLAND -
15 10101983 1 FITTING 0.1
16 10101986 2 FITTING -
17 10101982 1 FITTING 0.1
18 10102029 1 LOCKNUT 0.1
19 10100690 1 GLAND -
20 10102034 1 FITTING -
21 10117593 1 NUT -
22 10102014 4 FITTING 0.3
23 10117548 1 GLAND 0.2
24 10104011 1 LOCKNUT -
25 10133876 1 FITTING -
26 10105273 1 PLUG GROUP 0.3
27 10104643 1 CONNECTOR 0.4
28 10100328 1 GASKET -
29 30R9070 1 BRACKET 1.7
30 32R0917 1 BRACKET 2.0
31 32R0944 1 BRACKET 0.7
32 30R0678 1 STOP -
33 30R9077 1 MOUNT -
34 30R9078 1 WASHER -
35 10105381 2 DRAIN -
36 01B0297 6 NUT -
37 01B0293 12 WASHER -
38 01B0177 2 BOLT -
39 01b1048 1 NUT -
40 01B1045 3 WASHER -
41 01B1878 1 SCREW -
42 01B2278 28 WASHER -
43 01B0176 4 BOLT -
44 01B1137 14 NUT -
45 01B2445 14 BOLT -
46 01B2266 4 WASHER -
47 01B2268 8 SCREW -
48 01B2281 8 NUT -
49 01B0952 2 SCREW -
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 62.4kg ENCLOSURE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 01/12/16 HYP MRM RUSSELL 7/8 UL
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

21 20 13 16 14 14 16 13 12 13 7 9
13 19
14 22 24 15
44 42 42 45
22
5
23
4
6 25 8 18
1 22 11
22
10
12 13
17
31 49 40
49
28
27
47 48
2
26
33
3 41 34 40 39
46
47
36 37 37 43 30
32
29 43 37 37 36
38 37 37 36
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

15
11 24
10 17 23 16 16
13 22 18 22 9 13 13 13 13 21
12 22 25 22 7 12 14 14 19 20 14
REAR VIEW LEFT SIDE VIEW

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10105680 1 BUTTON 0.1
2 10105675 1 BUTTON 0.1
3 10102825 1 METER 0.2
4 10100261 1 BUTTON 0.2
5 10100263 1 BOOT -
6 10100325 1 BUTTON 0.1
7 10100327 1 BOOT 0.1
8 10117214 1 BUTTON -
9 10105677 4 BUTTON 0.1
10 10103553 1 HANDLE 2.1
11 10105689 6 ADAPTER -
12 10105681 5 LIGHT 0.1
13 10103967 6 CONTACT BLOCK 0.1
14 10103968 6 CONTACT BLOCK -
15 10105676 1 LIGHT 0.1
16 10100265 1 CONTACT BLOCK 0.2
17 10100262 1 CONTACT BLOCK 0.2
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 5.0kg ELECTRICAL GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BAS 01/12/16 MCC DOOR UL
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

13
14
12 13
14
11
17
15
4
11
1
3 16
6
5
7
13
14 8
13
14
13
12 14
13
12
14
9 12
11
12
9
11
9
11
9
11
10

- - - - MASS: 5.0kg ELECTRICAL GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BAS 01/12/16 MCC DOOR UL
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R4588 1 TANK GROUP 207.2
2 03B3242 1 COOLER 40.0
3 10128471 1 LABEL -
4 23R0197 1 LABEL -
5 10101896 1 LABEL -
6 10103613 1 LABEL -
7 10103614 1 LABEL - 6
8 10101886 1 LABEL -
9 10101885 1 LABEL -
10 10101884 1 LABEL -
CENTRED ON LID 8
11 10101883 1 LABEL -
12 10101882 1 LABEL -
45
13 10101881 1 LABEL -
14 10105385 1 LABEL -
15 31R6945 1 ENCLOSURE 0.7
16 10104013 1 LOCKNUT -
17 10102012 1 FITTING 0.1
18 10101998 1 FITTING 0.1 5
19 10100688 2 GLAND -
20 01B1374 2 SCREW - 9
21 01B1045 4 WASHER - CROPPED REAR VIEW
22 01B0952 4 SCREW - SCALE 1:7.5
23 03B2026 2 ELBOW 0.1
70
45
40 TYP
12 4
170
280
482
1 12 4 5 8 9 19 20 6 15 2 CROPPED TOP VIEW
3
7 50
63.5
23
15
13
210.5
17
10
18 21
16
22 7
26
3
10
14
20
20
19
11
45
13 45 14
20
375
11
EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW CROPPED LEFT SIDE VIEW CROPPED FRONT VIEW
SCALE 1:20
LABEL ITEMS
- - - - MASS: 248.4kg TANK ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 01/12/16 HYP OK-EL5S 380-415/50Hz 440-480/60Hz 167L
RUSSELL 7 ES/EN RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

9
8 5
4
12
2 3
11
14
15
20
10
19
13
16
A
17
18
REAR EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW

DETAIL A
SCALE 1 : 2.5
ELECTRICAL ITEMS
- - - - MASS: 248.4kg TANK ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 01/12/16 HYP OK-EL5S 380-415/50Hz 440-480/60Hz 167L
RUSSELL 7 ES/EN RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 32R0918 1 SUPPORT FRAME 86.2 41 01B0293 4 WASHER -
2 32R1493 1 HYDRAULIC TANK 87.1 42 01B0176 4 BOLT -
3 30R8050 1 GASKET 0.3 43 01B0953 1 BOLT -
4 32R1492 1 COVER 3.8 44 01b1048 2 NUT -
5 06B0075 1 SEAL - 45 01B1045 1 WASHER -
6 30R0836 1 COVER 2.5
7 32R1950 1 COVER ASSEMBLY 10.2
8 03B2752 1 GAUGE 0.4
9 03B1686 1 NIPPLE 0.1
10 03B1885 1 ELBOW 0.1
11 03B0550 7 NIPPLE 0.1
12 03B0552 6 ELBOW 0.2
13 03B2039 2 NIPPLE 0.2
14 03B1589 1 PLUG -
15 03B1623 1 CLAMP 0.7
16 03b1622 1 CLAMP 0.6
17 03B1618 1 COUPLING 0.4
18 03B1616 1 HOSE END 0.3 43 35 45
19 06B0365 1 SEAL -
20 03B1596 1 NIPPLE 0.1
21 03B0078 1 COUPLING 0.3
22 03B0607 1 CAP -
23 03B1565 1 ELBOW 0.3
24 03B0076 1 NIPPLE 0.1
25 03B0077 1 VALVE 0.4
26 03B1434 1 COUPLING 0.1 7
27 03B1144 1 FILTER 6.6
28 03B1143 1 ELEMENT 1.9
29 03B0188 1 NIPPLE 0.3
30 03B0215 1 BREATHER -
31 03B0081 1 SENSOR 0.3
32 03B0117 1 TEMPERATURE SWITCH 0.1
33 03B0100 1 GAUGE -
34 03B0619 2 PLUG -
35 01B1047 26 WASHER -
36 01B0952 23 SCREW - 35 44
37 01B0437 6 WASHER -
38 01B0435 6 WASHER -
39 01B0306 6 BOLT 0.1
40 01B0295 4 WASHER -
EXPLODED REAR ISOMETRIC VIEW
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:20
COVER ITEMS
- - - - MASS: 207.2kg TANK GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 14/10/16 HYP 167L RUSSELL 7
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

36
35
6
20 19 21 22
5
26 12 12 12 12 12 10
34 27
33
INSIDE 28
12
30
11
29
12 36
9 35
4 13 11
10
39 3
CROPPED LEFT SIDE
SCALE 1:5
2
37
38
8 35 12
31
32
17 41
15
16 40 13
18 1
42 CROPPED REAR VIEW
11
13 SCALE 1:5
25 24 23
14

TANK ITEMS
- - - - MASS: 207.2kg TANK GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 14/10/16 HYP 167L RUSSELL 7
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R4807 1 OUTER BEAM GROUP 7646.3 5
2 23R0263 4 LABEL -
3 10103611 1 LABEL -
4 30R0430 1 LABEL 3.0 4
5 01B2116 4 SCREW -

SCALE 1:50
245 TYP 4
2
384 TYP
300
10
3
REAR VIEW
LEFT SIDE VIEW

- - - - MASS: 7649.4kg OUTER BEAM ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SRM 22/11/16
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SRM 23/11/16 BEA 0823 NCA ES/ EN
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R8048 1 OUTER BEAM 5755.2 56 01B0110 4 SCREW -
2 31R5076 2 RAIL 59.1 57 01b0599 16 NUT 0.1
3 31R1181 1 BRACKET 20.9 58 01B1756 16 BOLT 0.2
4 30R6984 1 RUBBER STOP 5.3 59 01b0175 13 BOLT -
5 30R6983 1 RETAINER 2.0 60 01B0295 13 WASHER -
6 31R1452 1 REAR COVER 9.2 61 01B0177 3 BOLT -
7 31R8072 1 COVER 170.6 62 01B0293 45 WASHER -
8 31R1238 6 BRACKET 0.6 63 01b0448 2 BOLT 0.1
9 31R0207 1 RETAINER 1.4 64 01b0236 5 SCREW -
11 31R0205 1 BRACKET 2.2 65 01B2221 8 SCREW 0.1
12 31R3377 2 RETAINER 21.6 66 01B0352 12 SCREW 0.1
13 30R4724 2 RETAINER 0.4 67 01B1857 4 SCREW -
14 30R4941 2 PIN 3.1 68 01B2326 12 SCREW 0.1
15 31R2306 1 BRACKET 130.3 69 01b0297 42 NUT -
16 31R2312 4 RETAINER 1.2 70 01b0597 18 WASHER -
17 31R8049 1 ROCKER 443.0 71 01B0449 18 BOLT 0.2
18 30R7771 4 RETAINER 0.3 72 31R1131 4 PAD 0.9
19 31R2384 2 PIN 9.9 73 31R3667 2 PAD 1.7
20 30R7504 1 GUARD 0.1 74 31R1133 2 PAD 0.4
21 30R7505 1 RETAINER 0.1 75 31R1135 2 PAD 0.8
22 12R4230 1 CYLINDER GROUP 249.3 76 31R1136 6 SHIM 0.2
23 31R5002 2 RAIL 42.0 77 31R1132 12 SHIM 0.3
24 31R3378 2 SPACER 25.2 78 31R1134 6 SHIM 0.1
25 31R8063 1 ANTILIFT 30.3 79 30R8182 2 LATCH 0.2
26 31R5078 1 ANTILIFT 43.7 80 30R8229 2 BUSH 0.1
27 31R5001 1 ANTILIFT 14.9 81 01B0437 2 WASHER -
28 31R1237 2 KEEPER 0.3 82 01B0306 2 BOLT 0.1
29 31R1176 4 KEEPER 0.5 83 32R2929 1 WIPER 0.4
30 31R1339 1 CLAMP 0.1
31 31R4999 2 RAIL 21.0
32 31R8061 2 RAIL 41.7
33 31R5000 1 ANTILIFT 14.9
34 31R5077 1 ANTILIFT 43.7
35 31R8062 1 ANTILIFT 30.3
36 31R5003 1 ANTILIFT 30.4
37 31R5004 1 ANTILIFT 30.4
38 31R8065 1 RAIL ASSEMBLY 51.5
39 32R2148 1 RAIL ASSEMBLY 51.8
40 31R0618 4 STOP 2.7
41 02B2242 4 BUMPER 0.2
42 03B0619 4 PLUG -
43 02B2079 4 NIPPLE -
44 01b1520 4 SCREW -
45 01B1788 8 SCREW -
46 01B0595 58 WASHER -
47 01b0450 40 BOLT 0.2
48 01B2367 42 SCREW 0.1
49 01b0051 5 BOLT -
50 01b0165 5 WASHER -
51 01B0350 20 SCREW -
52 01b1047 12 WASHER -
ISOMETRIC VIEW
53 01b0952 6 SCREW -
54 01B0951 6 BOLT -
55 01b0216 4 SCREW -

- - - - MASS: 7646.0kg OUTER BEAM GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SRM 23/11/2016 BEA 0823 NCA
28909
B0
B0 ITEM 10 REPLACED BY ITEM 83 WS SP JMS 9/05/2017 - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

49 50 46 63 41 40 44 7 46 58 4 5 6
59
45
60
31
27 61
3
62
26 57
48
B
41 40 44
46 2
47
30
1 49 50 31
48
48 33
69
8
63 46
46 47 25 32 52 53
48 52 54 45
38
A 34 39 47 46 48 47 46
2
79
48 47 46 80
C
82
81
32
35 71
20 22
70
21
50
49

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SRM 23/11/2016 BEA 0823 NCA
28909
B0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

MAX NO. OF SHIMS IN 51 51
THIS RETAINER IS 5 28 55
74
46 45 51
78
47
65 17
56 18
64 72
77
MAX NO. OF SHIMS IN
41 43 THIS RETAINER IS 3
48 40
37 44
23
62
69
11
9
3
41 DETAIL B
40
51 67
44
29
24
60 59
76
83 75
12
29 69
51 MAX NO. OF SHIMS IN 62
THIS RETAINER IS 5
45
23 36
48 47 46
19
15 14 13 59 60 68
42
73
16 DETAIL A
66
DETAIL C

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SRM 23/11/2016 BEA 0823 NCA
28909
B0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 03B3152 1 CYLINDER 213.7
2 31R3871 1 CLEVIS 20.1
3 32R1548 1 STRAIGHT PIN 8.2
4 30R9200 1 SHIM 4.8
5 01B0668 4 SCREW 0.4
6 31R6550 1 BEARING PAD 0.6
7 03B0075 2 ELBOW 0.1
1 5

- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN BDS 08/07/16
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BDS 08/07/16 BEA OUTER
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R4805 1 INNER BEAM GROUP 5492.7
2 23R0180 2 LABEL -
3 23R0178 2 LABEL -
4 10101855 1 LABEL -
5 10106712 1 LABEL -
7 10106627 2 CONNECTOR 0.1
8 10117214 1 BUTTON -
9 01B1384 6 WASHER -
10 01B2159 6 SCREW -
11 12R4152 1 CABLE GROUP 17.1
12 12R4262 1 CABLE GROUP 3.0
13 10127394 1 GLAND 0.1
14 30R9077 1 MOUNT -
15 01b0985 1 SCREW -
16 01B1045 1 WASHER -
17 30R9078 1 WASHER -
18 01B1049 1 NUT -
26 10105273 1 PLUG GROUP 0.3
20 10104643 1 CONNECTOR 0.4
21 10100328 1 GASKET -
22 01B2470 4 SCREW -
23 01B2281 4 NUT -
24 10106645 1 PENDANT 7.8
25 10135459 1 LABEL -
26
22
21
23
1 20
13
12 18
A 16
17
14
25 7 9 10
15
5
8
4
11
24 DETAIL A
2 3
EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW SCALE 1 : 10
LABEL & ELECTRICAL ITEMS

- - - - MASS: 5521.8kg INNER BEAM ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SRM 24/11/2016 BEA 0823 MID LONG ES/EN
28779
B0
B0 REPLACED ITEM 6 WITH ITEM 25 SRM SP SDL 31/03/2017 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

25 23 7.5 5
41
87
18
200
21
49
86
33
5 8 4 2 3
CROPPED FRONT VIEW

CROPPED
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
TYP OPPPOSITE SIDE
LABEL ITEMS
- - - - MASS: 5521.8kg INNER BEAM ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SRM 24/11/2016 BEA 0823 MID LONG ES/EN
28779
B0
B0 REPLACED ITEM 6 WITH ITEM 25 SRM SP SDL 31/03/2017 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 32R2147 1 INNER BEAM 4790.2
3 10R5395 1 CABLEVEYOR GROUP 10.9
4 31R0814 1 BRACKET 1.7
5 31R4025 1 BRACKET 1.6
6 31R6478 1 GASKET -
7 31R6477 1 COVER 1.1
8 31R8047 2 CLAMP 16.5
9 01B0984 4 SCREW -
10 01b1045 8 WASHER -
11 01b0953 4 BOLT -
12 01b1047 10 WASHER -
13 01b0051 2 BOLT -
14 01B0951 6 BOLT -
15 01B1856 2 SCREW -
16 01B0597 4 WASHER -
17 01B0461 4 BOLT 0.3
18 01B1878 4 SCREW -
19 01b1049 4 NUT -
20 01b0165 2 WASHER -
23 03B0550 4 NIPPLE 0.1
24 03B0552 2 ELBOW 0.2
25 03B0551 2 ELBOW 0.2
26 03B1817 1 ELBOW 0.2 B
27 03B2036 1 NIPPLE -
28 03B2741 1 MANIFOLD 12.8
29 06b0008 1 SEAL 0.6

- - - - MASS: 5492.7kg INNER BEAM GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SRM 24/11/16 BEA 0823 NF MID LONG
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

18
10 3
29
26
24
5 27
23
13 28
23
24
20
25 23
19
15 12
4 11
12
1
14 1 10
6 DETAIL A 9
7 17
16
8
DETAIL B

- - - - MASS: 5492.7kg INNER BEAM GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SRM 24/11/16 BEA 0823 NF MID LONG
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 02B2721 33 LINK 0.3
2 02B2719 1 BRACKET 1.0
MOVING END IS ALWAYS THE

OUTER SIDE CHAIN LINK
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:15
125
56
2269.7
LEFT SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW

CHAIN PITCH = 91mm

- - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN VB 26/11/2010
- - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
RT 18381 D0 FIXED WEIGHTS, AMENDED CONFIGS FOR PROD BOM, REMOVED SHEET 2 HK SC HK 06/11/12 2 DRAWN VB 26/11/10
C0 AMENDED PART NUMBERS & DESC. FOR ITEMS 1 & 2, DRAWING DESC. CHANGED HK SJF HK 13/10/11 2 This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK OF 26/11/10 E4.56.12.175 x 33 KMA PIVOTING D0
RT 10476 B0 CHANGED PART NUMBER FOR ITEM 1 SC OF VB 20/01/11 2 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
RT 10411 A0 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION AS PER APPROVAL without prior written approval from RUSSELL MINERAL
APP'D VB 26/11/2010 10R5395 VER
Code

Rev.

1 03B3037 1 CYLINDER 632.4
2 31R2217 1 PIN 3.9
4 03B1816 1 ELBOW 0.3
7 03B2071 1 ELBOW 0.4
8 03B0650 1 NIPPLE 0.2
9 01B3206 2 CIRCLIP -

- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN HK 25/11/11
- - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
26450 D0 REPLACE ITEM 3 WITH ITEM 9 JM AM LO 22/06/16 - DRAWN SDL 2/12/11 BEA INNER
25717 C0 REPLACED ITEMS 5 & 6 WITH ITEMS 7 & 8 SC BAS BDS 24/09/14 1 This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
RT 21703 B0
D0
ADDED ITEMS 4 - 6 HK MTM HK 26/04/13 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D BAH 07/12/11 SHEET 1 of 1 10R7097 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10129035 1 CABLE 15.1
2 10104654 1 CONNECTOR 0.7
3 10117548 2 GLAND 0.2
4 10105128 1 CONNECTOR 0.5
5 10102830 1 CONNECTOR 0.5
6 10105129 1 CONNECTOR 0.1
7 10117956 1 COVER -
8 10117957 1 COVER 0.2
1
6
MARK CABLE WITH ITEM NUMBER
"12R4152 - 1 OF 2" 5
COVER WITH CLEAR
HEATSHRINK "10131562"
3

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SDL 21/07/16 TRU TO MCC 18 CORE x 2.5mm² 15m
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

USE CABLE 10129035
1
5
2
PE
PE
1 13 Pin No. of Female Cable Core No. Pin No. of Male 1
1 1 1 13
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 8 8
6 9 9 9
10 10 10 4
11 11 11
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 14
15 15 15
16 16 16
17 17 17
18 NOT USED 18
19 NOT USED 19
20 NOT USED 20
21 NOT USED 21
12 24 22 NOT USED 22 12 24
23 NOT USED 23
24 NOT USED 24
PE green / yellow PE
TERMINATE GREEN / YELLOW EARTH CONDUCTOR,
AT PE TERMINAL, AT BOTH ENDS OF CABLE.
10102830 10104654
CONTACT ARRANGEMENT CONTACT ARRANGEMENT
AS VIEWED FROM TERMINATION SIDE AS VIEWED FROM TERMINATION SIDE
BROKEN OUT SECTION BROKEN OUT SECTION

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SDL 21/07/16 TRU TO MCC 18 CORE x 2.5mm² 15m
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10129037 1 CABLE 2.4
2 10127394 2 GLAND 0.1
3 10117444 1 CONNECTOR 0.3
4 10117442 1 CONNECTOR 0.2
6 10117991 1 COVER -
1 5 MARK CABLE WITH ITEM NUMBER

"12R4262 - 1 OF 2"
COVER WITH CLEAR HEATSHRINK
"10129039"
2

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SDL 21/07/16 JB4 TO MCC 7 CORE 1.5mm2 TPE/TPE
300/500V 16m RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

USE CABLE 10129037
1
4 3
1 3
Cable Core No. Pin No. of Male
1 1
2 2 PE
3 3
4 4 4 6
5 5
6 6
green / yellow PE
10117444
TERMINATE GREEN / YELLOW EARTH CONDUCTOR
AT PE TERMINAL CONTACT ARRANGEMENT
BROKEN OUT SECTION

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SDL 21/07/16 JB4 TO MCC 7 CORE 1.5mm2 TPE/TPE
300/500V 16m RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R1618 1 LINERCART GROUP 972.4
2 10106701 2 LABEL -
3 10105569 2 LABEL -
4 10104421 2 LABEL 0.1
2 3 1

SCALE 1:10
125 750 125
4
4
2 3
4
1
FRONT VIEW 1030

1040
RIGHT SIDE VIEW

- - - - MASS: 972.6kg LINERCART ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN AM 21/11/16
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN AM 21/11/16 LCA 2500kg 0823 ES/EN
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R0788 1 LINER CART TROLLEY 421.3
2 30R9748 1 LINERCART TURNTABLE 420.6
3 02B0596 1 BEARING 26.5
18
4 01b0184 28 BOLT - 38
5 01B0293 54 WASHER - 39
6 01B0185 24 BOLT -
7 30R7005 1 TENSIONING TOOL 0.6 32
8 01B1458 2 PIN - 31
9 30R7983 2 FLANGED WHEEL 4.0
10 02B0102 4 BEARING 1.1
11 01B2161 4 CIRCLIP -
12 01B2070 4 CIRCLIP INTERNAL 0.1
17
13 30R9749 1 LEVER 6.9
14 30R9750 1 LEVER 5.2
15 30R9751 1 BRACKET 1.7 20
16 02B3153 2 BEARING -
17 30R7754 2 BOSS 1.3 28
18 01B2153 4 SCREW -
19 30R7453 2 WASHER - 14
20 01B2220 2 PIN -
21 01B2160 3 PIN - 16
22 30R7012 2 PIN -
23 30R7984 2 FLAT WHEEL 2.4 37
24 30R7004 1 SHIM 1.6 2
25 30R7011 1 BRACKET 0.3 19
26 01b0055 2 BOLT -
5 4 TORQUE = 77Nm
27 01B0165 2 WASHER -
28 02B2170 2 SPRING - 22
31 01B0599 6 NUT 0.1 24
32 01B0595 6 WASHER -
33 30R1320 1 PIN 0.1
34 01B2003 26 BELLEVILLE WASHER -
3 14
35 30R7018 1 ROPE ADJUSTER 0.8 5
36 01b1262 2 SCREW - 1 15
37 31R6255 2 WASHER - 21
38 31R9568 3 RUBBER BAR 19.6 5
39 01B3103 6 BOLT 0.4
13
28
6 5
36
23
10
12
11 33
25 21
11 35
12 34
10 26 8
9 27 7
- - - - MASS: 972.4kg LINERCART GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SP 20/05/14
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SP 27/05/14 LCA 4500kg 0823
27072 C0 REPLACED ITEM 30 WITH ITEM 39 SL AM LO 11/08/15 2 This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
26421 B0
C0
REPLACED ITEM 29 WITH ITEM 38 SP BAS OF 7/10/14 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R8071 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 5.4
2 10R7696 1 LINERCART DRIVE GROUP 52.3
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 57.8kg LINERCART DRIVE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN MB 24/04/13
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN MB 24/04/13 LCD 10 OMS315 9542
- -
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK MTM 26/04/13
A0
APP'D BAH 06/05/13 SHEET 1 of 1 10R9837 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R1464 1 MOUNT PLATE 4.3
2 30R8770 1 SHEAVE 9.6
3 30R7016 1 RETAINING DISC 0.1
4 31R0659 1 SHEAVE BLOCK 4.7
5 30R7019 1 SHEAVE 3.8 23
7 01b0051 3 BOLT - 24
8 01b0165 3 WASHER -
9 01b0180 4 BOLT -
10 01B1001 1 SCREW -
11 01b0308 4 BOLT 0.1 18
12 01b0435 4 WASHER -
13 01b0439 4 NUT - 13
14 01B1770 2 SCREW 0.2 1
15 31R0660 1 SHEAVE COVER 1.8 12
16 30R9234 1 COVER 0.3 9
17 03B1537 1 MANIFOLD 9.0 11
18 03B1498 1 MOTOR 12.3
19 31R0661 1 SHEAVE COVER 4.4
20 02B0604 1 BEARING 0.4 2
21 01B1775 1 CIRCLIP - 3
22 01B1691 1 CIRCLIP -
23 01b0297 4 NUT - 10
24 01b0293 4 WASHER - 17 19
25 01b0101 2 SCREW -
26 31R0662 2 GUIDE -
27 31R0663 2 GUIDE -
25
28 01B2642 2 SNAP RING -
29 01B2585 7 SCREW -
28
15.5
12 11 27
13 26
24 2 29
15
23 22 26
19 28
9 21 27
8
5 20
4 7
3 5
20
22 4
10
15 14 16
29
22 14 EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW
21
18
20
23 1 7
16
8 6
SECTION VIEW OF DRIVE SECTION VIEW OF IDLER

SCALE 1 : 2.5 SCALE 1 : 2.5
- - - - MASS: 52.4kg LINERCART DRIVE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SJF 07/03/12
- - - - IF IN DOUBT- ASK RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SP 12/03/12
This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL RME Drawing Number REV
- - - - CHECK
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be DH 12/03/12 LCD 10 OMS315
RT 19445 B0 ITEM 29 REPLACED ITEM 6 BAS SC BAH 17/12/12 2 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party B0
APP'D SJF 14/03/12 10R7696 VER
Code

Rev.

1 12R1650 1 TURNTABLE GROUP 1054.0 3 2 POSITION LABEL CENTRALLY
2 23R0177 2 LABEL - ON THIS FACE
3 31R1817 2 CLAMP 0.3
4 01B0952 4 SCREW - 3
5 01B1047 4 WASHER -
1 3 5 4 2
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:20
POSITION LABEL CENTRALLY

2 ON THIS FACE
TOP VIEW
2 3 5 4
FRONT VIEW
LABEL ITEMS
- - - - MASS: 1054.6kg TURNTABLE ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SC 30/05/14 TTU 4 0823
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R3540 1 TURNTABLE BASE 557.5
2 30R8520 1 LEG 99.4
32
3 30R8521 1 LEG 99.6 31
4 30R8128 2 TEARDROP PIN 3.0 33
5 30R9049 1 BRACKET 0.9 33
6 30R7833 2 BRACKET 0.1 31
7 30R8015 1 COVER 3.2
8 30R9105 1 PINION 13.3
3 TORQUE TO 650N.m
2
9 30R8030 1 RUBBER GUARD 0.6
10 30R9048 1 BRACKET 0.9
11 30R9101 1 RETAINER 0.3
21
TORQUE TO 650N.m
12 01b1047 12 WASHER -
13 01B0176 2 BOLT - 23
14 01B1461 72 BOLT 0.3 4
15 01B1926 1 SCREW 0.1 18
16 01b0165 8 WASHER - 13
17 01b0953 4 BOLT -
18 01B0295 2 WASHER -
5 22 24
19 01B0951 8 BOLT - 20
20 01B2243 3 PIN 0.1
21 01B1755 20 SCREW - 16 16
22 01B0051 6 BOLT - 36 TORQUE TO 100N.m
23 01B1757 4 SCREW -
24 01B0052 2 BOLT -
30
15
25 01B1400 72 WASHER - 34
26 01B0180 11 BOLT -
27 01B1000 2 SCREW -
28 01B1659 11 WASHER - 20
29 01b1045 4 WASHER -
30 01B0163 6 WASHER -
31 02B0073 4 BEARING -
32 02B0980 2 NIPPLE -
33 06b0021 4 SEAL - 1 6 12 17
34 06B0101 2 SEAL -
35 02b0016 1 BEARING 173.5
36 02B2411 1 GEARBOX 65.3 26 28
TORQUE TO 77N.m
10
TORQUE TO 528N.m
9
14
8
25
11
35 27
7 12
25 29
19
12
14
ISOMETRIC VIEW
19
SCALE 1:20
TORQUE TO 528N.m EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW
- - - - MASS: 1054.0kg TURNTABLE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SC 30/05/14 TTU 4 0823
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 11R0201 1 ROTARY UNION GROUP 64.8
2 31R0554 1 PROXIMITY HOUSING 0.9
3 01b0598 1 NUT 0.1
4 01B1290 4 WASHER -
5 01b1692 4 SCREW -
6 10117151 1 SENSOR 0.1
7 30R8771 1 SENSING PLATE 0.7
8 30R5140 1 PIN 0.5
9 10103877 1 FITTING -
10 10121799 1 CONDUIT 0.4
INSTALL THIS
SIDE FACING
TOWARDS THE
GRAPPLE
24 PIN CONNECTOR TYPE ISOMETRIC VIEW
ASSEMBLED VIEW

- - - - - - - - MASS: 67.6kg ROTARY UNION GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN BDS 25/11/14
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN BDS 25/11/14 TRU 9-PORT 104° DC PROXY
- -
A0
- - - - - - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1
6
2
10
4
5

- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

A A
0.5
3±
9 6
2 7
FRONT VIEW
10
SECTION A-A
SCALE 1 : 2

- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 30R4629 1 ROTARY UNION SPOOL 23.9
2 30R0298 1 THRUST BEARING -
3 30R4492 1 THRUST BEARING -
4 30R6682 1 ROTARY UNION SLEEVE 31.4
5 30R4631 1 ROTARY UNION SPOOL CAP 1.6
6 30R4632 1 THRUST BEARING 0.1
7 30R4634 1 ROTARY UNION CAP 2.3
8 06B0036 1 SEAL -
9 06B0037 6 SEAL -
10 06B0038 9 SEAL -
12 06B0057 1 SEAL -
13 01B0108 4 SCREW -
14 01b0307 4 BOLT 0.1
15 01b0437 4 WASHER -
16 01B0987 1 SCREW -
17 01B0988 6 SCREW -
18 01B1306 4 WASHER -
19 01B1322 4 SCREW -
20 01B2032 1 PIN -
21 01B2034 1 PIN -
22 01B2133 2 SCREW -
23 02B0080 1 PLUG -
24 03B0619 3 PLUG -
25 03B1037 2 PLUG 0.1
27 30R4635 1 ANTI-ROTATION PLATE -
28 30R5428 1 COVER -
30 03B0550 8 NIPPLE 0.1
31 03B2036 1 NIPPLE -
32 03B1819 9 CAP 0.1
33 10101985 2 FITTING -
34 10101998 3 FITTING 0.1
35 10103274 1 FITTING 0.2
36 10121073 1 CONDUIT 0.3
37 10121072 1 CONDUIT 0.1
38 10102830 1 CONNECTOR 0.5
39 10101984 1 FITTING 0.1
40 10105129 1 CONNECTOR 0.1
41 10117213 1 SLIP RING -
42 06B0081 1 SEAL 2.3
06K0001 SEAL KIT

INCLUDES:
ISOMETRIC VIEW
- - SCALE 1:2.5 UNO 3rd ANGLE PROJECTION U.N.O. A3

- - - - MASS: 64.8kg ROTARY UNION GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN ARC 08/09/11
28630 E0 ITEM 11 REPLACED BY ITEM 42 WS SP JLP 24/03/17 -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
19302 D0 RPLACE ITEM 26 WITH 41 JLP MTM RH 06/12/12 2 DRAWN ARC 08/09/11 TRU 9-PORT
18477 C0 ADDED ITEMS 36 - 40, INCREASED QTY OF ITEMS 33 & 34 BY 1 HK MTM HK 25/10/12 2 This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
15418
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK SJF 09/09/11
E0
B0 REMOVED ITEM 29 & ADDED ITEMS 30 - 35 HK MTM HK 23/08/12 2 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D ARC 16/09/11 SHEET 1 of 3 11R0201 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

10
9 17
7
10
9
6
10
9 20
10 42
5 13
9 22
10 28
9 21 19
18
10
2
12
9 19
4
10
35 33 34 36
3 16
41
1
37 34 33 39 38 40 REUSE
15 27 ORIGINAL
FASTENERS
30
32 30
31 32 23
14 32
8
34
24 25

IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
15418
E0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

19 18 28 41
42
12
27
16 5
35
6 4
A
10
2
9
10
23
9
10
9
A 10
9
10
TOP VIEW
9
ELECTRICAL CONDUITS HIDDEN FOR CLARITY 10

9
8
10
3
32
32 30 1
24 SECTION A-A 24
SCALE 1 : 2
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
15418
E0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R1590 1 BOOM GROUP 2781.6
2 23R0180 2 LABEL -
3 10106700 2 LABEL -
4 10105761 2 LABEL -
5 10103877 1 FITTING 0.1
6 10101997 1 FITTING 0.1
7 31R3577 1 CONDUIT 0.3
8 10104013 2 LOCKNUT -
9 01B1581 8 SCREW -
10 10102940 2 SENSOR 0.2
11 10102031 2 NIPPLE -
12 10128806 1 CABLE 2.5
13 10128167 1 LABEL -
1 3
3
105
13
4
90
210.5
2 70
2
4
3
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
4
1 3
108 240
1 2
85
194
210.5
70 2
4
LEFT SIDE VIEW
LABELS DETAIL
- - - - MASS: 2792.0kg BOOM ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN DSS 01/12/16
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN DSS 01/12/16 BMA 2 3000-1800-4-3 2500kg ES/EN
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

12
10
9
8
11
7
8
11
9
10
5
6
DETAIL A
SCALE 1 : 5
ELECTRICAL DETAIL
- - - - MASS: 2792.0kg BOOM ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN DSS 01/12/16 BMA 2 3000-1800-4-3 2500kg ES/EN
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R1589 1 OUTER BOOM GROUP 1077.2
2 10R9133 1 INTERMEDIATE BOOM GROUP 758.0
3 10R9465 1 INNER BOOM GROUP 404.0
4 12R1588 1 CABLETRAY GROUP 84.8
6 31R7377 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 19.4

- - - - MASS: 2781.5kg BOOM GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN BJ 19/05/14
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BJ 19/05/14 BMA 2 3000-1800-4-3
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R7813 1 OUTER BOOM ASSEMBLY 997.8
2 31R6054 1 ROPE TENSIONING MOUNT 11.4
3 30R0467 2 CLAMP 3.6
4 31R1825 1 DISC SHIM 1.3
5 31R6042 1 GUIDE 5.5
6 30R3462 2 CABLE GUIDE PIN 0.1
7 30R0230 2 SCREW 0.2
8 30R6835 2 RETAINER 0.3
9 30R1915 2 WIPER 0.1
10 31R7172 1 RETAINER 0.3
11 30R0464 1 WIPER 0.1
12 30R0201 2 RETAINER 0.6
13 30R7510 1 STRAIGHT PIN 14.1
14 31R7204 1 COVER 7.7
15 31R6055 1 COVER 9.6
17 31R0493 4 PAD 0.3
18 31R3790 2 PAD 0.3
19 31R0492 2 PAD 0.3
20 30R7879 4 RETAINER 0.4
21 30R6834 2 RETAINER 0.1
22 30R6525 2 RETAINER 0.3
23 30R7304 2 RETAINER 0.4
24 30R7303 2 RETAINER 0.5
25 02B0073 4 BEARING -
26 06b0021 4 SEAL -
27 02B2244 2 PLUG -
28 02B0953 2 BEARING -
29 06B0240 4 SEAL -
30 02B2275 4 BEARING -
31 01B0295 18 WASHER -
32 01B0176 12 BOLT -
33 03B0619 4 PLUG -
34 01B2401 4 NUT 0.2
35 01B0175 6 BOLT -
36 01B1404 10 WASHER -
37 01b0235 4 SCREW -
38 01B0165 6 WASHER -
39 01b0051 6 BOLT -
40 01B1607 4 SCREW -
41 01B1475 4 SCREW -
42 01b0236 4 SCREW -
43 01B1001 8 SCREW -
44 01B1047 2 WASHER -
45 01B0953 2 BOLT -
46 01B0438 2 NUT -
ISOMETRIC VIEW
47 01B0352 4 SCREW 0.1
48 02B0980 10 NIPPLE -
49 32R2143 1 COVER 9.0

- - - - MASS: 1077.2kg OUTER BOOM GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BJ 19/05/14 BMA 2 3000-1800-4
27990 B0
B0
ITEM 16 HOSE COVER REPLACED WITH ITEM 49 DSS SP LO 23/11/16 - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

27
2
34 35
4 31
32
36
31
36
1 15
14
47
28
46
44 7
6
13 12 37
3 45
27
33
38
39
49
48
5 41
25 26
11
26
10 20
25
43 17
9 31
32
43
8 30 29 23 40
31 32 48
21 19
20 17 31 32 48
42 22 48 18 24 29
- - - - MASS: 1077.2kg OUTER BOOM GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BJ 19/05/14 BMA 2 3000-1800-4
27990 B0
B0
ITEM 16 HOSE COVER REPLACED WITH ITEM 49 DSS SP LO 23/11/16 - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R7375 1 INTERMEDIATE BOOM ASSEMBLY 650.2
2 31R6039 4 ROPE SHEAVE 14.4
3 30R5915 4 SPINDLE 1.1 16
4 31R7160 1 SHEAVE GUARD 2.6 7
5 31R7159 1 SHEAVE GUARD 2.6 17
6 30R0174 2 RETAINER 1.9 18 25
7 31R6059 1 RETAINER 0.9 6
8 31R0499 2 RETAINER 0.2
9 30R7597 1 RETAINER 1.1 21
10 31R6050 1 RETAINER 0.4
11 31R6046 1 WIPER 0.7
12 31R6044 1 RETAINER 1.8
13 30R0173 6 BRACKET 2.7
14 30R0181 6 PAD 0.7 26
15 31R1461 2 PAD 0.3
16 31R0497 4 PAD 0.5
17 31R6060 2 SHIM 0.1 8
18 31R5245 30 SHIM 0.2
19 31R5246 6 SHIM 0.1
20 02b0037 4 BEARING 0.1 18
21 01B0668 4 SCREW 0.4 4
22 01B1001 10 SCREW - 24
23 01b0236 18 SCREW -
24 01b0235 4 SCREW - 5
25 01B2153 4 SCREW -
26 01B0110 4 SCREW -
27 06b0005 4 SEAL - 16
28 06B0033 4 SEAL -
29 02B0980 12 NIPPLE - 1
23
23
10
11 18
13
12 29
22
15
29
19
3 27 20 2 28 29
14
9
23

- - - - MASS: 758.0kg INTERMEDIATE BOOM GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN AjN 14/11/12
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SC 20/11/12
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK MTM 20/11/12 BMA 2 3000 A0
APP'D AjN 22/11/12 10R9133 VER
Code

Rev.

1 31R7746 1 INNER BOOM ASSEMBLY 396.9
2 31R7179 2 RETAINER 0.2
3 30R6969 2 STOP 0.2
4 31R0504 1 RETAINER 0.4 5
5 31R1461 2 PAD 0.3
6 31R2308 2 PAD 0.4 7
7 31R5246 6 SHIM 0.1
8 31R5247 6 SHIM 0.1
9 30R7323 10 SHIM - 4
10 01B1301 2 PIN -
11 01B1786 2 SCREW -
12 01B0176 4 BOLT -
13 01B0295 4 WASHER -
14 01B1496 4 SCREW -
15 01B1755 12 SCREW -
14
8 2 13 12
TORQUE TO 650 Nm 10 9
15
1
11

- - - - MASS: 401.9kg INNER BOOM GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DRAWN BAS 22/01/13
- - - - CHECK
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be MTM 24/01/13 BMA 2 3000-3
- - - - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party A0
APP'D AjN 25/01/13 10R9465 VER
Code

Rev.

1 31R6326 1 BRACKET 0.8
2 30R8130 1 HOUSING 0.2
3 30R8073 1 RETAINER 0.1
4 10117151 1 SENSOR 0.1
5 10102012 1 FITTING 0.1
6 01b1049 2 NUT -
7 01b1045 2 WASHER -
8 01B0954 2 BOLT -
1 7 6 5
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 1.3kg PROXIMITY GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN MK 22/02/13 TTU 4
-
A0
APP'D SJF 27/02/13 SHEET 1 of 1 10R9559 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 03B3698 1 CYLINDER 136.3
2 30R6922 1 PAD 1.0
3 02B0608 1 BEARING -
5 01B0939 1 WASHER 0.1
6 01b0943 1 NUT 0.3
7 03B0075 2 FITTING 0.1
7 4 3

6 5 2 1

- - - - DRAWN SC 19/11/12
- - - - CHECK
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be MTM 20/11/12 BMA 2 EXTEND RETRACT 3000
APP'D AjN 22/11/12 10R9136 VER
Code

Rev.

1 03B3751 1 CYLINDER 138.9
2 31R0682 1 PIN 3.3
3 31R0432 1 PIN 6.4
4 01B0295 2 WASHER -
5 01B0177 2 BOLT -
6 03b0261 1 CARTRIDGE 0.2
8 03B1522 3 NIPPLE - 8 11
9 03B1564 2 ELBOW -
10 03B1566 4 NIPPLE -
11 03B1708 1 ELBOW -
12 02B0980 1 NIPPLE -
13 01B1081 2 SCREW -
2
4
5
10 9
8
10
1
10
6 8
13
7
3 12 4 5

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN MK 22/02/13 BMA 2 RAISE LOWER CLEVIS 1800
- -
A0
APP'D AjN 22/02/13 SHEET 1 of 1 10R9544 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R7378 1 CABLETRAY 39.7
2 31R7380 1 COVER ASSEMBLY 7.6 19
4 31R7381 1 CABLETRAY 18.6 5
5 31R7382 1 BRACKET ASSEMBLY 1.6
6 10R9138 1 CABLEVEYOR GROUP 7.0 23
7 30R0163 1 CLAMP 1.0
8 30R0166 1 CLAMP 1.2
9 30R0165 1 PAD 0.2
24
10 01B1306 12 WASHER -
11 01B1305 8 NUT - 4
12 01B1641 4 SCREW - 18
13 01B1096 16 SCREW - 21
14 01B0295 2 WASHER - 7
15 01B0176 2 BOLT - 20
16 01b1049 2 NUT -
8
17 01b1045 2 WASHER -
18 01B1012 2 SCREW -
19 01B1360 1 BOLT -
20 01B1137 1 NUT -
21 01b1133 1 WASHER - 15
22 01B1398 4 SCREW -
23 01B0053 2 BOLT - 14
24 01B0165 2 WASHER - 10 11
11 10
17
22
16
10
6
9
12 13
3
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:15 1

- - - - - - - - MASS: 84.8kg CABLETRAY GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN BJ 19/05/14
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN BJ 19/05/14 BMA 2 3000
-
A0
- - - - - - - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 02B2377 33 LINK 0.2
2 02B0278 1 BRACKET 2.0
FIXED END - MOUNTING

BRACKET WITH PIN
MOVING END - MOUNTING 1
BRACKET WITH BORE
ISOMETRIC VIEW
2375 OA
2211
123
45

CHAIN PITCH = 67mm

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SC 19/11/12
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK MTM 20/11/12 BMA 2 3500.125.100x33 KMA PIVOTING A0
APP'D AjN 22/11/12 10R9138 VER
Code

Rev.

1 12R1620 1 GRAPPLE GROUP 1401.4
2 01B2272 2 WASHER -
3 01B2274 6 SCREW -
4 01B1994 2 WASHER -
5 01B2268 4 SCREW -
6 10100273 6 TERMINAL -
7 10117214 2 BUTTON - 10
8 10127394 1 GLAND 0.1 23
9 10100858 1 LABEL -
10 10101998 2 FITTING 0.1 14
11 10106627 2 CONNECTOR 0.1 10
12 10102635 2 LIGHT -
11
13 10102638 1 LINK - 1 22
14 30R7783 1 CONDUIT 0.1
15 30R7670 2 GASKET - 5
16 30R7782 1 DIN RAIL -
25 8
17 10100270 4 TERMINAL - 16
18 10100275 1 CAP -
19 10111602 2 TERMINAL -
20 10123409 1 TERMINAL -
21 10100277 1 CAP - 17
22 01B2266 4 WASHER -
23 10102034 1 FITTING - 9
24 10106711 1 LABEL -
25 10128221 1 LABEL - 18
26 23R0263 2 LABEL -
27 10101937 2 LABEL -
28 10106345 1 LABEL - 19
29 10106585 1 LABEL -
3
2
4
26
12 3 15 20 21 13 6 7 24 27
29
28
26

- - - - MASS: 1402.4kg GRAPPLE ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN AM 28/11/16 GRP RUSSELL 7 2500kg DC ES/EN
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

38 TYP
110 TYP
BOTH SIDES
46.5 TYP
BOTH SIDES
120 51.5 TYP
45 TYP
57
1
40
27
92
25
26
24
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
27
296
1
20
29
28 25
26
FRONT VIEW
LABELS DETAIL
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

10
14
10
11
A
5
22
17
18
23 9
19
8
3
4
15 2
12
3 16 6 21 20 13 7
DETAIL A
SCALE 1 : 5
ELECTRICAL DETAIL
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 30R7657 1 GRAPPLE HEAD 64.7
2 30R7658 1 GRAPPLE RAISE ARM LEFT 44.4
3 30R7659 1 GRAPPLE RAISE ARM RIGHT 44.3
4 30R7660 1 GRAPPLE ROLL PLATE ASSEMBLY 77.7
5 30R7661 1 GRAPPLE SLEW PLATE 82.1
6 30R7662 1 COVER 48.8
7 30R7663 1 COVER 43.7
8 30R7664 1 GRAPPLE MOUNT PLATE 76.6
9 30R7665 1 BRACKET 1.0
11 30R7667 2 SHAFT 0.2
12 30R7668 2 LID 0.9
13 30R7669 2 GASKET -
14 30R7726 1 ROLL STOP 2.6
15 30R7727 1 ROLL LIMITER 11.4
16 31R0119 1 BRACKET 0.2
17 03B1518 1 ELBOW 0.1
18 01b0051 32 BOLT -
19 01B0165 32 WASHER -
20 01B0108 4 SCREW -
21 01B1755 84 SCREW -
22 01B1354 8 SCREW -
23 01B2137 8 SCREW 0.2
24 01B1771 12 SCREW 0.2
25 03B1299 2 FITTING 0.2
26 03B1388 2 ELBOW 0.1
27 03B1431 2 BULKHEAD 0.2
28 03B1522 4 NIPPLE -
29 03B1692 3 ACTUATOR 292.2
30 03B1524 6 ELBOW 0.1
31 31R0520 2 HOSE ASSEMBLY 0.7
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - - - - - MASS: 1401.7kg GRAPPLE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN BJ 20/05/14 GRP RUSSELL 7 2500kg
-
A0
- - - - - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D BMS 05/06/14 SHEET 1 of 2 12R1620 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

HOSE QTY RME No.
GRAPPLE RAISE/LOWER 2 31R0520
1 31R0522
R/L ACTUATOR TO BULKHEAD PLATE
7 1 31R0524
GRAPPLE ROLL 2 31R0526
GRAPPLE TOOL BULKHEAD 2 31R0530
19 NOTE: HOSES NOT SHOWN

18
8
21
20
INSTALLATION TORQUE - 650 Nm
10
11
9
13
29 12
22
30
21
INSTALLATION TORQUE - 650 Nm 5 23 14 INSTALLATION TORQUE - 240 Nm

27
INSTALLATION TORQUE - 650 Nm 23
24 INSTALLATION TORQUE - 650 Nm
21
INSTALLATION TORQUE - 240 Nm 15
30
21 23 21
4
6
1
19
30
18
3 25
28
21
28
26
29
30 23
17
18 19
2 EXPLODED
21 16 ISOMETRIC VIEW
- - - - - - - - MASS: 1401.7kg GRAPPLE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN BJ 20/05/14 GRP RUSSELL 7 2500kg
-
A0
- - - - - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 32R0057 1 GRAPPLE TOOL BODY 67.9 19 01B0163 3 WASHER -
2 10R8808 1 CYLINDER GROUP 11.0 20 01b1376 2 PIN -
3 31R6626 1 GRAPPLE TOOL SLIDE ASSEMBLY 17.6 21 01B1324 1 PIN -
4 31R6627 1 GRAPPLE TOOL SLIDE ASSEMBLY 17.5 22 01B0218 4 SCREW -
5 31R0180 2 PIN 1.5 23 01B0350 2 SCREW -
6 30R9993 2 BOLT 0.3 24 01B0316 2 BOLT 0.2
7 31R6632 1 PIN 4.9 25 01b0437 2 WASHER -
8 31R0190 1 BRACKET 3.3 26 01B1354 1 SCREW -
9 30R9997 2 COLLAR 0.2 27 01B0295 4 WASHER -
10 03B3699 1 MANIFOLD 0.1 28 01B0177 4 BOLT -
11 30R2071 1 PIN 5.3 29 31R6634 4 HOSE ASSEMBLY 0.6
12 30R2072 2 END CAP 0.4
NOTE: 2 ONLY SHOWN ITEM 29
13 31R0657 2 PIN 0.1
14 03B1522 4 NIPPLE - 28 14
15 10R9160 1 PLATE GROUP 31.2 27 10
16 10R9159 1 LOAD RING GROUP 12.1
17 31R6635 3 SAFETY ASSEMBLY - 12 14 29
18 01b0981 3 SCREW - 11 4
6
8
25 24
1
13
21 9 20
17
17
19 18
16
26 15
2
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:10
3 5
7
22 9 20
19 18 13
23
- - - - MASS: 177.7kg GRAPPLE TOOL GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BAS 11/02/15 GRT 2 2500kg
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 03B2842 1 CYLINDER 8.8
2 31R0001 2 PIN 0.2
3 30R9999 2 BEARING 0.5
4 01B1324 2 PIN -
4
5 03B1522 2 NIPPLE -
6 03B0206 1 CARTRIDGE -
3
1
2
7

- - - - - - - - MASS: 11.0kg CYLINDER GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN BAH 14/09/12
- - - - - - - - IF IN DOUBT- ASK RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN MDL 14/09/12
- - - - - - - - CHECK
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be MTM 18/09/12 GRT EXTEND RETRACT
- - - - - - - - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party A0
APP'D BAH 19/09/12 10R8808 VER
Code

Rev.

1 31R6630 1 PLATE 30.9
2 01B0350 4 SCREW -
2 1

- - - - MASS: 31.2kg PLATE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DRAWN AM 19/11/12
- - - - CHECK
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be MTM 05/12/12 GRAPPLE SHIELD 2500kg
APP'D LO 17/12/12 10R9160 VER
Code

Rev.

ITEM No. PART No. Qty TITLE M(kg)ea
1 31R6629 1 LOAD RING ASSEMBLY 8.3 1
2 01B0352 4 SCREW 0.1
3 02B3078 1 PLUG -
4 02B3082 1 MAGNET 0.1
5 02B0197 1 SHACKLE 0.6
6 02B2569 1 HOOK 2.6
ISOMETRIC VIEW EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 12.1kg LOAD RING GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN AM 15/11/12
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK MTM 05/12/12 90° CORNER 2500kg A0
APP'D LO 17/12/12 10R9159 VER
Code

Rev.

1 32R2155 1 SEAT BRACKET ASSEMBLY 7.8
2 32R2170 1 BRACKET 11.0
3 32R2156 1 BRACKET 10.1
4 01B0176 4 BOLT -
5 01B0295 4 WASHER - 14
6 01b0052 8 BOLT -
7 01B0163 10 WASHER -
8 01B0167 6 NUT -
7
9 01B0306 4 BOLT 0.1
10 01B0437 4 WASHER -
11 01b0952 3 SCREW -
3 8
12 01b1045 6 WASHER -
13 01b1049 3 NUT -
14 01B0053 2 BOLT -
11 12 12 13
9 10
5 4
7
1

- - - - - - - - MASS: 29.8kg ADAPTER GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN DSS 29/11/16
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN KKS 02/12/16 COT 4 MEDIUM
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R4765 1 ENCLOSURE GROUP 68.0
2 10128166 1 LABEL -
3 10106704 1 LABEL -
4 10131056 1 LABEL -
5 10131720 1 LABEL -
6 10129181 1 LABEL -
7 10103192 1 LABEL -
8 10130533 1 LABEL -
9 10102862 1 LABEL -
10 10103191 1 LABEL -
11 10131639 1 LABEL -
12 10130538 1 LABEL -
13 10130536 1 LABEL -
14 10132838 1 LABEL -
15 10100689 10 GLAND -
16 10104678 2 NUT -
17 10102033 2 PLUG -
18 10105381 2 DRAIN -
19 10101998 3 FITTING 0.1
20 10101985 1 FITTING -
21 10103274 1 FITTING 0.2
22 10103275 3 FITTING -
23 10102028 4 LOCKNUT -
24 10102874 8 FITTING -
25 10102002 6 FITTING -
26 10104013 8 LOCKNUT -
27 10102034 2 FITTING -
28 10117593 2 NUT -
30 01B1384 6 WASHER -
31 01B2268 6 SCREW -
32 01B2652 1 SCREW -
33 01B1045 2 WASHER -
34 01B1049 1 NUT -
35 30R9078 1 WASHER -
36 10117523 2 CONNECTOR -
37 10127852 1 LOOPBACK GROUP 0.2
38 01B1885 8 SCREW -
39 01B1305 8 NUT -
40 10117530 1 CONNECTOR -
41 10132224 1 CABLE GROUP 1.1
42 10106723 4 FITTING -
43 10117214 1 BUTTON -
44 10117896 1 SWITCH 0.1
45 10105675 1 BUTTON 0.1
46 10105678 2 BUTTON 0.1
47 10102666 2 BUTTON 0.1
48 10102667 2 BOOT -
49 10105682 1 BUTTON 0.1
50 10105689 5 ADAPTER - ISOMETRIC VIEW
51 10103967 6 CONTACT BLOCK 0.1
52 10105676 1 LIGHT 0.1
53 10103968 2 CONTACT BLOCK -
54 10105679 3 LIGHT 0.1
55 10105683 1 LIGHT 0.1
56 10102761 2 CONTACT BLOCK 0.2
57 03B1527 2 NIPPLE -
58 10102012 2 FITTING 0.1
59 01B2026 4 SCREW -

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN DSS 29/11/16 COT JBOX2 PENDANT TURNTABLE 4 JOYSTICK
LIGHT RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

4 59
5 23
29 26 23
22 28
58 21
24 27
20 26
24
29 19 58
26
57 28
24 26
25
24 27 26
24 25
26
1 24 25
25 26
57 24 26
25
24
25
19
23
19
23
22
22
17 16
18 15
39
32 33 35 33 34
38
40 36
6
41
36 18
37
29
30 31

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

42
42
43 7
48
10
9
47 47
50
49
48 8
12
11 56
46 56 50 50
50
51 55 53
46 13
45 50
42 14 51 54 51
9 8 7 42 54 51 54
53 51
51 52
44
BUTTON PANEL REAR
PICTORIAL EXPLODED VIEW
BUTTON PANEL
10 ISOMETRIC EXPLODED VIEW
12
13
11
14
BUTTON PANEL BUTTON PANEL

OUTSIDE VIEW INSIDE VIEW

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK COT JBOX2 PENDANT TURNTABLE 4 JOYSTICK RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN DSS 29/11/16 LIGHT RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

29
36
36
37 16 17
29
15
22 22 19 19 24 24 24 24 58 27 27 58 19 22
23 23 19 19 25 25 25 25 24 28 28 24 20 23
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 21
23
RIGHT SIDE VIEW REAR VIEW
LOCATION OF MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

2
70
2
6
10
3
101
7
3
28
621
RIGHT SIDE VIEW

FRONT VIEW
LOCATION OF LABELS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 32R2110 1 CABINET ASSEMBLY 31.7
2 32R2160 1 DOOR ASSEMBLY 19.4
3 10135740 1 PLATE 15.0
4 02B2799 2 STRUT 0.5
5 02B0524 2 HINGE -
6 02B2557 2 SEAL - 4
7 02B0120 2 LATCH 0.2
8 31R2011 2 PLATE 0.1 13 12
9 01b1048 12 NUT -
10 01B2150 8 SCREW -
11 01B0955 6 BOLT -
12 01b1049 10 NUT -
13 01b1045 10 WASHER - 3
14 32R2113 1 SEAL 0.4
13
11
14
5
2
9
12
10
6
8
ISOMETRIC VIEW 7

- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN DS 28/11/16
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 28/11/16 COT JBOX2 PENDANT TURNTABLE 4
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R3472 1 CONSOLE GROUP 41.7
2 12R4826 1 VALVE GROUP 85.7
3 23R0215 1 LABEL -
4 23R0222 1 LABEL -
5 10103615 1 LABEL -
6 10103612 1 LABEL -
7 10118018 1 SENSOR 0.1
8 10102901 1 CABLE 0.1
9 01b1047 3 WASHER -
10 01b0952 3 SCREW -
11 01B1000 1 SCREW -
9 10 11
4
6
5 8 2
7
1
ISOMETRIC VIEW ISOMETRIC VIEW

LEVERS DISENGAGED LEVERS ENGAGED

- - - - MASS: 127.7kg CONSOLE ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 29/11/16 TQAMRM384 COT 4 SMALL ES/EN
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

13 3
25
VIEW A
4
27.6
20
30
30.1
6 5
97
167

LEVERS ENGAGED

- - - - MASS: 127.7kg CONSOLE ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 29/11/16 TQAMRM384 COT 4 SMALL ES/EN
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 30R7571 1 PIVOT PLATE 7.5
2 31R3979 1 BRACKET 10.5
3 31R6298 1 BRACKET 8.0
4 31R7167 1 COVER 11.0
5 30R0678 4 STOP - 6
6 31R6809 1 COVER 2.0
7 30R6663 1 STOP - 5
8 30R6411 1 PINNING BRACKET 1.3
9 30R5913 1 PIN STOP 0.3
10 30R5912 1 PIN 0.4
7
11 02B0980 1 NIPPLE -
12 02B2085 1 BEARING - 19
13 02B2086 1 BEARING -
14 01B0295 2 WASHER -
15 01B0178 5 BOLT - 22 23 17
16 01B0053 3 BOLT -
17 01B0163 7 WASHER -
18 01B1318 2 SCREW -
19 01B1897 1 SCREW -
20 01b0293 4 WASHER - 2 18 11 4
21 01b0297 4 NUT -
22 01B0052 4 BOLT -
23 01b0165 4 WASHER -
24 01B0167 3 NUT - 25 9 10
25 01B2626 2 PIN -
26 01B1475 1 SCREW -
22 23 17
24 17
15 14 8
13
12
26 16
3
1
15
20 21 21 20
ISOMETRIC VIEW ISOMETRIC VIEW

LEVERS DISENGAGED LEVERS ENGAGED

- - - - MASS: 41.7kg CONSOLE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN ARC 28/09/15 COT 7 SMALL
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 03B7405 1 VALVE 79.0
2 30R9566 8 BRACKET 0.1
3 30R9567 8 BRACKET -
4 30R6047 7 HANDLE 0.2
5 01b1049 8 NUT -
6 01B2626 16 PIN -
7 01B1629 8 SCREW -
8 30R7022 1 HANDLE 0.1
9 03B1531 7 ELBOW 0.1
10 03B1951 2 COUPLING -
8
11 03B1700 2 TEE 0.1
12 03B1848 1 NIPPLE - 6
13 03B0552 1 ELBOW 0.2 4
14 03B2023 1 ELBOW 0.3
15 03B1523 11 NIPPLE -
16 03B1518 5 ELBOW 0.1 5
17 03B0310 5 ELBOW 0.1
18 03B2007 2 NIPPLE 0.1
19 03B2085 1 ELBOW 0.1
20 03B2088 1 ELBOW 0.1 3
21 03B1569 3 NIPPLE 0.1 1
22 03B1885 1 ELBOW 0.1
23 03B1854 1 ELBOW 0.1 7
15
24 03B1570 2 ELBOW 0.1
25 03B1860 1 TEE 0.3
26 03B1388 2 ELBOW 0.1
17 2
16
6
10
18
20
19
9
9
11
15
9 10
26 22 23 21 13 12 14
EXPLODED REAR ISOMETRIC VIEW 21

11
24
25
24

- - - - MASS: 85.7kg VALVE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 29/11/16 TQAMRM356 COT 8 BANK
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R4808 1 SEAT GROUP 63.1
2 12R3454 1 CABLE GROUP 2.4

- - - - MASS: 65.5kg SEAT ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN DSS 05/12/16 COT JOYSTICK
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R8034 1 FRAME 11.8
2 32R2153 1 SEAT PLATFORM ASSEMBLY 15.3
3 12R0591 1 SEAT GROUP 33.8
4 30R9829 1 BRACKET 0.3
5 01B0053 6 BOLT -
6 01B0163 6 WASHER -
7 01b0165 6 WASHER -
8 01B2654 2 SCREW - 3
9 01B1305 2 NUT -
10 31R8165 1 PLATE 1.3
11 02B0954 2 INDEXING PLUNGER -
ISOMETRIC VIEW
11 10 8 9
4 6 7 5

- - - - MASS: 63.1kg SEAT GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 29/11/16 COT JOYSTICK
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R8685 1 BRACKET 12.0
2 02B2433 1 SEAT 19.6
3 02B0233 1 SEAT BELT 2.0
4 10117523 1 CONNECTOR -
6 01B1296 4 NUT -
7 01B1994 4 WASHER -
8 01B0167 4 NUT -
9 01B0163 4 WASHER -
10 01B0053 4 BOLT -
11 10117529 1 CONNECTOR -
12 01B1319 4 SCREW - 3
13 01B0295 2 WASHER - 13
10
9 4
7
6
11
12
ISOMETRIC VIEW
8 1

- - - - MASS: 33.8kg SEAT GROUP DRAWING STATUS
25525 E0 ADDED ITEM 13 DSS SP BDS 11/10/16 -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
26979 D0 REPLACE ITEM 5 (01B1408) WITH ITEM 12 (01B1319) ARC SC ARC 31/03/16 1 DRAWN MK 30/08/13 COT JOYSTICK CONNECTOR
25511 C0 ADDED ITEM 11 SP BAS RH 17/01/14 1 This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
25188 B0
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK SC 30/08/13
E0
TITLE BLOCK DESCRIPTION CHANGE SJF SC SJF 30/10/13 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10132134 1 CABLE 1.4
2 10117529 1 CONNECTOR -
3 10118142 2 CONNECTOR 0.1
4 10117548 2 GLAND 0.2
5 10117530 1 CONNECTOR -
6 10117533 41 PIN -
7 10117534 41 PIN -
9 10128644 1 SHEATH 0.2 9
MARK CABLE WITH ITEM NUMBER "12R3454"

COVER WITH CLEAR HEATSHRINK"10128620"
3
5
ISOMETRIC VIEW 7
SCALE 1:5

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN AM 24/09/15 JOYSTICK HARTING CRIMP 41 WAY DD42
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

Pin No. of Cable Core No. Pin No. of Male
Female
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 8 8
9 9 9
10 10 10
11 11 11
PE (EARTH) 12 12 12 PE (EARTH)
13 13 13
14 14 14
15 15 15
16 16 16
17 17 17
18 18 18
19 19 19
20 20 20
21 21 21
22 22 22
23 23 23
24 24 24
25 25 25
26 26 26
27 27 27
28 28 28
29 29 29
30 30 30
31 31 31
32 32 32
33 33 33
34 34 34
35 35 35
36 36 36
37 37 37
FEMALE 38 38 38 MALE
#10117530 39 39 39
40 40 40 #10117529
41 41 41
PE (EARTH) green / yellow PE (EARTH)
Contact Arrangement Contact Arrangement
As Viewed From Termination Side Terminate Green / Yellow Earth conductor at PE terminal As Viewed From Termination Side
at both ends of cable.
Crimp pins only using Harting Tool P/N 09 99 000 0021

(RS P/N313-6607)

- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN AM 24/09/15 JOYSTICK HARTING CRIMP 41 WAY DD42
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R3430 1 JOYSTICK GROUP 21.3
2 10104285 1 JOYSTICK 1.0
3 10132870 1 JOYSTICK 1.0
4 10117547 1 CONNECTOR 0.5
5 10102667 1 BOOT -
6 10117214 1 BUTTON -
7 10102666 1 BUTTON 0.1
8 10102761 1 CONTACT BLOCK 0.2
9 10132154 1 CABLE GROUP 3.5
10 10130467 1 CABLE GROUP 0.4
11 10130468 1 CABLE GROUP 0.5
12 10106723 1 FITTING -
13 10105678 1 BUTTON 0.1
14 10105679 1 LIGHT 0.1
15 10105689 1 ADAPTER -
16 10103967 1 CONTACT BLOCK 0.1
17 10132158 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY -
18 10129164 1 LABEL -
19 10132113 1 LABEL -
20 01B1453 4 SCREW -
21 10103612 1 LABEL -
22 10136604 1 LABEL -
18
11 TOP VIEW TOP VIEW

LH SIDE RH SIDE
2
SCALE 1:3 SCALE 1:3
5
19
13 7
22 6
3 15
8
16
1 10
12
17
14
21
20
9 ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:10

- - - - MASS: 24.6kg JOYSTICK ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN DSS 02/02/17 OJS RUSSELL 7 - ES/EN
-
A0
28524 A0 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION AS PER APPROVAL without prior written approval from RUSSELL MINERAL
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R8696 1 FRAME ASSEMBLY 11.6
2 31R8694 2 REST 2.2
3 32R0653 1 ENCLOSURE 2.4
4 31R9338 1 ENCLOSURE 2.4
5 31R8699 2 GASKET -
6 06B6559 2 PLUG -
7 01B1290 16 WASHER -
8 01B1885 16 SCREW -
9 01B1585 2 PIN -
10 01B1306 16 WASHER -
11 01B1900 4 KNOB -
12 10105381 2 DRAIN -
2
2
3
5
5
11
10 6 1
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:10
12
9

- - - - MASS: 21.3kg JOYSTICK GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BAS 29/09/15 OJS RUSSELL 7/8
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R1600 1 CABINET GROUP 66.6
3 10102279 1 ENCLOSURE 0.9
4 10102828 1 CABLE 0.1
5 10134297 1 PLUG -
6 10104011 1 LOCKNUT -
7 10128165 1 LABEL -
8 10125238 1 LABEL -
9 10106705 1 LABEL -
10 01B0953 4 BOLT -
11 01B1047 4 WASHER -
12 10100689 5 GLAND -
13 10101998 1 FITTING 0.1
14 10101997 1 FITTING 0.1
15 10135873 1 CABLE 0.3
16 10135874 1 CABLE 0.1
10
11
4
8
1
2
6
5
15
16
13 12
14
3
9

- - - - - - - - MASS: 82.3kg CABINET ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN DSS 29/11/16 COT 4/6
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 2 ALIGN TOP EDGES COLLINEAR 1
POSITION LABEL 15
CENTRALLY
120
ON THIS FACE
36
3 9
7
RIGHT SIDE VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW
CABINET SHOWN WITH COVER REMOVED
LABEL ITEMS
- - - - - - - - MASS: 82.3kg CABINET ARRANGEMENT DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN DSS 29/11/16 COT 4/6
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R9344 1 FRAME 25.4
2 31R9345 1 COVER 26.9
3 10R4062 1 MIRROR GROUP 12.7
4 10112784 1 PLATE 0.3
5 02B3306 2 HINGE 0.1
6 02B2588 1 GAS SPRING 0.7
7 02B2688 1 LATCH 0.1
8 01B1900 1 KNOB -
9 01B0295 5 WASHER -
10 01B0175 3 BOLT - 3
11 01B1049 2 NUT -
12 01B1045 2 WASHER -
13 01B1885 4 SCREW - 14
14 01B1305 2 NUT -
15 01B1306 2 WASHER - 16 15
16 01B1290 2 WASHER -
17 01B2665 2 BOLT - 9 10 8 1 7 13 13
18 01B1098 8 SCREW -
19 01B1137 8 NUT -
19
5 18
12
11 2
6
12
11
17 4
9
10
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 66.7kg CABINET GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SP 04/06/14 COT 4/6 DUAL SEATING JOYSTICK
TURNTABLE PROXY RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 03B4150 1 MANIFOLD 5.5
2 03B4163 1 MANIFOLD 3.0
3 03B3652 1 CAP 1.3
4 02B0980 4 NIPPLE -
5 01B1607 4 SCREW -
6 03B1893 6 CAP -
7 03B1434 5 COUPLING 0.1
8 03B1432 1 ELBOW 0.1
9 03B2039 1 NIPPLE 0.2
10 03B1587 1 NIPPLE -
11 03B1598 1 PLUG -
12 03B1522 12 NIPPLE -
13 03B1890 2 CAP -
14 03B2613 1 NIPPLE 0.7
15 03B0551 1 ELBOW 0.2
3
UNDER ISOMETRIC VIEW ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:5 SCALE 1:5
4
6
14
12
13 15
7
6 10 11 7 12
8
EXPLODED
EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW UNDER ISOMETRIC VIEW
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK MRM TTU SUPER W/ POS. SENSOR BOOM RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 30/11/16
CLASH RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 30R8088 1 MIRROR POLE 10.9
2 30R6275 1 MIRROR 1.8
3 01B1060 2 BOLT -
3 1

- - - - - - - - MASS: 12.7kg MIRROR GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN JMT 25/12/10
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN SP 23/07/2012 COT Ø305 POST 720 STANDARD
RT 22957 B0 CHANGED DESCRIPTION TO INCLUDE HIEGHT & STANDARD
B0
MBM SC SJF 15/07/2013 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 32R2149 1 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY 330.1
2 31R4281 4 BRACKET 2.1
3 32R1498 1 HANDRAIL ASSEMBLY 16.8
6 12R2897 1 COVER GROUP 30.3
7 12R2898 1 HOOK GROUP 4.5 18
8 10R8744 1 BEACON GROUP 9.6
9 02B0885 2 GRATING 12.3
10 02B2510 4 GRATING 16.1
11 30R8981 2 GATE 5.7
12 31R0095 1 GATE 7.9 9
13 30R8878 3 RETAINER -
14 31R0003 1 PENDANT HOLDER 1.0
15 02B2535 1 CLAMP BODY -
16 32R2154 2 SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 15.7
17 31R6825 1 MOUNT 0.1
18 01B1536 14 CLIP 0.1 28 29
19 01B0956 3 BOLT - 30 26
20 01B1047 3 WASHER -
21 01B2525 2 SCREW - 17 A
22 01B0439 22 NUT -
23 01B0435 30 WASHER - 7 23
24 01b0307 14 BOLT 0.1 6 11
25 01b0308 8 BOLT 0.1
26 01B0310 8 BOLT 0.1 10 16
27 01B0437 8 WASHER -
28 01B1878 1 SCREW - 22
29 01B1045 1 WASHER -
30 01B1049 1 NUT -
23 27 25 5
9 14 15
22
12
4 21 8
1 11
19
20
3
13
2
23
24
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:50
DETAIL A
SCALE 1 : 5 EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW
TYP 3 PLACES

- - - - MASS: 598.6kg PLATFORM GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 28/11/16 PLF STAIRS LEFT
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

2 01B3110 2 U BOLT 0.3
3 01B2090 4 WASHER -
4 01B2093 4 NUT -
4

- - - - MASS: 30.3kg COVER GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SL 25/06/15
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SL 25/06/2015 MRM HYP ELE
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 32R0351 1 HOOK 3.8
2 01B3110 2 U BOLT 0.3
3 01B2090 4 WASHER -
4 01B2093 4 NUT -
4
1

- - - - MASS: 4.5kg HOOK GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SL 25/06/15
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SL 25/06/2015 CABLE
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R6940 1 LIGHT POLE 8.3
2 31R6941 2 BRACKET 0.5
3 02B2535 1 CLAMP BODY 0.1
4 02B2437 1 BODY 0.1
5 10102946 1 BEACON 0.1
6 10101998 1 TERMINATOR 0.1
7 10104013 1 LOCKNUT -
8 10102002 1 FITTING 0.1
9 01B1994 2 WASHER - 1
10 01b1515 2 WASHER -
11 01B1993 2 SCREW - 5
12 01B2525 4 SCREW -
13 10R5050 1 ELECTRICAL KIT - FLASHING LIGHT POLE GROUP 9.8
9
7 10
8 11
12
3
2
13
12
ISOMETRIC VIEW 4
SCALE 1:20
2

- - - - MASS: 9.6kg BEACON GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SC 07/09/12
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK MTM 11/09/12 REMOVABLE PLF POLE 100dB AMBER A0
APP'D RH 11/09/12 10R8744 VER
Code

Rev.

1 10118390 1 CONDUIT 9.4
2 10102281 6 FERRULE -
3 10118395 1 CABLE 0.2
4 10118396 1 CABLE 0.2
5 10118397 1 CABLE 0.2

- - - - MASS: 9.8kg ELECTRICAL KIT DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN BT 07/03/12
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BT 08/03/12 FLASHING LIGHT POLE GROUP WIRING LOOM
25438
B0
B0 TITLE AND DESCRIPTION CHANGE IN TITLE BLOCK SJF BAS SJF 12/12/13 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D RH 21/03/12 SHEET 1 of 1 10R5050 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 32R2150 1 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY 325.5
2 31R4281 4 BRACKET 2.1
3 31R4289 1 HANDRAIL ASSEMBLY 18.4 15
6 12R2897 1 COVER GROUP 30.3
16
7 12R2898 1 HOOK GROUP 4.5
8 02B0885 2 GRATING 12.3 12
9 02B2510 4 GRATING 16.1
10 30R8981 2 GATE 5.7
11 31R0095 1 GATE 7.9
12 30R8878 3 RETAINER -
13 32R2154 2 SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 15.7
14 01B1536 14 CLIP 0.1
15 01B0956 3 BOLT -
16 01B1047 3 WASHER -
17 01B0439 22 NUT - 10
18 01B0435 30 WASHER -
19 01b0307 14 BOLT 0.1 8
DETAIL A 3
20 01b0308 8 BOLT 0.1
21 01B0310 8 BOLT 0.1
SCALE 1 : 5 14
22 01B0437 8 WASHER - TYP 3 PLACES
4
11
18 21
5
9
17
13
A 10
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:50 7
8
20 22 18
19
18
2
6

- - - - MASS: 583.1kg PLATFORM GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN KKS 28/11/16 PLF STAIRS RIGHT
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10R7222 1 REMOVABLE STAIRS GROUP 296.2
2 10106928 4 LABEL -
22.5
TYP
1
2
27.5 TYP
2
CROPPED
SECTION A-A
SCALE 1 : 2
2
20 20
A
A
8
8
2 1 2
CROPPED LEFT SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW

SCALE 1:5
LABEL ITEMS
- - - - MASS: 296.2kg REMOVABLE STAIRS DRAWING STATUS
- - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SC 24/11/16 ARRANGEMENT
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SC 28/11/16
- - - - This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL ORS ALUMINIUM PORTABLE 1704 ES/EN
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R4304 1 FRAME 50.5
2 31R4305 1 FRAME 50.5
3 31R0238 2 SUPPORT 2.0
4 31R0228 2 BRACE 2.3
5 31R4306 1 BRACE 3.1
6 31R0233 1 BRACE 7.3
7 31R0235 1 BRACE 2.4
8 02B0623 7 TREAD 3.6
9 02B2550 2 GRATING 18.0
12 31R0231 1 STANCHION 5.7
13 31R0234 2 GATE 5.1
14 31R0232 1 STANCHION 5.7
15 30R9226 2 GATE CATCH 0.5
16 30R9228 2 BRACKET 0.6
17 02B2627 4 WHEEL 5.7
18 30R8340 4 BRACKET 0.7
19 31R0265 3 SPACER 0.7
20 10R5599 3 HINGE GROUP 6.5
21 31R0263 6 BRACKET 0.4
22 01B0053 16 BOLT -
23 01B0163 32 WASHER -
24 01B0167 16 NUT -
25 01B0177 88 BOLT -
26 01b0293 196 WASHER -
27 01b0297 104 NUT -
28 01b0308 18 BOLT 0.1
29 01b0435 36 WASHER -
30 01b0439 16 NUT -
31 01B1480 2 BOLT -
32 01b1045 4 WASHER -
33 01b1049 2 NUT -
34 01b1243 2 PIN -
35 01B1536 8 CLIP 0.1
37 01b0176 4 BOLT -
38 01B0437 2 WASHER -
39 01B0239 12 SCREW -
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 296.3kg REMOVABLE STAIRS GROUP DRAWING STATUS
28880 F0 ITEM 36 REPLACED BY ITEM 39 SL SP JMS 4/05/2017 2 DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SJF 05/12/11
25098 E0 ADDED ITEM 38, QTY ITEMS 28 & 29 INCREASED SC BAS SC 1/09/2014 2
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
RT 20403 D0 ITEM 20(GROUP) REPLACES 20,21,22,23,24. ALL ITEMS FROM 20 REORDERED MB MTM SJF 21/06/2013 1 DRAWN BDS 6/12/2011 ORS ALUMINIUM PORTABLE 1704 44º
RT 19246 C0 REPLACE ITEM 32 WITH ITEM 43 MB SC BAH 13/12/2012 2 This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
RT 17294
F0
B0 ITEM 26 REPLACED BY IT 40, ADDED IT 41 & 42, CHANGED QTY IT 27 & 28 MDL MTM BAH 21/09/2012 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D DH 08/12/11 SHEET 1 of 2 10R7222 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

34
13
29
14 33
A 32
9 35 11
28 15
32
31
29
25
26
3
25 19 B
26 20 39 29 30 DETAIL A
21 SCALE 1 : 10
27 26 37
12 26 6 26
27 26 25
27 26
25 20 13 27 7
26
26 5
18
26
27 2
27
26 28 29
26
27 27
29 27 26 18 29 30 11 26
4
38 26 25
28 26
25
8 27
37 26
27 26
26
10 16
22 26
26 2
23 27 25
16 27 26
17 23 24 26
26 25 25
26 DETAIL B
SCALE 1 : 12.5
25

- - - - MASS: 296.3kg REMOVABLE STAIRS GROUP DRAWING STATUS
28880 F0 ITEM 36 REPLACED BY ITEM 39 SL SP JMS 4/05/2017 2 DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SJF 05/12/11
25098 E0 ADDED ITEM 38, QTY ITEMS 28 & 29 INCREASED SC BAS SC 1/09/2014 2
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
RT 20403 D0 ITEM 20(GROUP) REPLACES 20,21,22,23,24. ALL ITEMS FROM 20 REORDERED MB MTM SJF 21/06/2013 1 DRAWN BDS 6/12/2011 ORS ALUMINIUM PORTABLE 1704 44º
RT 19246 C0 REPLACE ITEM 32 WITH ITEM 43 MB SC BAH 13/12/2012 2 This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL
RT 17294
F0
B0 ITEM 26 REPLACED BY IT 40, ADDED IT 41 & 42, CHANGED QTY IT 27 & 28 MDL MTM BAH 21/09/2012 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D DH 08/12/11 SHEET 2 of 2 10R7222 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R6631 1 FOOT ASSEMBLY 2.4
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 22.4kg LINER INTERFACE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN AM 28/11/16 TQAMRM384 LNI ATTACHMENTS
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 31R3734 1 SEAT BRACKET 18.5
2 01B0306 4 BOLT 0.1
3 01B0437 4 WASHER -

- - - - MASS: 18.9kg DUAL SEATING GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN ARC 4/06/2014 ODS TTU 4/6
26436
B0
B0 UPDATED DESCRIPTION IN THE TITLE BLOCK SP SC SJF 9/10/2014 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10117322 1 RADIO 2.6
2 10117897 1 RADIO 4.2
3 10130161 1 CONNECTOR -
4 10117331 1 RADIO 6.8
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - - - - - MASS: 13.6kg RADIO CONTROL GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SRM 05/12/16
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN SRM 05/12/16 7 AXIS MRM RADIO WITH LINER RELEASE ENABLE
RADIO RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 12R3759 1 CABLE GROUP 34.7
2 10R5727 1 PLUG 0.7
3 10132877 1 PENDANT 2.7
3 1 2

- - - - - - - - MASS: 38.1kg REMOTE TRANSPORT CONTROL DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN SP 04/02/16
GROUP
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN SP 04/02/16
RTC 5 FUNCTION RME DRAWING NUMBER REV
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10112788 1 CABLE 31.7
2 10117548 2 GLAND 0.2
3 10102830 2 CONNECTOR 0.5
4 10102832 1 CONNECTOR 0.6
5 02B2215 1 SNODDER 0.4
6 10102834 1 CONNECTOR 0.6
5
1
MARK ITEM 8 HEATSHRINK

WITH ITEM NUMBER 12R3759
8
7
2
3
6

- - - - - - - - MASS: 34.7kg CABLE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN SP 15/02/16 CONTROL PENDANT 15m
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

Pin No. of Female Cable Core No. Pin No. of Male
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 8 8
9 9 9
10 10 10
11 11 11
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 14
15 15 15
16 16 16
17 17 17
18 18 18
19 N/C N/C
20 N/C N/C
21 N/C N/C
22 N/C N/C
23 N/C N/C
24 N/C N/C
PE green / yellow PE
10102832 10102834
CONTACTS NUMBER 19-24 ARE NOT USED
CONTACT ARRANGEMENT TERMINATE GREEN / YELLOW EARTH CONDUCTOR AT PE CONTACT ARRANGEMENT
AS VIEWED FROM TERMINATION SIDE TERMINAL AT BOTH ENDS OF CABLE. AS VIEWED FROM TERMINATION SIDE
BROKEN OUT SECTION BROKEN OUT SECTION

- - - - - - - - MASS: 34.7kg CABLE GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - - - - - DRAWN SP 15/02/16 CONTROL PENDANT 15m
-
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10102830 1 CONNECTOR 0.5
2 10101984 1 FITTING 0.1
4 10106580 1 GLAND ASSEMBLY -
5 10101985 1 FITTING -
6 10105129 1 CONNECTOR 0.1
FOR E-STOP LOOPBACK:

CONNECT PINS 3 TO 4 AND
5 TO 6 WITH 1.5mm² WIRE (GREY) EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 0.7kg PLUG DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN ARC 08/02/11 PENDANT WITH LOOP BACK
RT20662 B0 ADDED ITEM 5 - 10101985, REPLACED ITEM 3 WITH ITEM 6
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be CHECK OF 09/02/11
B0
JH FP MSM 18/04/13 1 manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party
APP'D RH 09/02/11 SHEET 1 of 1 10R5727 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10135707 1 REEL 106.6 2
2 01B0177 4 BOLT -
3 01b0293 8 WASHER -
4 01b0297 4 NUT - 1
5 10103372 1 HANDLE 0.1 3
6 10103374 1 CAP 0.1
7 10103373 1 PLUG 0.3
8 10101982 1 FITTING 0.1 3
9 10101983 1 FITTING 0.1
10 10102008 1 FITTING 0.1
4
10
9
8
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:10
7
- - - - MASS: 107.8kg CABLE REELER GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BAS 05/12/16 OCR 23m CW 745mm 25mm² DS9 480V
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 10105973 1 LIGHT 3.9
2 10106693 1 CORD 0.2
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - - MASS: 4.08kg LIGHT GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - - - DO NOT SCALE DESIGN DH 22/03/11
- - - - - IF IN DOUBT- ASK RELEASED
- - - - - DRAWN DH 22/03/11
- - - - - CHECK
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY LTD and must not be JMS 24/03/11 ELE LED 18W
- - - - - manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third party A0
APP'D DH 24/03/11 10106188 VER
Code

Rev.

1 32R1987 1 ENCLOSURE 18.1
2 30R1144 1 RUBBER FLAP 0.8
3 30R1145 1 BRACKET 0.3
4 01B1133 8 WASHER -
5 01B1137 4 NUT -
6 01B1060 8 BOLT -
7 10103371 1 ENCLOSURE 0.3
8 10103370 1 SOCKET 0.6
1
4
6
7
8
5
4
2
6 3
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 20.2kg FEMALE DECONTACTOR GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN JLP 02/12/16 OFD IEC 100A DS9
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 32R2181 1 COVER 19.0
2 32R2177 2 COVER 14.1
3 32R2180 1 COVER 12.7
4 32R2179 1 COVER 30.0
5 32R2178 1 COVER 12.2
1
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SCALE 1:100
2

- - - - MASS: 102.2kg MACHINE COVERS GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN SRM 30/11/16 OMC TQAMRM384
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 30R8668 1 MRM FRONT PINNING BLOCK 101.0
2 30R8669 1 MRM FRONT PINNING BLOCK 101.0
3 30R6929 2 REAR TIEDOWN PLATE 49.0
4 30R9599 2 COVER 36.2
5 01b0310 2 BOLT 0.1
6 01b0437 2 WASHER - 4
7 30R8229 2 BUSH 0.1
8 30R8182 2 LATCH 0.2
9 30R8159 2 PINNING BLOCK SHIM 11.7
4
3
11
10
9 5
7
1
8
EXPLODED ISOMETRIC VIEW DETAIL A

SCALE 1 : 5

- - - - MASS: 445.6kg TIEDOWN GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN NB 29/11/16 TQAMRM384 OTD OFFSET 330kN MRM
- -
A0
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

1 32R2911 1 BRACKET 0.8
2 30R8130 1 HOUSING 0.2
3 30R8073 1 RETAINER 0.1
4 10117151 1 SENSOR 0.1
5 10102012 1 FITTING 0.1
6 01b1049 2 NUT -
7 01b1045 2 WASHER -
8 01B0954 2 BOLT -
1 7 6 5
ISOMETRIC VIEW

- - - - MASS: 1.2kg PROXIMITY GROUP DRAWING STATUS
- - - -
IF IN DOUBT- ASK
RELEASED
- - - - DRAWN BAS 05/05/17 TTU 4
-
A0
APP'D JMS 06/05/17 SHEET 1 of 1 12R5456 VER
CODE

REV
Equipment Pty Ltd

This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL MINERAL Client No. Approvals
EQUIPMENT PTY. LTD. and must not be manufactured from,
copied, or transmitted to a third party without prior written
approval from RUSSELL MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY. LTD.
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
Copyright Russell Mineral Equipment Pty. Ltd. 2016 Drawing Not to Scale DRAWN BP 28.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
Russell Mineral Equipment P/L
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
TOQUEPALA PROJECT APP'D DD 02.12.16
Dwg Status: RELEASED
RUSSELL 7 MILL RELINING MACHINE
Toowoomba QLD
B0 As Built BP DD DD 17.05.17 AUSTRALIA 4350
P. +61 7 4698 9100 RME Drawing No. Rev
A0 Approved for Construction As per Approvals F. +61 7 4639 2116
E. rme@rmeGlobal.com
W. rmeGlobal.com BLOCK DIAGRAM TQAMRM384-ELE-01 B0
Rev Description DWN CHK APP'D DATE ABN 20 010 708 406
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com 3 PHASE SCHEMATIC TQAMRM384-ELE-02 B0
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com MCC CONTROL SCHEMATIC TQAMRM384-ELE-03 B0
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com LINER CART SCHEMATIC TQAMRM384-ELE-06 B0
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com TRANSPORT PENDANT SCHEMATIC TQAMRM384-ELE-07 B0
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com BEAM & E-STOP SCHEMATIC TQAMRM384-ELE-08 B0
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com JB2 POWER & LIGHTS SCHEMATIC TQAMRM384-ELE-09 B0
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com JB2 CONTROL SCHEMATIC TQAMRM384-ELE-10 B0
DESIGN DK 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com RADIO CONTROL SCHEMATIC TQAMRM384-ELE-11 B0
DESIGN DK 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com TURNTABLE JOYSTICK SCHEMATIC TQAMRM384-ELE-12 B0
DESIGN DK 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com TURNTABLE ENABLE SCHEMATIC TQAMRM384-ELE-13 B0
DESIGN DK 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com RADIO-JOYSTICK SELECT SCHEMATIC TQAMRM384-ELE-14 B0
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com MCC TERMINAL ASSEMBLY TQAMRM384-ELE-16 B0
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com JB2 TERMINAL ASSEMBLY TQAMRM384-ELE-18 B0
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com JB1, JB2A, JB3 & JB4 TERMINAL ASSEMBLY TQAMRM384-ELE-19 B0
110V
H1 H2 HR1 S1 S2 S3
H3 H4 H5 H6
480V 60Hz Q1
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com MCC LAYOUT ASSEMBLY TQAMRM384-ELE-20 B0
S40
COT ENABLED
S22 S36
S20
MOTION WARNING
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com JB2 & CONSOLE LAYOUT ASSEMBLY TQAMRM384-ELE-21 B0
JS1 JS2
RD BU
S19
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com JOYSTICK CONTROL LAYOUT ASSEMBLY TQAMRM384-ELE-22 B0
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com BILL OF MATERIAL 1/3 TQAMRM384-ELE-25 B0
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
DESIGN DD 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
DESIGN DK 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com RME USER ERROR CODES TQAMRM384-ELE-28 B0
DESIGN DK 24.11.16
CHECK DD 02.12.16
149 Hursley Road
PO Box 100
Toowoomba QLD
W. rmeGlobal.com ABB ERROR CODES TQAMRM384-ELE-29 B0
No.:
Date: 01-NOV-2015
DATA SHEET
Three-phase induction motor - Squirrel cage rotor
Customer :
Product line : W22 Industrial Motor - High Efficiency E3
Frame : L90S
Output : 1.1 kW
Frequency : 60 Hz
Poles : 4
Full load speed : 1763
Slip : 2.06 %
Voltage : 460 V
Rated current : 2.09 A
Locked rotor current : 18.8 A
Locked rotor current (Il/In) : 9.0
No-load current : 1.21 A
Full load torque : 5.96 Nm
Locked rotor torque : 300 %
Breakdown torque : 420 %
Design : ---
Insulation class : H
Temperature rise : 80 K
Locked rotor time : 17 s (hot)
Service factor : 1.15
Duty cycle : S1
Ambient temperature : -20°C - +40°C
Altitude : 1000
Degree of Protection : IP66
Approximate weight : 23 kg
Moment of inertia : 0.00631 kgm²
Noise level : 51 dB(A)
D.E. N.D.E. Load Power factor Efficiency (%)

Bearings 6205 ZZ 6204 ZZ 100% 0.77 85.9
Regreasing interval --- --- 75% 0.69 85.0
Grease amount --- --- 50% 0.55 84.5
Notes:
m10 w22
Determining losses and efficiency according to IEC 34-2 A.
Performed by Checked
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A AA AB AC AD Notes: m10 w22

140 36.5 164 179 159
E B BB C D E
100 131 56 24j6 50
ES F G GD DA Performed by:
36 8 20 7 16j6
EA TS FA GB GF Checked:
40 28 5 13 5
H HA HB HC HF Customer:
90 9 45 182 90
HH HK K L LC W22 Industrial Motor - High Efficiency E3
106 67 10 335 381
F LL LM d1 d2 Flange
115 104 DM8 A 3,15 FF-165
LA M N P T
10 165 130 200 3.5 Three-phase induction motor 01-NOV-2015
S Angle Holes Frame L90S - IP66
12 45° 4
P01 BSF1*
3/4"*
0G2* P03 COT1*
IN OUT 3/4"*
R1*
3/4"*
R2*
3/4"*
215 bar R3*
3/4"*
R4*
1/2"*
B
D1*
0Z1* 3/8"*
G
210 bar
D P T1 P P T2 P P
COT 1 COT 2 COT BSF 1 BSF 2
3/4"*
3/4"*
0C1* 3/4"*
3/4"*
B0 0P1*
kW CURVE
BAR L/MIN
50 180
60 179
70 178
80 177
90 165
100 151
110 137
120 125
130 112
3/4"*
140 99
150 88
160 76
170 70
180 66
190 60
200 54
210 48
OG1*
1780 RPM
37 kW
210 bar 44 cm³/rev
100 cm³/rev
145L
45 L 80 °C 45L
RANDO HD-32
3/8"*
3/4"*
1-1/4"S*
WLL 2500 kg 2"S* Item Identifier Quantity Part Number Catalogue Description
0C1 1 03B3242 COOLER - OIL/AIR OK-EL5S 380-415V/50Hz 440-480V/60Hz IP66 MOTOR
ELECTRIC MOTOR 0G2 1 12R3702 MANIFOLD GROUP - PRESSURE FILTER - MACHINE ENABLE
SPECIFICATIONS 0P1 1 12R4821 PUMP GROUP - HYP 364/5T - 100/44cc
415V, 3 PHASE, 60 HZ 0Z1 1 03B0186 GAUGE - HYDRAULIC PRESSURE Ø63 250 Bar
4 POLE, 1780 RPM, IP66 OG1 1 12R4588 TANK GROUP - HYP 167L RUSSELL 7
This drawing remains the property of RUSSELL DESIGN BDS 13/12/16 SOUTHERN PERU COPPER DRAWING STATUS
MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY. LTD. and must not be RELEASED
DRAWN JMS 13/12/16 CORPORATION
manufactured from, copied, or transmitted to a third RME DRAWING NUMBER SIZE
party without prior written approval from RUSSELL CHECK SJF 16/01/16 TOQUEPALA
B0 UPDATED WITH AS-BUILT MARK-UPS SDL SP JMS 22/05/17 MINERAL EQUIPMENT PTY. LTD.
A1
A0 APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION AS PER APPROVALS APPD BDS 18/01/17 RUSSELL 7 MILL RELINE MACHINE TQAMRM384-HYD REV
Copyright Russell Mineral Equipment Pty. Ltd.
POWERPACK SCHEMATIC
Rev Description Drawn Check Appd Date TEMPLATE REVISION A0 SHEET 1 OF 3 B0
LINER CART DRIVE INNER BEAM OUTER BEAM REAR STEER FRONT STEER MACHINE DRIVE 6G2* FRONT JACKS
MOTOR
6G1* 6400 N.m 28:1
2Z1* 5A1* 5A2* 100 cm³/rev GB
DIRECTION 4A1* 6400 N.m 28:1
315 cm³/rev 11A1* 3 in
3.5 in 3.5 in GB 100 cm³/rev
1.75 in 1.75 in
6 in 5 in
254 mm 229 mm
4 in 1250 mm
MOTOR DIRECTION
4365 mm
GEARBOX TURNS OPPOSITE 7A1* 7A2*
1/2"*
1/2"*
TO MOTOR
3/4"* 3/4* 2.5 in 2.5 in
4 in 4 in
3/8"*
3/8"*
75 mm 75 mm
11B1* A01 B01 C1 C2
145 bar 4V1* 120 bar 4V2* D2 D1
3/8"*
3/8"*
3/8"*
3/8"*
180 bar 180 bar
CWEG LGN BR2 BR1
CBEG LJN 1/4"* A2 A1 1/4"*
3/8"* B2 B1 3/8"*
4B1* 3/8"* 3/8"* C2B C1B
C2 OMS315 C1
V1 V2
1/4" INTERFACE 1/4" T01
COFA XCN 210 bar 210 bar
BSPP 2 X 01-N214 BSPP
1/4"*
C2A C1A
165 bar 165 bar
1/3 TURN OPEN
145 bar
0.3 bar 0.3 bar
20 bar 20 bar 3/4"* CXED
XCN
1/3 TURN
2 bar
1.4 bar
1.4 bar
CBEG LJN
0.3 bar 0.3 bar
OPEN 7B1*
V2 V1
1-3/4 TURNS OPEN
V01 V02
3/4"*
3/4"*
2 bar 2 bar 6B1*
D B T A BR
V2 D V1
9/16" 9/16" 9/16" 2B1*
UNO UNO UNO
R2B A1 B1
TO SHEET 3* TO SHEET 3* TO SHEET 3*
OUTER BEAM CABLEVEYOR
R2A*
R1A*
3/8"
3/8"*
3/8"*
P03A*
3/8"
3/8"
3/8"
1/2"*
1/2"*
1/2"*
1/2"*
3/8"*
3/8"*
1V1* A B A B A B A B A B A B
80 bar 125 bar 140 bar 175 bar 175 bar 140 bar 210 bar 210 bar 160 bar 160 bar
25 lpm 40 lpm 5 lpm 5 lpm 25 lpm

65 lpm
215 bar
LINERCART BEAM EXTEND REAR STEER FRONT STEER MACHINE DRIVE FRONT JACKS
Item Identifier Part Number Quantity Catalogue Description

1V1 03B4161 1 VALVE - PVG 32 6-PVG 32 6-BANK BEA 125/80
P01 BSF01*
3/4"* 2B1 03B1537 1 MANIFOLD - HYD MAN S08W53A
P03 COT1* 2Z1 03B1498 1 MOTOR - HYD OMS315 Ø32 SHAFT
3/4"*
4A1 03B3152 1 CYLINDER - HYD 5" x 3" x 1250mm TR
R1* 3/4"* 4B1 03B0204 1 LINE MOUNT BODY
R2* 4V1, 4V2 03B0196 2 3:1 Pilot Ratio,Standard Counterbalance Valve.
3/4"* 5A1 03B1688 1 CYLINDER - HYD 3.5" x 1.75" x 254mm FC-FK AG
R3* 3/4"* 5A2 03B1105 1 CYLINDER - HYD 3.5" x 1.75" x 229mm AG SP
6B1 03B1112 1 MANIFOLD - MACHINE DRIVE
R4*
1/2"* 6G1, 6G2 02B2053 2 GEARBOX - WHEEL DRIVE 28:1 22kW
D1* 7A1, 7A2 03B0890 2 CYLINDER - HYD 4" x 2.5" x 75m m FOOT
3/8"*
7B1 03B1486 1 MANIFOLD - FRONT JACKS
11A1 03B3037 1 CYLINDER - HYD 5.5" x 4" x 144 5mm FC-FK
11B1 03B2741 1 MANIFOLD - BEAM REGEN S10A68B
A1
BASE HYDRAULIC SCHEMATICS
BOOM SLEW BOOM RAISE/LOWER BOOM EXTEND/RETRACT
GRAPPLE TOOL LINER LIFT GRAPPLE SLEW GRAPPLE ROLL
9A1* GB 10A1* 10A2* 11A1* 5 in
6400 N.m 22:7:1 2.75 in 12A1* 13A1* 14A1* 15A1*
1 in
96 cm³/rev 1500 mm 1600 daN.m 1600 daN.m 1600 daN.m
2 in
H38 150 deg 150 deg 150 deg
6 in 6 in 150 mm
2.5 in 2.5 in 75 bar 75 bar 70 bar 70 bar 60 bar 60 bar
685 mm 185 bar 685 mm 185 bar
2 bar
H45
B0 B0 105 bar 145 bar
1/4"*
1/4"*
12B1*
1/2"* 1/2"*
3/8"* 1/4"*
3/8"*
03B4150 T03 M01 T02 A02 M02 M03 B02 A03 M04 T05
03b4163 LEFT VIEW OF TOP VIEW OF REAR VIEW OF
8B1 GRAPPLE SLEW GRAPPLE SLEW GRAPPLE ROLL
B0 M08 M08a
M08
130 bar 80 bar T01
V03
V08
V11
115 bar 80 bar V12
V04
1/4"*
V09
100 bar 100 bar
V10 V01 V02
V05
V11
V06 V07
3/4 OPEN 2 TURNS
M09a
OPEN
2 bar
M09
M09
ABS BBS M07 A08 A01 A09 B01 A07 A06 A05 A04
3/8"*
3/8"*
1/4"*
1/2"*
3/8"*
1/2"*
1/2"*
1/4"*
1/4"*
3/8"*
1/4"*
1/4"*
1/4"*
1/4"*
A1 B1
TO SHEET 2 TO SHEET 2
7V1*
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
80 bar 80 bar 80 bar 190 bar 100 bar 140 bar 140 bar 175 bar 190 bar 190 bar 190 bar 190 bar 190 bar 190 bar
40 lpm 100 lpm 65 lpm 100 lpm 5 lpm 25 lpm 10 lpm 10 lpm
1/4"*
1/4"*
3/4"*
1/4"*
PRESSURE
SWITCH
COT ENABLE
B0 215 bar
80 bar 80 bar 180 bar 80 bar 175 bar 140 bar
Motion Warning B0
LSB LSA LSB LSA LSB LSA

BOOM SLEW BOOM R/L BOOM EXT/RET BEAM EXT/RET GRAPPLE TOOL LINER LIFT GRAPPLE SLEW GRAPPLE ROLL
7G1* Item Identifier Part Number Quantity Catalogue Description
7G1 11R0201 1 ROTARY UNION GROUP
R.U. A-PORT* A1 TO SHEET 2* 7V1 12R4826 1 VALVE GROUP
R.U. B-PORT* B1 TO SHEET 2* 8B1 12R4829 1 MANIFOLD GROUP - MRM TTU SUPER W/ POS. SENSOR BOOM
9A1 02B2411 1 GEARBOX - TURNTABLE SLEW 22.7:1 6400N.m 310DS FLANGE W/MOTOR
3/4"* P03A* 10A1, 10A2 10R9544 2 CYLINDER GROUP - BMA 2 RAISE LOWER CLEVIS 685
11A1 10R9136 1 CYLINDER GROUP - BMA 2 EXTEND RETRACT 1500
3/4"* R2A* 12A1 10R8808 1 CYLINDER GROUP - GRAPPLE TOOL
R1A*
T01* R2B TO SHEET 2* 12B1 03B3699 1 MANIFOLD - GRAPPLE TOOL
13A1, 14A1, 15A1 03B1692 3 ROTARY ACTUATOR - 16000Nm 150°
INNER BEAM CABLEVEYOR
A1
TURNTABLE HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

23R1476 - 0 - M039-H - Info Only PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

23R1476 - 0 - M039-H - Info Only PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

OPERATION, SERVICE AND PARTS MANUAL

RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine 3

4 RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

4.5 Controls on the Main Control Cabinet ............................................................................................... 66

RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine 5

6 RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

5.6.2 Grapple Inspection .......................................................................................................................... 179

RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine 7

8 RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

Copyright © Russell Mineral Equipment Pty Ltd 2017.

RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine 9

If you have any queries about the equipment, please contact:

We offer a 24 hour Help Hotline for each of our global regions:

10 RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

Access to Electronic Manuals

RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine 11

12 RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

1.1 Operational Limitations

RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine 13

14 RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

1.5 Warnings, Cautions and Notes

RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine 15

1.6 Personal Protective Equipment

1. High visability overalls or long sleeved shirt and long trousers.

2. Steel capped safety boots.

4. Safety spectacles or face shield.

6. Ear plugs or muffs.

16 RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

1.7 Falling Object Protection

Consequences for inadequate precautions are:

Severe injury or death to members of the mill relining crew.

RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine 17

18 RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

Type of Machine RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine

Owner of the Machine Southern Peru Copper Corporation

Mine Site Toquepala

Purchase Order No. M3:150141-M039

Equipment Number 293200-LH-001

RME Serial Number 12R4751-MRM384

Year of Manufacture 2017

Rated Capacity 2500 kg

2.2 Machine Vendor Data Drawings

Information Drawing or Document

Elevation - Working Range Dimensions TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293)

End Views - Mill Entry Details TQAMRM384-VDD-02 (Page 294)

Plan - Working Load Reactions TQAMRM384-VDD-03 (Page 295)

Manoeuvring and Floor Loading TQAMRM384-VDD-04 (Page 296)

Floor Interface Details TQAMRM384-VDD-05 (Page 297)

Grapple Tool Vendor Data Drawings GRAPPLE TOOL-VDD-01 (Page 298)

RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine 19

Specifications Drawing or Document

Machine Mass TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293)

Machine Lift Functions and Range TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293)

Rated Lifting Capacity TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293)

Boom and Beam Extensions TQAMRM384-VDD-01 (Page 293)

Turning Radius and Machine Extremities TQAMRM384-VDD-04 (Page 296)

Machine Trunnion Clearances TQAMRM384-VDD-02 (Page 294)

Machine-to-Floor Interface Dimensions TQAMRM384-VDD-05 (Page 297)

Electrical Schematics List of Electrical Schematics (Page 269).

Electric Motor Data Motor Data (Page 269)

Hydraulic Schematics List of Hydraulic Schematics (Page 270).

20 RUSSELL 7 Mill Relining Machine